Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents iContents INTRODUCTION… [621603]

Galaxy Dimension
Installer Manual
Honeywell Security

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
iContents
INTRODUCTION …………………………………………………………………………… 1-1
Variants …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-1
SECTION 1: QUICK SETUP ………………………………………………………….. 1-3
SECTION 2: SYSTEM ARCHTECTURE ………………………………………….. 2-1
PCB Layout ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-2
RS485 Expansion Module (GD-520 only) ………………………………………………… 2-3
System Installation and Wiring ………………………………………………………………. 2-4
Connecting the Galaxy Dimension to the PSTN………………………………………. 2-5
Connecting Additional Telecom Apparatus ……………………………………………………………….. 2-6
Line Monitoring …………………………………………………………………………………………………. …. 2-6
Stand-by Battery ……………………………………………………………………………………. 2-7
Battery Start-up ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-7
On-Board Power Supply Unit………………………………………………………………….. 2-7
Memory …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-8
RS485 Data Communication Bus (AB Lines) …………………………………………… 2-8
RS485 Wiring Configurations …………………………………………………………………. 2-8
RS485 Wiring Recommendations …………………………………………………………… 2-9
Zones ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-11
Zone Addresses …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2 -11
Wiring Zones ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. ..2-13
Wiring Multiple Detectors …………………………………………………………………….. 2-15
Wiring Keyswitches …… ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 -15
Wiring T erminator Buttons …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-16
Outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-16
Output Applications …………………………………………………………………………….. 2-17
Trigger Header …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-18
Trig 1-6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. …….. 2-18
Supply …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……. 2-18
SPI Header …………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-19
SECTION 3: PERIPHERALS …………………………………………………………. 3-1
General ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-1
Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
iiConfiguring …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-1
Addressing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-1
Connecting the RIO ………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 3-2
Configuring the RIO ……………………………………………………………………………………………… .. 3-2
RIO Outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. …… 3-3
RF RIO …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-4
Connecting the RF RIO ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3- 4
Addressing the RF RIO ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3- 5
RF RIO Programming ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-6
Configuring the RF RIO ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 -6
Power Supply Unit …………………………………………………………………………………. 3-7
Configuration …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …… 3-7
Installation Instructions ………………………………………………………………………………………… … 3-8
Battery ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. … 3-9
Battery Test …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-9
Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. …… 3-9
EN50131 Compliance …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-9
Printer Interface Module ………………………………………………………………………. 3-10
ISDN Module ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-11
Programming the ISDN Module …………………………………………………………………………….. 3-11
Ethernet Module ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-12
Configuring the Ethernet Module ……………………………… …………………………………………… 3-12
Ethernet Communication …………………………………….. ………………………………………………. 3-12
Galaxy Dimension and 2-W ay Audio …………………………………………………….. 3-13
Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……3-13
Audio Interface Module ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-1 3
MUX Module ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… .3-15
Remote Servicing Suite………………………………………………………………………… 3-17
User Management Suite ……………………………………………………………………….. 3-17
SECTION 4: KEYPADS ………………………………………………………………… 4-1
The Galaxy Mk7 Keypad/KeyProx …………………………………………………………… 4-1
General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 4-1
Power Consumption ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 4- 1
Wiring the Keypad/KeyProx ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4-2
Keypad/KeyProx Installation Procedure ……………………………………………………………………. 4-2
Self Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ….. 4-5
Keypad/KeyProx Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4-5
The Galaxy KeyProx ………………………………………………………………………………. 4-8
General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 4-8
Addressing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-8

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
iiiOperation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……. 4-8
Card T ypes……………………………………………………………………………………………………… …… 4-8
The Galaxy Dimension T ouchCenter………………………………………………………. 4-9
General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 4-9
TouchCenter Installation Procedure …………………………………………………………………………. 4-9
Configuring a TouchCenter ……………………………… …………………………………………………… 4-10
Set-up Menu …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ..4-10
TouchCenter – Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4-11Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. …. 4-11
SECTION 5: ACCESS CONTROL ………………………………………………….. 5-1
Group Based Access Control …………………………………………………………………. 5-1
User and Access T emplates …………………………………………………………………… 5-1
Time Schedules …………………………………………………………………………………….. 5-1
Door Control Module ……………………………………………………………………………… 5-2MAX3 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5-7
SECTION 6: SYSTEM OPERATION ……………………………………………….. 6-1
Menu Options………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-1
General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 6-1
The Full Menu…………………………………………………………………………………………………… …. 6-1
The Quick Menu ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. . 6-1
Menu Access …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. … 6-1
Engineer Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………… .. 6-2
Setting Options ……………………………………………………………………………………… 6-5
Setting the System Using a PIN ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-5
Cancelling the Setting …………………………………………………………………………………………… . 6-5
Unsetting the System Using a PIN……………………………………………………………………………. 6-6
Engineer Unsetting ………………………………………………………………………………………………. . 6-6
Keyswitch Setting Options ………………………………………………………………………………………. 6- 6
Setting the System with Cards/Tags/Fobs …………………………………………………………………. 6-6
Cancelling and Resetting Alarms and Alerts ……………………………………………………………… 6-7Recording of Events ……………………………………………………………………………………………… . 6-7
Overriding of Faults and Tampers……………………………………………………………………………. 6-8
Setting Features ………………………………………………………………………………………………… …. 6-8
Menu Options 11-19 …………………………………………………………………………….. 6-11
Option 11 – Omit Zones (Quick Menu Option 0) …………………………………………………….. 6-11
Option 12 – Timed Set …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-1 3
Option 13 – Part Set …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-13
Option 14 – Forced Set (Quick Menu Option 1) ………………………………………………………. 6-13
Option 15 – Chime (Quick Menu Option 2) …………………………………………………………….. 6-13

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
ivOption 16 – Instant Set …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 -13
Option 17 – Silent Part …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 -14
Option 18 – Home Set …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-14
Option 19 – All Set ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ..6-14
Display Options …………………………………………………………………………………… 6-15
Option 21 – Display Zones (Quick Menu Option 3) ………………………………………………….. 6-15
Option 22 – Display Log (Quick Menu Option 4) ……………………………………………………… 6-16
Option 23 – System ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 -17
Option 24 – Print (Quick Menu Option 5) ………………………………………………………………… 6-18
Option 25 – Access Doors ……………………………………………………………………………………. 6-19
Test Options ………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-23
Option 31 – Walk T est (Quick Menu Option 6) …………………………………………………………. 6-23
Option 32 – Outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 -25
Modify Options ……………………………………………………………………………………. 6-26
Option 41 – Time/Date (Quick Menu Option 7) ……………………………………………………….. 6-26
Option 42 – Codes (Quick Menu Option 8) …………………………………………………………….. 6-27
Option 43 – Summer (Quick Menu Option 9) ………………………………………………………….. 6-38
Option 44 – Trace ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-38
Option 45 – Timer Control …………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-39
Option 46 – Group Omit ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-43
Option 47 – Remote Access …………………………………………………………………………………. 6-44
Option 48 – Engineer access ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-50
Engineer 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-51
Option 51 – Parameters ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-51
Option 52 – Program Zones …………………………………………………………………………………. 6-71
Option 53 – Program Outputs ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-87
Option 54 – Links ……………………………………………………………………………………………….6 -104
Option 55 – Soak ……………………………………………………………………………………………….6- 107
Option 56 – Communications ……………………………….. ……………………………………………. 6-108
Option 57 – System Print …………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-151
Option 58 – Keypad …………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-152
Option 59 – Quick Menu …………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-155
Engineer 2 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-156
Option 61 – Diagnostics……………………………………………………………………………………… 6-156
Option 62 – Full Test …………………………………………………………………………………………..6- 159
Option 63 – Options ……………………………………………………………………………………………6-1 60
Option 64 – Assemble Zone ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-164
Option 65 – Timers …………………………………………………………………………………………….6-1 68
Option 66 – Pre-checks ……………………………………………………………………………………… 6-175
Option 67 – Remote Reset …………………………………………………………………………………. 6-176
Option 68 – Menu Access ………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-177
Option 69 – Integrated Access Control …………………………………………………………………. 6-178

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
vEngineer 3 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-192
Option 71 – SPI Key ……………………………………………………………………………………………6-1 92
Appendix A: Library …………………………………………………………………… A-1
Appendix B: SIA and Contact ID Event Codes ……………………………… B-1
Appendix C: SIA Event Structure ……………………………………………….. C-1Appendix D: Event Log Messages ………………………………………………. D-1
Appendix E: Site Data Storage……………………………………………………..E-1
Preparing for Storage Mode ……………………………………………………………………E-1
Enabling Storage Mode ………………………………………………………………………….E-1
Using Storage Mode ……………………………………………………………………………….E-2Leaving Storage Mode ……………………………………………………………………………E-2
Appendix F: Specifications …………………………………………………………. F-1
Panel Specifications……………………………………………………………………………….F-1
Appendix G: Declaration of Conformity ………………………………………. G-1
Compliance and Approvals …………………………………………………………………… G-1
EN50131 Compliance …………………………………………………………………………….. G-2
PD6662 Compliance ………………………………………………………………………………. G-2
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) approval ……………………………. G-2
Appendix H: Parts List Index………………………………………………………. H-1
Index ……………………………………………………………………………………..Index-1

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents
vi

1-1Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
INTRODUCTION
This manual gives full instructions required to install and program a Galaxy Dimension control panel and
associated peripherals.
Variants
The Galaxy Dimension is available in four variants: GD- 48, GD-96, GD-264 and GD-520. The differencesbetween each variant are shown in the following table:Introduction
Table 1-1. Galaxy Dimension General SpecificationFeatures GD-48 GD-96 GD-264 GD-520
Zones 16-48 16-96 16-264 16-520
Outputs (400mA) 8-24 8-48 8-132 8-260
Trigger Outputs on Flying Lead
(100mA)66 6 6
PSU 2.5A 2.5A 2.5A 2.5A
RS485 Databuses 12 2 4
Telecom onboard Y es Y es Y es Y es
RS232 Interface for online PC RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
Printer Interface RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
Ethernet option Y es Y es Y es Y es
GPRS option 3rd Party 3rd Party 3rd Party 3rd Party
Groups 81 63 2 3 2
Keypads 81 61 6 3 2
Keyprox 37 72 4
Multi-user Y es Y es Y es Y es
DCM's with 2 x wiegand
interfaces41 61 6 3 2
DCM Controlled doors 83 23 26 4
Bus mounted prox readers
(MAX)41 61 6 3 2
Access control groups (user
templates)50 50 100 100
Weekly Timer Schedules 19 35 67 67
Annual Holiday Schedules 16 32 32 32
Users 100 250 999 999
Links 64 128 256 256
Remote software update Y es Y es Y es Y es
Upload/Download Y es Y es Y es Y es
Remote service Y es Y es Y es Y es
Network downloader Y es Y es Y es Y es
Alarm monitoring Y es Y es Y es Y es
Graphics mimic Y es Y es Y es Y es
TouchCenter 12 2 4
Mimic panel Y es Y es Y es Y es
Wireless Ademco 5800 Ademco 5800 Ademco 5800 Ademco 5800
Audio Verification Channels 81 63 2 3 2
SMS Y es Y es Y es Y es

1-2Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual

1-3Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
SECTION 1: QUICK SETUP
To quickly set up a Galaxy Dimension control panel for programming follow these simple steps:
1.Connect a 1k Ω (1%) resistor across each of the zones on the panel and any RIO’s (if connected).
2.Ensure that the tamper return loop — the terminals marked as AUX TAMP/GND on the PCB — is a
complete loop.
3.Connect a keypad to the AB LINE terminals on the control panel.

Table 1-2. Terminal Connections
4.Connect a 680 Ω End Of Line (EOL) resistor across the A and B terminals of the keypad.
5.Ensure that the keypad is fitted to the wall (see Keypad Installation Procedure, Section 4 ).
6.Connect the battery before replacing the control panel lid.
7.Connect the mains wiring to the control panel. Do not switch the mains ON.
8.Replace the control panel lid and secure the fastening screws.
9.Switch on the mains voltage (230 Va.c. / 50 Hz).
10.The following sequence of events occur:
• the keypad buzzer and control panel horn (if fitted) activate for 10 – 20 seconds,
• flashing :::::::::::::::: is displayed on the keypad,
• the sounders stop and the keypad displays become blank,• the green power LED lights and the following displays on the keypad
• the default banner is then displayed on the keypad.
where: XXX is the panel type
Y .YY is the panel software revision
11.The system is now ready to be programmed. Refer to Section 6 System Operation for program-
ming details.
12. Default User code is 12345
Default Engineer code is 112233Quick Setup
ConfiguringConfiguringConfiguringConfiguringConfiguring
Please WaitPlease WaitPlease WaitPlease WaitPlease Wait
GALAXY <XXX> <VY.YY>GALAXY <XXX> <VY.YY>GALAXY <XXX> <VY.YY>GALAXY <XXX> <VY.YY>GALAXY <XXX> <VY.YY>
01:0101:0101:0101:0101:01 SUN 01 JAN SUN 01 JAN SUN 01 JAN SUN 01 JAN SUN 01 JANControl Panel
(Line 1)Keypad
B1 B
A1 A
–
+12V +

1-4Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-1SECTION 2: SYSTEM ARCHTECTURE
Figure 2-1. Galaxy Dimension System ConfigurationConfiguration
GD-48 GD-96 GD-264 GD-520
Lines 12 2 4
Keypads 8 8 per line 8 per line 8 per line
Keyproxes 3 3 (line 1)
4 (line 2)3 (line 1)
4 (line 2)3 (line 1)
7 (lines 2, 3, 4)
Touch Center 1 1 per line 1 per line 1 per line
MAX's 4 8 per line 8 per line 8 per line
DCM's 4 8 per line 8 per line 8 per line
RIO's/PSU's 4 4 (line 1)
6 (line 2)15 (line 1)
16 (line 2)15 (line 1)
16 (lines 2, 3, 4)16 zones on board
Galaxy
Line Line
12
NOTE:
The Telecom, Printer Interface, RS232, Ethernet and ISDNmodules can only be connected to line 1.If a Telecom module is attached,keypad address E cannot be connected to line 1(address E is shown as 18 on the system).If an RS232 module is attached,keypad address D cannot be connected to line 1 (address D isshown as 17 on the system).If an Ethernet module is attached,keypad address B cannot be connected to line 1 (address B isshown as 15 on the system). If an ISDN module is attached,keypad address C cannot be connected to line 1 (address C isshown as 16 on the system).Cable run 1 km (max)
Keypads
CP027/KeyproxCP028*8 outputson boardplus 6 outputson trigger headeron boardtelecomarea
NOTE:
RIOs, RF RIO's and PSU's can be mixed on the lines. Certain keypad and max addresses can be replaced by a combined keyprox unit.*NOTE:Valid addresses for thekeyprox are:Line 1 (0, 1 & 2). Line 2 (0, 1, 2, & 3 ).This sets the address for both the keypad and card reader parts of the keyprox.
*Keypads
CP027/KeyproxCP028*PSTN (comm 1)
Audio Interface
Module (1)
RS485 lineRS232Serial Port(comm 6)
8 zones4 outputs
RIO
C072
8 zones4 outputsOR
OR
ORSmart PSU
P015
8 zones4 outputs
RF RIO Module
C076
Twisted PairScreened Cable
Printer Interface A134/A161ISDN ModuleE077 (comm 3)RS232 ModuleE054 (comm 2)Telecom ModuleE062 (comm 5)
Ethernet ModuleE080 (comm 4)Touch CenterCP040
DCM C080/81*Max MX03
ORTouch
CenterCP040Line Line
3 4
Lines 2, 3 and 4 have
the same configuration
Power Unit P025
orPower RIO P026Trigger
Header
8 zones4 outputs
RIO
C072
8 zones4 outputs
Smart PSU
P015OR
OR
RF RIO Module C076OR8 zones4 outputs
Power Unit P025
orPower RIO P026DCM
C080/81*Max MX03
OR

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-2PCB LayoutPCB Layout
Figure 2-2. PCB Layout
LID
TAMP
+12V +12V +12V
+12V1 2 34 2AUX
TAMPG
N
DRXTX B2A2 A1B1
+12VPHONE LINE
ABA B
ACMICRO
PROCESSORTelecom
Socket
16 on-board zonesExternal
loudspeakerLeads for
lid tampermicroswitch
RS232 PortJumper Lead for off-walltamper switch
RS485 line 1
RS485 line 2TelecomConnect
Battery terminalsExpansion cardinterface
Horn outputvolume control
RIO 013
RIO 1GND
GND
+12V
CTS
RTSLED1(for Telecoms)
LED2 (for RS232)LK5 RS485 line 1, 680 /K57terminationLK3 RS485 line 2, 680 /K57termination
+12V 414.5+BAT-BATF1
F2
BATT
AUX3
F4AUX2 FLASHRAM1SPI
ProgramHeaderOFF WALL
TAMPER
BATTERYSTART UP
12345678SW3RIO
SWITCHEngineer socket
(RS485 Line1)
Engineer socket(RS485 Line 2)
NOTE: Fuse AUX1 controls
RS485 line 1, RIO 0 (zones 1-8)
Fuse AUX2 controls
RS485 line 2, RIO 1 (zones 1-8)
Fuse AUX3 controls an independent
12V output which can be used for acommunicator or screw.RS232 Port socketMemory
backupbattery
Pull-up switches
Relay
OutputN/O CN/CON
NOTE: Zones 1-8 (RIO 0 line 1)
Zones 1-8 (RIO 1 line 1 (switch SW3-8 OFF))
OR
Zones 1-8 (RIO 1 line 0 (switch SW3-8 ON))1 20V3 40V RIO 05 60V7 80V1 20V3 40V RIO 15 60V7 80VF3SKT2
Trigger
HeaderLK2
LK4Debug
Header
AUX1
AUX3

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-3 The 7 transistorised outputs on the Galaxy Dimension can be configured to open collectors by setting the dip
switch SW3 to the OFF position.
NOTE: Output 2 on RIO 0 (relay output) is not affected.This is a form C relay that can switch up to 1 amp
at 24 volts DC.
The following table shows which outputs are controlled by which switches.
Table 2-1. SW3 Transistorised Outputs Control
RS485 Expansion Module (GD-520 only)
The RS485 Expansion Module is attached to the GD-520 to give 2 extra RS485 (AB) lines.
This module can also be added to a GD-264 to convert it into a GD-520. Jumpers LK1 and LK2 can beremoved to disable the on-board end-of-line resistors.RS485 Expansion Module
Figure 2-3. RS485 Expansion Module(SW3) RIO Output
10 1
20 330 4
41 1
512
613
714
LID
TAMP
+12V +12V +12V
+12V1 2 34 2AUX
TAMPG
N
DRXTX B2A2 A1B1
+12VPHONE LINE
ABA B
AC
RIO 013
RIO 1GND
GND
+12V
CTS
RTS
+12V 414.5+BAT-BATF1
12345678
N/O CN/CON
1 20V3 40V RIO 05 60V7 80V1 20V3 40V RIO 15 60V7 80VSKT2
A4RS485
EXPANSIONMODULE
Jumpers
LK1 LK2
Twin
RS485lines
A3B3 B4

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-4System Installation and Wiring
The installation and wiring must be performed by a competent engineer. For permanently connected equip-
ment, a readily accessible disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. The Galaxy Dimensioncontrol panel must be connected to the a.c. mains supply (230/240 Va.c. 50 Hz) via a fused connection outletin accordance with EN60950-1: 2001
The fuse in the mains outlet must not exceed 3A.WARNING : A means of isolation from the mains supply must be provided within 2 metres of
the control panel. Where live and neutral supplies can be identified, a fused spur
with a 3 amp fuse, must be fitted on the live circuit. Where live and neutral circuitscannot be reliably identified, 3 amp fuses must be fitted to both circuits.
Route the mains cable through the hole on the right hand side of the enclosure base. Securely anchor the
cable to the box using the tie-wrap as shown in the following Figure:
Figure 2-4. Securing the Mains Cable to the Enclosure Base
Secure the panel base to the wall using three 1.5" No. 8 round head steel screws through the holes provided.
The mains cable used must be a three core type (with green/yellow earth insulation) of adequate current
carrying capacity.
Connect the mains cable to the mains terminal block as follows:
• blue wire to the terminal marked N (Neutral)
• green/yellow wire to the terminal marked (Earth)• brown wire to the terminal marked L (Live)NOTE: No other connections to the mains connector are permitted.
All wiring must be in accordance with local regulations and the installation must conform to EN60950.Installation Recommendations
Tie wrapMains cableTerminal
blockEarth wireMainstransformerAC connect
Keyhole
slot (top)
PCB
Enclosurebase
Attaching hole Attaching hole

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-5Connecting the Galaxy Dimension to the PSTN
The Telecommunications Network V oltage ( TNV) port (terminals A and B on PCB) must be permanently
connected (hard-wired) to the PSTN via a master socket, refer to Figure 2-5.System Wiring
Figure 2-5. Connecting the Galaxy Dimension to the PSTN
NOTES: 1. Terminals 1 and 2 on the Master Socket must be hard-wired to LINE A and B
terminals on the Galaxy Dimension PCB. The connection is polarity independent.
2. It is strongly recommended that the Galaxy Dimension panel is the only device on the line.3. If another device is to be connected to the line, connect the PHONE terminals on the PCB
to terminals 1 and 2 on a Secondary socket.
There are two methods of connecting the on-board Telecom Module to the PSTN:
Method 1
Using cable suitable for connection to 2.8 mm diameter screw terminals, strip back approximately 20 mm of
the outer sheath and then remove approximately 4 mm of the insulation from the wires to be connected to theGalaxy Dimension PCB.Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the Master socket across the LINE A and B terminals on the Galaxy DimensionPCB, see Figure 2-5.
Method 2
Use a standard cable with RJ11 plug on one end and plug into the telecom socket on the Galaxy DimensionPCB. Connect the other end of the cable to the Master socket as described in Method 1.
NOTE : Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) should not be used. If it is used, connect a suitable filter to the phone
line.PHONE LINE
ABA B
Incoming
PSTN LineMaster socket Secondary socket Telecom
Socket
RJ11Plug
line 1line 2 line 1
line 2

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-6Connecting Additional Telecom Apparatus
A secondary socket, allows additional telecom apparatus to be connected in series with the on-board telecom
module. Connect the PHONE terminals A and B on the PCB to the terminals on the secondary socket. SeeFigure 2-5.System Wiring (cont’d)
Line Monitoring
Under normal idle state conditions, the on-board Telecom Module monitors the PSTN line. The communica-tion status is indicated by the state of the red LED (LED1) as shown in the following table:
Table 2-2. Comms StatusLED STATE INDICATION
LED OFF No d.c. supply
ON – 01s, OFF – 0.9s Normal CommunicationSingle pulse at end of call Normal Communication
Flashing at end of alarm call Failed Communication
On during alarm monitoring,
Remote Servicing and SMSNormal Communication
Flickering during alarm monitoring,
Remote servicing and SMSPoor Communication
Flashes in time with ringing signal Line RingingPulses as each digit is dialledNormal indication when
making call

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-7Stand-by Battery
The Galaxy Dimension control panels can accommodate up to 2 x 17 Ah batteries. Ensure that the battery
connector leads on the control panel Powers Supply Unit (PSU) are connected to the correct terminals on thebattery.
CAUTION: There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
Table 2-3. Battery/Control Panel connections
Battery Start-up
The system can be powered up via the Battery Start-up jumper if there is no AC power. To do this, short
out the Battery Start-up jumper for the duration of the configuration process only. Never leave the BatteryStart-up connected or else deep discharge of the Stand-by Battery will occur.
On-Board Power Supply Unit
The on-board Power Supply Unit (PSU) supplies and monitors power to the system and peripherals. Thefollowing table shows the fuse name and value in amps.The Galaxy Dimension control panel contains four fuses. Details are given in the following table.
Table 2-4. On-board PSU Fuses
Power Monitoring Characteristics: Low battery level: 11.2V
Deep discharge protection: 10.5VOvervoltage protection: 14.7VStand-by Battery
lenaPlortnoCy rettaB
TAB-l animretev-
TAB+l animretev+
The PSU total capacity is 2.5A. Internally the PSU is split in two in order to ensure sufficient current is always
available for stand-by battery recharge. The PSU capacity is broken down as follows:
• Battery: 1.25A
• Control PCB: 0.25A
• AUX +12V: 1.00A
The PSU is available for zones/outputs and peripherals.FUSE NAME VALUE (AMPS) PROTECTS TYPE
AUX1 1.0 RS485 Line 1, RIO 0, Zones 1-8: +12V,
on-board comms20 mm, anti-surge
AUX2 1.0 RS485 Line 2, RIO 1, zones 1-8 +12V 20 mm, anti-surge
AUX3 1.0 +12V AUX3 terminal 20 mm, anti-surge
BATT 1.6 Battery 20 mm, anti-surge

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-8Figure 2-6. Daisy Chain ConfigurationMemory
The Galaxy Dimension control panel is fitted with a memory chip with its own battery backup on the main
PCB. This allows the panel to retain the system configuration, programming details and the event log for up toa year when both the mains power and standby battery have been disconnected. The memory backup batterymust be kept in place to retain the memory during a mains failure. Re-apply power, this is known as a warm
start .
To completely erase the system memory and return to the default settings, place a piece of thin card between
the retaining clip and the memory backup battery then remove all power to the PCB for one minute. Re-applypower and remove the card. This is known as a cold start .
The memory backup battery shoud be replaced every 5 years.
CAUTION: There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
CAUTION: Do not overstress the retaining clip when removing and installing the backup
battery. The clip must maintain a firm pressure on the backup battery at all times.
RS485 Data Communication Bus (AB Lines)
Communication between the Galaxy control panels and the modules attached to the system takes place on theAB lines. The communication protocol is RS 485 format. The control panel constantly monitors the modulesattached to it. A break in the communication from any of the modules generates a module tamper alarm
RS485 Wiring Configurations
The system must be wired in a daisy-chain configuration. That is the A line from the previous module is
connected to the A terminal of the current module and then on to the A line of the next module.
The RS485 ( AB) line must have a 680 Ω resistor fitted across the A and B terminals of the last module on the
line. If two lines are connected, both ends must be terminated with 680 Ω resistors and the appropriate link
(LK3 or LK5) removed.
Each AB line can run in two directions from the control panel.
• Remove link LK3 (RS485 line1) or link LK5 (RS485 line2).• Run two lines from the A and B terminals of the line.• Terminate both Ends of Line (EOL) with a 680 ohm resistor.
NOTE: It is permissable to have different configurations on each line. For example, line 1 – Daisy chain;
line 2 – twin AB daisy chain.Memory
Galaxy
ControlPanel
680 Ω
Fit LK3/LK5 on PCBA B AB
680 Ω EOLA
BKeypad/Keyprox
OR Module

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-92. The system must be wired in a daisy-chain configuration. Spur and star configurations must not
be used as they reduce the immunity to electrical interference.
3. The cable used must screened twisted pair (Part No W002 ) to connect the RS485 ( AB) line. This
would be CAT5 or Belden 8723 equivalent.Figure 2-7. Twin AB Line Daisy-Chain configuration
RS485 Wiring Recommendations
To ensure that the system communicates at the maximum level of efficiency, the following recommendations
must be adhered to:
1. The maximum number of devices on each line are:
Table 2-5. Communication DevicesRS485 Recommendations
A B A BGalaxy
Control Panel
680 Ω EOL 680 Ω EOLA
BKeypad/Keyprox
ORModuleKeypad/Keyprox
OR
Module
RemoveLK3/LK5
GD-48
(Line 1 only)GD-96
(Lines 1-2)GD-264
(Lines 1-2)GD-520
(Lines 1-4)
Keypads 8 8 per line 8 per line 8 per line
Keyprox 33 (line 1)
4 (line 2)3 (line 1)
4 (line 2)3 (line 1)
7(lines 2, 3, 4)
Touch Center 1 1 per line 1 per line 1 per line
RIO's/SPSU's 44 (line 1)
6 (line 2)15 (line 1)
16 (line 2)15 (line1)
16 (lines 2, 3, 4)
RF RIO 44 (line 1)
6 (line 2)15 (line 1)
16 (line 2)15 (line 1)
16 (lines 2, 3, 4)
MAX/DCM 4 8 per line 8 per line 8 per line
RS232 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)
Telecoms 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)
Printer 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)
ISDN 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)
Ethernet 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)
Audio Interface 1 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only) 1 (line 1 only)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-10RS485 Recommendations
4. Shielded twisted pair cable, where used, is connected to the earthing pillar on the Galaxy control
panel using the P-clip and nut supplied (refer to Figure 2-8).
5. The RS485 ( AB) line must have a 680 Ω resistor fitted across the A and B terminals of the last
module on the line. If twin lines are connected, both ends must be terminated with 680 Ω resistors and
the appropriate link on the control panel PCB must be removed (refer to figure 2-7).
6. There must only be a single AB pair of wires in each of the cables.
7. The minimum supply voltage level is 10.5 Vd.c. with 12.5 Vd.c. being the recommended working
minimum.
8. The power supply in the Galaxy control panel and remote power supplies must not be connected
in parallel.
9. The 0 V of all remote power supplies should be connected in common to the 0 V of the Galaxy
control panel.
10. Ensure that any extension loudspeakers are not wired in the same cable as an AB pair of wires.
11. Where possible, ensure that the AB cable is at least 30 centimetres away from any other cables.
12. Where possible, ensure that the AB cable does not run parallel to other cables for extended
distances (maximum 5 metres).
Figure 2-8. Connection of cable screen using P-ClipA BAB connectors
RS 485 cabledata line data line
P-clipCable screen
Nut
P-clip
Earthing pillar
(threaded)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-11Zones
The default setting for the zones on the Galaxy Dimension are as follows:
Zone 1001 = FinalZone 1002 = ExitAll remaining zones = Intruder
Zone Addresses
Each zone has a four digit address; 1004 , 4136 . The address is made up of three reference numbers as shown
in the following figure:
Figure 2-9. Zone Addresses
For example, zone 3057 is the detector connected to line 3, RIO 05, zone 7.Zone Addresses
Example: 3057
Represents Panel
Line No.Represents
RIO AddressRepresents
Zone No. 1-8 on RIO
GALAXYPANEL
1 2 3 4
RIO
ADDRESS 05ZONE 7305 7

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-12Table 2-6. Zone Address RangesZone Addressing with Onboard RIO Switch (Line 0 Switch)
The RIO switch (SW3, dipswitch 8) controls the ordering of the on-board RIO’s. This dipswitch must be set
before powering up the panel. Setting the switch to ON sets the on-board RIO1 to operate on line 0 and
allows a RIO addressed as 1 to be connected to line 1, giving a total of 15 RIO’s on a GD-264 andGD-520. The RIO switch only needs to be activated when the full compliment of RIO’s is required, or whenreplacing a Galaxy 512 panel with a power supply/RIO already using address 1.
NOTE: The RIO switch is not functional on other variants. It defaults to the Switch off configuration.
Switch off (default)
When the switch is set to this mode, the onboard RIO’s configure to the following addresses:
Onboard RIO0 Zone address range: 1 001-1008 Outputs: 1001-1004
Onboard RIO1 Zone address range: 101 1-1018 Outputs: 101 1-1014
Switch on
When the switch is set to this mode, the onboard RIO’s configure to the following addresses:
Onboard RIO0 Zone address range: 1 001-1008 Outputs: 101 1-1014
Onboard RIO1 Zone address range: 001 1-0018 Outputs: 001 1-0014RIO Switch
Panel On-Board RIO Address Range Total
on-board
ZonesMax No of
External RIO's
(Line 1)Valid External
RIO Addresses
(Line 1)Total Zone
Addresses
(Switch ON)
GD-48 1001 – 1008, 1011 – 1018 16 4 2 – 5 48
GD-961001 – 1008, 1011 – 1018 (switch off) 16 4 2 – 5
96
1001 – 1008, 0011 – 0018 (switch on) 16 5 1 – 5
GD-264 1001 – 1008, 1011 – 1018 (switch off) 16 14 2 – 9, A – F
264
1001 – 1008, 0011 – 0018 (switch on) 16 15 1 – 9, A – F
GD-5201001 – 1008, 1011 – 1018 (switch off) 16 14 2 – 9, A – F
520
1001 – 1008, 0011 – 0018 (switch on) 16 15 1 – 9, A – F

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-13Table 2-7. Double Balanced Zone Resistance and ConditionsWiring Zones
The zones on Galaxy Dimension panels can be Double Balanced (default) or End of Line. Zones can be
programmed with different resistance ranges for zone status activation (see Parameter 51.46 =
Parameters.Zone Resistance ). Refer to Table 2-7 (Double Balanced) or Table 2-8 (End of Line) for
details of the zone resistance and resulting conditions.The system default is Option 9, giving fault monitoring on1k double balanced wiring.
NOTE: The circuit debounce time (the period the zone must remain in a state to register a change in condi-
tion) is 300 milliseconds by default.Wiring Zones
Option 01 – 1k Option 03 – 2k2 Option 05 – 4k7 Option 07 – 5K6 Option 09 – 1k Fault
T amper S/C 0 – 800 0 – 1800 0 – 3700 0 -1400 0 – 800
Low Res 800 – 900 1800 – 2000 3700 – 4200 1400 – 2800 800 – 900Normal 900 – 1200 2000 – 2500 4200 – 5500 2800 – 8400 900 -1200
High Res 1200 – 1300 2500 – 2700 5500 – 6500 8400 – 9800 1200 – 1300
Open 1300 – 12000 2700 – 12000 6500 – 19000 9800 – 12600 1300 – 3500Fault – – – – 3500 – 4500
Masked 12000 – 19000 12000 – 15000 19000 – 22000 12600 – 22000 4500 – 19000
T amper O/C 19000 – infinity 15000 – infinity 22000 – infinity 22000 – infinity 19000 – infinity
Figure 2-10. Option 09 – Double balanced 1k Fault Monitoring WiringZone 1k
100 mTamper N/C1k
Alarm N/C Fault N/C3kOption 09 – 1k Fault Double-balanced (default)
The wiring in Figure 2-10 should be used if the detector uses combined fault and mask signalling. A mask
condition is generated if an alarm and fault are signalled at the same time. Alternatively, if the detector hasseperate fault and mask indications then the wiring in Figure 2-11 should be used.
ZoneTamper N/C1k
100 mAlarm N/C Fault N/C1k 3k 12k
Anti-Mask N/C
Figure 2-11. Option 09 – Double balanced 1k Fault/Mask Monitoring Wiring
NOTE: N/C = Normally Closed.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-14Figure 2-12. Option 10 – End of Line Zone/Detector wiringOption 10 – 1k Fault End-Of-Line
The wiring in Figure 2-12 should be used if the mode is end-of-line. Fault and mask indications can only be
signalled if the detector has seperate fault and mask indications.
ZoneTamper N/C1k
100 mAlarm N/C Fault N/C3k 12k
Anti-Mask N/C
When this wiring mode is employed, only one detector which can report fault conditions should be connected
to the zone. A maximum of two detectors or contacts of any type should be connected to a zone when thismode is selected. It is recommended that zone cable lengths are kept below 100m in this configuration.
NOTE: The recommended maximum cable run from a zone to a detector is 500 metres in all other configu-
rations.Table 2-8. End of Line Zone Resistance and ConditionsWiring Zones (cont’d)
When this wiring mode is employed, only one detector which can report fault conditions should be connected
to the zone. A maximum of two detectors or contacts of any type should be connected to a zone when thismode is selected. It is recommended that zone cable lengths are kept below 100m in this configuration.
NOTE: The recommended maximum cable run from a zone to a detector is 500 metres in all other configu-
rations.
Option 02 – 1k Option 04 – 2k2 Option 06 – 4k7 Option 08 – 5k6 Option 10 -1k Fault
T amper S/C 0 – 800 0 – 1800 0 – 3700 0 – 1400 0 – 800
Low Res 800 – 900 1800 – 2000 3700 – 4200 1400 – 2800 800 – 900
Normal 900 – 1200 2000 – 2500 4200 – 5500 2800 – 8400 900 – 1200
High Res 1200 – 1300 2500 – 2700 5500 – 6500 8400 – 9800 1200 – 1300Fault – – – – 1300 – 4500
Masked 1300 – 12000 2700 – 12000 6500 – 19000 9800 – 19000 4500 – 19000Open 12000 – infinity 12000 – infinity 19000 – infinity 19000 – infinity 19000 – infinity

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-15Wiring Keyswitches
Latching or spring loaded keyswitches can be used to set and unset the Galaxy Dimension panels; option
52 = PROGRAM ZONES has provision to accommodate both types of transition.
If the keyswitch latches, the transition from 1 k Ω to 2 k Ω initiates the setting procedure of an unset system,
the transition from 2 k Ω to 1 k Ω instantly unsets a set system. If the system is already set, then the transition
from 1 k Ω to 2 k Ω has no effect. If the system is unset, the transition from 2 k Ω to 1 k Ω has no effect. This
is programmed as a 7 Keyswitch in the PROGRAM ZONES option.
If the keyswitch is spring-loaded (returns to its normal position), the transition from 1 k Ω to 2 k Ω initiates the
setting procedure of an unset system and instantly unsets a set system, the transition from 2 k Ω to 1 k Ω – the
return to the normal position – has no effect. This is programmed as a Keyswitch in the PROGRAM
ZONES option.Figure 2-13. Zone to Multiple Detector WiringZoneAlarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C TAMP
1k 1k 1k 1k 1k
1% 1% 1% 1%1%N/C
500 m(10 max)Wiring Zones (cont’d)
Wiring Multiple Detectors
Multiple detectors can be wired into a single zone when using preset 1 as shown in the following Figure. The
maximum number of detectors that can be connected to a single zone is ten.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-16Outputs
The Galaxy Dimension control panel on-board outputs are detailed in the following table:
Table 2-9. OutputsFigure 2-14. Terminator and Keyswitch Zone WiringWiring Terminator Buttons
Zones programmed as Push-Set (terminator) buttons can be open going closed (2 k Ω to 1 k Ω) or closed
going open (1 k Ω to 2 k Ω). The first activation of the terminator button initialises its status to the system.
NOTE: The first activation of a terminator may not set the system as this can be the initialisation routine. If
the system continues setting, push the button again. The system will set on the second push. Thisinitialisation only occurs on the first setting. All subsequent setting routines set on the first push of theterminator.
The wiring of the terminator and keyswitch zone type is shown in the following figure:Terminator Zone Wiring
sserddAtuptuO
tluafeD
noitcnuFepyTg nitaRetatSlamroN
)pu-llup3k3htiw(tluafeDe lbanE0eniL
10011 001s lleBd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
20012 001e bortSe loPelgniS
revOegnahC
)OCPS(yaleRA1,V03d esigrene-eD
30013 001A Pd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
40014 001t eseRd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
11011 100t eSd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
21012 100r edurtnId esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
31013 100m rifnoCd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoP
41014 100t eseRd esirotsisnarTA m004,V21e vitisoPKeyswitch
zone
Push-set
zone1k to unset, 2k to set
1k 1%
Open – Closed
1k
1k 1k 1k
500mOR Closed – Open
1%1%
1%1%

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-17Figure 2-16. Single Pole Change–Over Relay Output Configuration and Typical applicationFigure 2-15. Output Configuration and Typical ApplicationsOutput Applications
The outputs on the Galaxy panels, with the exception of the SPCO relay output, are transistorised outputs;
negative applied (positive removed) by default. These supply up to 400 mA and can be used to drive thenecessary output devices.
NOTE: The polarity of each output can be changed using option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUTS
Note: For the appropriate 3k3 Ω pull-up resistor refer to DIP switch SW3 (Table 2-1).
The relay output is a single pole change over; this can be used to drive output devices that require a clean set
of contacts, isolated from the output voltage.Output Applications
Single Pole
Change – 0verrelay contactsNormally
closed
Normally openHorn
+12 V
0 V+12 V
3k3Ω1kΩ (typical)
1kΩ
1kΩ0 V
Switch out 3k3 Ω
to give open collector Typical Applications
A) LED
Output
B) Bell
Output
C) Output used to trigger zone
OutputLED
+12 V
+ 12 V
1%
1%Output must be
open collectorzoneBell
OutputTransistorised Output
*
*NOTE: If the output used is one of the panel's
on-board outputs, then substitute this resistorwith a 680 Ω resistor.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-18Trigger Header
The Trigger Header on the Galaxy Dimension is a set of pins that consist of programmable outputs for an
external communication module. The connection is via an optional ribbon cable.
Trig 1-6
There are six trigger outputs, that can be used as communication triggers, but can also be used for any otherpurpose. By default these outputs are programmed as positive. They are designed to sink current (to 0V) notsource current (from 12V). The function of these outputs are as follows:
The function of the trigger outputs can be programmed in menu option 53 = Program Outputs .
Supply
A 100 mA, 12V output is also provided. This output is fused by the on-board AUX3 FUSE (F2).
Not UsedNot Used
GND+12V
Trig 1Trig 2Trig 3Trig 4Trig 5Trig 6Not UsedNot Used
Figure 2-17. Trigger HeaderTrigger Header
Table 2-10. Trigger Output functionsOutput
AddressDefault
functionCurrent (mA)
0001 Fire 100
0002 Panic 1000003 Intruder 100
0004 Set 100
0005 Omit 1000006 Confirm 100

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-19SPI Header
The SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) key is an engineering peripheral used for copy/overwriting programming
data and carrying out software upgrades.
Fitting the SPI Key
The SPI key is fitted directly on to the Galaxy Dimension control panel.
CAUTION: Always power down the panel BEFORE removing or connecting the SPI key.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the SPI key. Never “hot-plug” the SPIkey.
The SPI Key has a 10-way connector. These locate on to the 10 pins of the SPI Program Header
(see Figures below).
NOTE: The SPI Key should only be fitted in the direction shown in Figure 2-19.
SPI Key
Control
Panel(part view)
SPIProgramHeaderFittedhere
10-way
connector
Hingedcap
Figure 2-19. Location of SPI Key on Program Header Figure 2-18. SPI Key
1. Release the hinged cap to expose the 10-way connector.
2. Plug the SPI Key on to the Program Header on the Galaxy Dimension control panel.
Removing the SPI Key
CAUTION: Always power down the panel BEFORE removing or connecting the SPI key.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the SPI key. Never “hot-plug” the SPIkey.
1. Remove the SPI Key from the Program Header on the Galaxy Dimension control panel.
2. Secure the hinged cap to protect the 10-way connector.SPI Key

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
2-20

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-1SECTION 3: PERIPHERALS
General
The following peripherals can be connected to the Galaxy Dimension panel:
All bus lines: Mk7 Keypad/Keyprox; TouchCenter; MAX3; Door Control Module (DCM); Remote Input
Output module (RIO); Power Supply Unit (PSU).
Bus line 1 only: Telecom; RS232; ISDN; Ethernet.
Wiring
Th following table shows the wiring between the Galaxy panel and the different peripherals.RIOs
Table 3-1. Peripheral Wiring to Galaxy Panel
* Do not connect +12V terminals between panels and remote power supplies.
Configuring
New peripherals will be configured onto the system at system power up or on leaving programming mode.
Changes to peripheral addresses will only take effect when the peripheral is re-powered.
Addressing
The addresses on most peripherals isset by either jumpers or a rotaryswitch. These must be set before the
system is powered up. The tableopposite shows the available peripheraladdresses.
NOTES:
1 A single TouchCenter can be
fitted to each bus line.
2 If RIO 2 on-board is set to line 0
(dip switch 8), then the firstexternal RIO can use address 1to give 8 extra zones whereneeded.
Table 3-2. Galaxy Dimension Peripheral AddressesPanel Keypad/-
KeyproxTouch
CenterRIO/DCM PSU Telecom RS232 ISDN Ethernet
+12V + + + X* +12V +12V +12V +
GND – – – 0V – – GND –
A A G A AAAA AB B Y B BBBB B
Valid Addresses
Peripheral Line GD-48 GD-96 GD-264 GD-520
Mk7 Keypad 1
2
3-40-2, B-F
–
-0-2, B-F
0-2, B-F
-0-2, B-F
0-6, F
-0-2, B-F
0-6, F
0-6, F
Mk7 Keyprox 1
2
3-40-2
–
-0-2
0-3
-0-2
0-3
-0-2
0-6
0-6
To uc hC e nt e r11
2
3-40-2
–
-0-2
0-3
-0-2
0-3
-02
0-6
0-6
RIO/PSU 1
2
3-42-5
–
-22-5
0-5
-22-9, A-F
0-9, A-F
-22-9, A-F
0-9, A-F
0-9, A-F
MAX/DCM Reader 1
2
3-40-3
–
-0-3
0-3
-0-3
0-3
-0-7
0-7
0-7
T elecom 1 (E) (E) (E) (E)
RS232 1 (D) (D) (D) (D)ISDN 1 (C) (C) (C) (C)Ethernet 1 (B) (B) (B) (B)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-2Connecting the RIO
The RIO can only be connected to the system while engineer mode is accessed. The RS485 ( AB) line of the
Galaxy RIO must be wired in parallel (daisy-chain configuration) with the RS485 ( AB) line of any keypads
connected to the system. The RIO requires 12 Vd.c. (range 10.5 to 16.0 V) and 40 mA. This can be sup-plied from the control panel power supply or from a remote power supply if the distance causes a largevoltage drop on the cable.
NOTE: A Power RIO can be fitted in place of a RIO.
Connect the RIO terminals as follows:
+12 V (either control panel, keypad or remote power supply);
–0 V or ground (either control panel, keypad or remote power supply);
A to the A terminal of the previous module (or control panel if RIO is the first on the line);
B to the B terminal of the previous module (or control panel if RIO is the first on the line).
NOTE: If the RIO is the last module on the line, connect a 680 Ω EOL resistor across the A and B termi-
nals.
Configuring the RIO
The added RIO is configured into the system on exiting from engineer mode. If the message XX Mod Added
[<],[>] To View is displayed, the system has recognised that a new module is present. Press the A or B keys
to confirm that the RIO has been added. If this message is not displayed or the RIO is not on the list of addedmodules, then the RIO is not communicating with the control panel or has been set to the same address as theRIO already connected to the system.
The flash rate of the red LED (LED1) on the RIO indicates the status of the communication with the control
panel – refer to the following Table:
etaRhsalFg ninaeM
FFO9.0/NO1.0s noitacinummoclamroN
FFOy lppus.c.doN
FFO5.1/NO5.1m etsysotniderugifnocneebtonsahOIR
FFO2.0/NO2.0m etsyshtiwnoitacinummoctsolsahOIR
FFO1.0/NO9.0s noitacinummocroopyreV
Table 3-3. RIO LED Flash Rates
Zones
The Galaxy RIO has eight programmable zones. These default to INTRUDER . Each zone is Double
Balance monitored with a 1 k Ω resistor in series with the zone detector and a 1 k Ω (1%) resistor in parallel
across the detector switch. The change to 2 k Ω (1%) resistance registers the zone as open/alarm.RIO

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-3RIO Outputs
The RIO has four transistorised outputs. Each output is connected to +12 V via a 3k3 Ω pull-up resistor
(refer to Table 3-4). When an output is activated, the load is switched to the negative supply voltage (groundor 0 V) of the RIO. The current available from each output is 400 mA.
The default functions and pull-up resistors of each RIO output, when connected to a Galaxy are shown in the
following Table:
.oNtuptuOn oitcnuFr otsiseRpu-lluP
1s lleB1 R
2e bortS3 R
3A P5 R
4t eseR7 R
Table 3-4. RIO Output Default FunctionsRIO Outputs

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-4RF RIO
The Galaxy Radio Frequency (RF) RIO module is an optional add-on to the existing Galaxy product range.
The module acts as an RF receiver for the Ademco 868MHz transmitter range.
Features
The RF RIO contains the following features:
• Support for up to 32 RF zones (dependent upon panel type)
• Support for up to 30 RF keyfobs• 4 transistorised outputs
Figure 3-1. RF RIO PCB Layout
Connecting the RF RIO
The RS 485 (AB) line of the RF RIO must be wired in parallel (daisy chain configuration) with the RS 485
(AB) line of the keypad connected to it. The RF RIO requires 12 V d.c. (range 10.5 to 16.0 V) and 55 mA.This can be supplied from the control panel power supply or from a remote power supply if the distancecauses a large voltage drop on the cable.RF RIO
1234Outputs Panel Keypad
BA – + BA – + 1234Outputs Panel Keypad
BA – + BA – + 1234Outputs Panel Keypad
BA – + B A – +
Tamper
link
ProgrammingSwitchProcessorProgrammingKeypad Socket
RotaryAddress SwitchSW1SW2
TamperSwitchLED1
Retaining SlotLK1R7 R5 R3 R1
SW6Pull-up
Resistors
SW3
Rev 1.0

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-5Table 3-5. RF RIO Connections
Note: If the RF RIO is the last Module on the line, connect a 680 Ω resistor across the A and B terminals.
Outputs
The RF RIO has four transistorised outputs. Each output is connected to +12 V via a 3k3 Ω pull-up resistor
(refer to Table 3-6 RF RIO Connections ). When an output is activated, the load is switched to the negative
supply voltage (ground or 0 V) of the RF RIO. Each output is capable of supplying 400 mA.The default functions and pull-up resistors of each RF RIO output, when connected to a Galaxy are shown inthe following Table:
Table 3-6. Output Functions
NOTE: The number of pull-up resistors may vary with different hardware revisions.
RF RIO Tamper
Switch SW2 on the RF RIO acts as a tamper if the Tamper Link (LK1) is missing. Removing the lid from the
RF RIO enclosure activates the RF RIO tamper alarm if the system is not in Engineer Mode. The tamperswitch can be bypassed by fitting a 0 Ω link to LK1.
Addressing the RF RIO
The Galaxy RF RIO must be given unique addresses before it is connected to a power supply. This unique
address is selected using the 16-way Rotary Address Switch (SW1). The address selected will act as thebase address for the RF RIO. Subsequent addresses will bebase address + 1, base address + 2, base address + 3. For example:Base address = 2 followed by 3, 4 and 5.Connect the RF RIO terminals in accordance with the following Table:RF RIO (cont’d)
lanimreTOIRFR. ..otdetcennoC
+) ylppusrewopetomerrodapyek,lenaplortnocta(V21+
– )ylppusrewopetomerrodapyek,lenaplortnocta(dnuorgroV0
Alortnocehtro(enilehtnoeludomsuoiverpehtfolanimretAehtoT
)enilehtnoeludomtsrifehtsiOIRFRehtfilenap
Blortnocehtro(enilehtnoeludomsuoiverpehtfolanimretBehtoT
)enilehtnoeludomtsrifehtsiOIRFRehtfilenap
.oNtuptuOt luafeD
noitcnuFrotsiseRpu-lluP
1s lleB3 4R
2e bortS7 3R
3A P3 3R
4t eseR3 2R

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-6Address Ranges
This option allows the programming of the RIO addresses, which are to be simulated by the RF RIO.
For example, if the RF RIO being programmed supports 32 zones (4 RIO addresses), and the base address,programmed at the hexi-decimal rotary switch is 02, the available addresses would be 02, 03, 04, 05. How-ever, you may want to only respond as RIO addresses 02, 04. The remaining addresses should be disabledand will not respond to commands from the control panel. The base address is enabled by default. All otheraddresses are disabled by default. Module status on the RF RIO such as lid tamper,will be reported to the panel using the address set on therotary switch.
RF RIO Programming
Programming of the RF RIO is achieved by connecting a Galaxy Mk7 keypad directly to the RF RIO at theProgramming Keypad Socket or the Keypad Connector Block. The Keypad is not part of the Galaxy net-work and must be addressed as 0.
Note : To program RF devices, please refer to RF RIO Module, Installation and Programming
Instructions, (II1-0076) supplied with the RF RIO.
Configuring the RF RIO
The RF RIO is configured into the system in the same way as a standard RIO. Refer to standard RIO instruc-
tions for further details.RF RIO (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-7Figure 3-2. Power Supply UnitPower Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
The Galaxy Dimension Power Supply Unit is available in 2 variants.
The Galaxy Power RIO consists of a Power Block and a Control Unit that includes an on-board RIO.
The Galaxy Power Unit consists of a Power Block and a Control Unit without the on-board RIO.
WARNING: There are lethal voltages present in the Power Block. Remove mains power from
the Power Block before handling it.
Each variant can be integrated with all Galaxy Dimension control panels. The number of Power Units or
Power RIO’s that can be used on a system is limited by the number of RIO’s that can be added to each panel.
Configuration
The Galaxy Power Supply Unit (PSU) consists of 2 modules, the Power Block and the Control Unit. ThePSU can be connected to the Galaxy Dimension control panel via the RS485 (AB) line. The PSU can be usedin place of a standard RIO to overcome power problems that arise when the additional RIO is fitted distant tothe control panel.A 6-way jumper lead connects the Power Block to the Control Unit.The PSU has 8 zones and 4 outputs. Each PSU takes one of the 4 RIO address (2 – 5). Addressing is identi-cal to that described for RIO Modules.The 4 outputs are switched 0V (0V active). Without the jumper links (LK1-4) fitted, the outputs will float inthe OFF state. They can apply a +12V signal, if required, by fitting the appropriate pull-up jumper supplied.LK5 will short out the off-wall tamper if it is not used.The SLA VE and E/E links must be in place for normal operation.
FAULT OP AC: This is an open collector transistor which is normally off. The output is activated by an AC
failure.FAULT OP BAT: This is an open collector transistor which is normally off. The output is activated by a
Battery Low or Battery Fail condition.FAULT OP POWER: This is an open collector transistor which is normally off. The output is activated by
low voltage present in +12V1, +12V2 or +14.5V .

11/2 233/4 455/6 677/8 8
Zones 1-8HEATSINK
Comms
Line
OutputsRotary
AddressSwitch
ACBATPWR 0VOP1OP2OP3OP4LID
TAMPOW
TAMP
+14.5
0V
+12V1
A(DO)
B(DI)F1
F4
F3
F2
LK1LK2LK3LK4-BAT+BATAC/FBT0V14.50V13.8
LED1
(comms)LED2(AC)
Control Unit+12V20V0V
FAULT OPOff-wall
Tamper
From
PowerBlockBell-Box
connectionLK5
LK10
SLAVE
E/EMains
Terminal Block
PowerHeaderTo Control
UnitPower Block
NEUTRAL
LIVE13.8V
0V
14.5V
0V
BT
AC/F
WARNING: The Power Block PCB
is connected to mains voltage. Alwaysdisconnect mains supply for at least1 minute before removing the box lid.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-8Power Supply Unit (cont’d)
Figure 3-3. Enclosure Base
2. Secure the panel base to the wall using three 1.5" No. 8 round head steel screws through the holes
provided.
The mains cable used must be a three core type (with green/yellow earth insulation) of adequate current
carrying capacity.
3. Connect the mains cable to the mains terminal block as follows:
• blue wire to the terminal marked N (Neutral)
• green/yellow wire to the terminal marked (Earth)• brown wire to the terminal marked L (Live)
NOTE: No other connections to the mains connector are permitted.
All wiring must be in accordance with local regulations and the installation must conform to EN60950.
4. Power up by applying mains first. This unit can be powered up from the battery by momentarily shorting
LK10. Never leave LK10 connected, as deep discharge of the battery will occur. LK10 is for start-uponly.Installation Instructions
The installation and wiring must be performed by a competent engineer. The Galaxy Dimension Power SupplyUnit must be connected to the a.c. mains supply (230/240 Va.c. 50Hz) via a fused connection outlet. The fusein the mains outlet must not exceed 3A.The Galaxy Dimension Power Supply Unit comes installed in the metal enclosure base. The installation proce-dure of the panel base is as follows:1. Route the mains cable through the hole on the right hand side of the enclosure base. Securely anchor
the cable to the box using the tie-wrap as shown in the following Figure:
Tie wrapMains cableTerminal
blockKeyhole
slot (top)
Enclosure
base
Attaching hole Attaching holeControl
UnitPower
Block
Off-Wall
Tamper
Micro-switchLid Tamper
Microswitch
6-way jumper lead
from power blockto control unit

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-9Battery
The minimum capacity battery to supply the PSU is 1x 7Ah. The maximum capacity battery to supply the
PSU is 2 x 17Ah.
Battery Test
A battery test on full load is automatically performed once an hour and during the Engineer Mode exitingprocedure. If the battery voltage falls to 10 V while the Power Supply Unit is running on the battery, then it isautomatically disconnected to prevent deep discharge of the battery.
Specifications
Electrical (based on 34 Ah battery and UK grade 3 compliance)
Input voltage: 230V a.c. (+10%/-15%) @50Hz
Output voltage (nominal): 13.8V & 14.5V
Output current (max): 3.0A
Operating temperature: -10 deg C to +40 deg C
Aux1 & Aux2
Output voltage (nominal): 13.8V
Output current (max): 0.75A each
14.5V Output (French variant only)
Output voltage (nominal): 14.5V
Output current (max): 0.15A (when using this current, the AUX1 & AUX2 currents will
be reduced by an equivalent amount).
Battery charge current (max): 1.4A
Maximum ripple voltage: less than 100mV
Fuses
F1 (14.5V) 500mA – 20mm anti-surge
F2 (Battery) 1.6A – 20mm anti-surgeF3 ( 12V Aux1) 1.0A – 20mm anti-surge
F4 (12V Aux2) 1.0A – 20mm anti-surge
EN50131 Compliance
This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with EN50131-6 and PD6662:2004.
Security Grade – 3Environmental Class – IIPower Supply Type – APower Supply Unit (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-10Table 3-7. Printer Protocol SettingsPrinter Interface Module
The Printer Interface module allows the Galaxy to be connected to a serial printer and the contents of the
event log and the programming details of the system to be printed out. The module is available with either a:
• 25 way sub D type RS232 serial connector (part number A161 )
OR
• 6 pin DIN plug (part number A134 )
The printer must have a serial interface port. The printer protocol must be set to:Printer Interface
Protocol Setting
Start Bit ON
Stop Bit ON
Word Length 8 Data Bits
Parity NoneBaud Rate 1200

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-11ISDN Module
The ISDN Module is an optional add-on to the existing Galaxy product range. It connects directly to the
Galaxy RS485 communication bus, allowing signalling and remote servicing over an ISDN network. TheISDN Module is housed inside the Galaxy enclosure in the same way as the existing Telecom Module.The ISDN Module supports the following features:
• Full existing Galaxy Telecom Module functionality
• Analogue/digital/X.25 communication
• Support for existing DTMF, SIA, Contact ID and Microtech signalling formats in addition to two
receiver specific X.25 protocols
• Hardware and software line snatch
• Comprehensive line fail detection and reporting• Two-way communication using B-Channel and D-Channel.
The ISDN Module is allocated keypad address C on line 1 of the panel, and reports itself as Comm Mod 3.
As a result of the addition of the ISDN Module, keypad address C is not available on line 1. If this keypad isrequired, the ISDN Module should be removed.
Figure 3-4. ISDN PCB Layout
The position of components on the ISDN PCB may vary with different hardware revisions.
Programming the ISDN Module
The ISDN module is programmed from the Galaxy Dimension control panel using menu option
56 – Communications . The menu is allocated as option 3 after the Int. Telecom and Ext. RS232 Modules.ISDN Module
PROCESSOR
12V GND RS485ISDN IN ISDN OUT
PROMJP3Jumper
LinksLED's
D22 D23
IMOD 1 Rev 4JP2 JP1

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-12Ethernet Module
The Ethernet Module is an optional add-on to the Galaxy control panel. It is a highly intelligent and compact
module, combining alarm signalling, remote servicing and integrated facilities over Ethernet LAN and/or WAN.The Ethernet Module connects to 10 Base T Ethernet networks both supporting UDP/IP and TCP/IPprotocols.The Ethernet module supports the following features:• Full alarm signalling on SIA• Microtech protocol signalling with Event Monitoring Software• Remote servicing via remote servicing softwareEthernet Module
Figure 3-5. Ethernet PCB Layout
NOTE: The position of components on the Ethernet PCB may vary with different hardware revisions
Configuring the Ethernet Module
The added Ethernet Module is configured into the system on exiting from engineer mode and is allocated
keypad address 15 (B). If the message XX Mod Added [<],[>] To View is displayed, the system has
recognised that a new module is present. Press the A or B keys to confirm that com 4 has been added. If
this message is not displayed or the Ethernet Module is not on the list of added modules, then the EthernetModule is not communicating with the control panel.
The flash rate of the red LED (LED3) on the Ethernet Module indicates the status of the communication with
the control.
Ethernet Communication
The green LED (LED1) is illuminated when the Ethernet Module is connected to Ethernet.The amber LED (LED2) flashes when the Ethernet Module is sending or receiving data.
For further information regarding the Ethernet Module, refer to Ethernet Module, Installation Instructions
(II1-0080).Processor ProgrammingHeader
Engineer
Socket
S+-AB
LineProcessor
SKT1 SKT2LED1LED2
Rev. 1.0LED3

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-13Audio Control
Galaxy Dimension and 2-Way Audio
Introduction
The Galaxy Dimension allows multiple audio channels to be linked to the intruder system in order to provide
audio verification following an alarm activation. This will allow sound from the area of the alarm activation tobe transmitted to the Alarm Receiving Centre with the alarm signal. This can be recorded audio captured atthe time of the activation as well as live audio. Depending on the set-up, it may be possible for the operator atthe receiving centre to talk back to the site. An Audio Interface Module is required to enable audio on theGalaxy. This allows up to two audio channels to be connected. If further channels are required, the audiosystem can be expanded using the MUX modules. Each alarm group on the Galaxy can have one audiochannel assigned to it.
Audio Interface Module
The Audio Interface Module is connected to the Galaxy RS485 line to allow the panel to control the audiofunction and connected to the PSTN line to allow it to transmit the audio signals to the Alarm Receiving Cen-tre.
For expansion using MUX modules, the Audio Interface Module has connections for a high speed digital
audio bus in order to connect the MUX modules. Up to three speaker-mic devices, such as the TP800, canbe connected to each audio channel.
The Audio Interface Module acts as the master to a dedicated Audio RS485 line on to which 8 off-board
Mux Modules can be connected.
Figure 3-6. Interface PCB
PHONE LINE
ABA BTelecom
Socket
TelecomConnectSKT1Debug Header
LK4LK3
GND+12VGNDSPAREAUDIO
AB ABGALAXY PL3 PL6
CMD 2
TMP 2
SPK 2
MIC 3
GND
+4.5V
CMD 1
TMP 1
SPK 1
MIC 1
LK2F1 PL2
Jumper lead
RS485termination
Engineer HeaderAudio Bus
RS485
AudioBus
Engineer Header
RS485 line
Galaxy RS485 lineOff-wall Tamper
microswitch Fuse for+4.5V
Audio ChannelTerminals (2)Audio Expansion
Header
DiagnosticLED's
SW3NOTE: Audio ExpansionHeader is not currentlyused – it is for futureproduct development.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-14Connecting the Audio Interface Module to the PSTN
The Audio Interface Module must be connected to the Galaxy panel PCB as in the following diagram.Audio Control (cont’d)
TP800/TP2-800GY Connection
The following table details the terminal connections
of the TP800 speaker unit to the Audio Interface:Figure 3-7. Audio Interface connected to PSTN
Connecting Microphones and Speakers
The Audio channels can work with most line-level audio equipment. Microphones must have a pre-amplifier
that delivers audio or can deliver audio at line level (3V peak to peak). The audio card can transmit audio tospeakers with their own amplifier which accepts line level signals. Please see any instructions with the Micro-phone device regarding the adjustment of sensitivity. The Galaxy Audio system can be used with the followingHoneywell audio devices:
TP800/TP2-800GY: Speaker and Microphone unit
IS215TCE-MIC: PIR detector with built-in microphone
DT7450-MIC: Dual Tech detector with built-in microphone
Link AP to VS-
to completetamper circuitAddressing
The AudioInterface has a fixed module address.
Mounting
the Audio Interface Module can be mounted in two ways:• above the control panel PCB using a specially designed mounting plate.• inside a standard RIO box separate from the control panel.
Table 3-8. TP800/TP2-800GY
Connections to Audio InterfaceIS215TCE-MIC/DT7450-MICConnection
Table 3-9. Detector Connections to
Audio InterfacePHONE LINE
ABA BGalaxy Panel PCBPHONE LINE
ABA BAudio Interface PCB
Extension Phone
Incoming
PSTN Line30 metres maximum from
panel to Audio Interface
Audio Interface TP800/TP2-800GY
GND VS-
+4.5V VS+
CMD CMD
SPK RML
MIC ECOUT
TMP AP
APAudio Interface IS215TCE-MIC/DT7450-
MIC
GND –
12V +
MIC M
GRD G

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-15Audio Control (cont’d)
MUX Module
The MUX Module allows four additional audio channels to be connected. It is connected to the RS485
Audio Bus and acts as a slave module to the Audio Interface.Each audio channel can have three standard speaker-mic devices such as the TP800 connected.
Figure 3-8. Mux Module PCB
Addressing
The Mux Module must be given a unique address before it is connected to a power supply. This address is
selected using the 16-way Rotary address Switch (SW1). Valid addresses are 0 – 7.
Connecting the MUX Module to the Audio Interface
The MUX Module is connected to the Audio Interface via the RS485 Audio Bus. The following table showsthe connections.
Table 3-10. Mux Connections
Connecting Microphones and Speakers
The MUX module is connected to microphones and speakers as per the Audio Interface. See table 3-8.NOTE: The MUX module can either be supplied with DC power from the Audio Interface or from a local
Power Supply Unit (eg Smart). See Figure 3-8.Debug Header
LK4LK3
CMD 4
TMP 4
SPK 4
MIC 4
GNDSPAREAUDIO
ABPL6Rotary
AddressSwitchGND
+4.5V
CMD 3
TMP 3
SPK 3
MIC 3
CMD 2
TMP 2
SPK 2
MIC 3
GND
+4.5V
CMD 1
TMP 1
SPK 1
MIC 1
F1 PL2
Jumper lead
RS485termination
Engineer HeaderAudio Bus
RS485
AudioOff-wall Tamper
microswitchFuse for+4.5V
Audi Channel Terminals (4)Audio Expansion
Header (for futureproduct development)
DiagnosticLED's
SW3
SW1
+12V
GNDDC Supply
from Masteror from local PSU
Audio Interface
RS485 BusMUX RS485
Audio Bus
GND GND
Audio A Audio A
Audio B Audio B

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-16Using the Audio
Programming Set up
The Audio channels must be mapped to alarm groups using menu 56.7 . This allows the Galaxy panel to know
which audio channel to send to the alarm receiving centre following an alarm activation. In this menu, its alsopossible to specify which type of alarm events will result in listen-in operation.
In Use
The audio system continuously records the audio from all channels in a 10 second loop. When an alarm
activation occurs, the audio form the specified channel stops recording and the audio from the time of thealarm is saved, including a few seconds from before the activation of the detector. The panel will dial theAlarm Receiving Centre normally and transmit the alarm message and then stay on the line to allow the opera-tor to listen to the audio. The Galaxy system will automatically select the specific channel to be transmitted andplay the live audio initially. The operator has three control options using a DTMF telephone keypad;
1: Talk to site
2: Listen to recorded audio from the activated channel3: Listen to live audio from the activated channel99: End callAudio Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-17Remote Servicing Suite
Remote Servicing Suite (RSS) is an advanced PC based application that allows full remote servicing of Galaxy
systems. Functions include configuration and programming, control and diagnostic servicing. RSS also includesan Event Monitoring application.
Event Monitoring is an advanced, high performance software program that allows a PC to receive and store
detailed event and alarm information from Galaxy control panels.
User Management Suite
User Management Suite is a software program designed specifically for in-house security managers, andallows access to key features of the Remote Servicing program in order to facilitate:
• Event log copying
• Holiday period changes• Summer time date change• User code amendmentOptional Software Packages
SYSTEM ORDER CODE
Remote Servicing Suite Standalone non-dongled R050
Remote Servicing Suite Standalone/Network-dongled R051User Management Suite Standalone/Network-dongled R053
Table 3-11. Galaxy PC Products and Order Codes

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
3-18

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-1Mk7 Keypad/KeyProx
SECTION 4: KEYPADS
Two types of keypad can be fitted to the Galaxy Dimension: The Mk7 Keypad and the Touch Center keypad.
Both types of keypad are described in this section.
The Galaxy Mk7 Keypad/KeyProx
NOTE: References in the text to the Mk7 keypad also includes the KeyProx in this section.
General
The Galaxy Mk7 keypad/keyProx has the following features:
• a 2 x 16 alphanumeric character backlit display
• 16 backlit push buttons as shown in figure 4-1• internal horn• power indicator LED• Lid tamper• Off-wall tamper• Address switch• RS485 serial connector
Figure 4-1. Galaxy Mk7 Keypad/KeyProx
Power Consumption
The Galaxy Mk 7 keypad/keyProx requires a 12 Vd.c. supply – from the control panel or a remote power
supply. The current consumption of the keypad/keyProx is:
Table 4-1. Keypad/KeyProx Current drawCurrent Draw
Mode Mk7 Keypad Mk7 Keyprox
Nominal (backlight OFF) 35 mA 75 mA
Backlight ON 70 mA 90 mAMaximum Alarm Current 90 mA 130 mAGALAXY 264 V6.00
08:58 TUE 22 NOV
1 2 3A
4 5 6B
7 8 9 ent
*0# esc

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-2Addressing
Addresses are set by means of a rotary switch on the PCB. Each keypad must be assigned a unique address
for its line.It is possible to add additional keypads at any unused comms module addresses (B, C, D and E) as detailedin the following NOTE. These must be standard keypads. An engineer keypad can also be used at address F.
NOTE : On Line 1, keypad addresses B, C, D and E are not available if the Ethernet,
ISDN, RS232 or Telecom modules respectively are fitted.
Keypad/KeyProx Installation Procedure
1. To attach the keypad to the wall, the back plate must first be removed from the front plate. To do this,
insert a suitable tool into both openings at the bottom of the keypad and turn the tool gently.
CAUTION: When the keypad is separated make sure that the anti-static precautions are taken
with the keypad pcb to avoid damage from esd (electro static discharge).
Connections to the terminals are:
2. Use the backplate as a template, then mark the locations for the three attachment screws in the
required position.
3. If it is a new installation, use the keyhole slot at the top of the backplate and the two elongated
holes at the bottom. If replacing an existing Mk3 keypad with a Mk7 keypad, use the keyholeslot at the top of the backplate and the two knockout holes at the bottom. This means that youcan use the existing holes in the wall, whist keeping the backplate in the same position.
4. If you are using a wall-run cable for the keypad (A, B, +12V , 0V) position the cable behind the
back plate in the cable channels provided. The cable can be run in from either the top or thebottom of the back plate. Use a sharp tool to remove the plastic from the top or the bottom of thecable guides on the back plate skirting.
CAUTION: Use of any screws other than No. 6 Pan-head can damage the keypad
mouldings.
5. Make sure that the keypad wiring is fed through the large opening on the keypad backplate, then
position the keypad base on the wall and attach it securely with the three No. 6 Pan-head screws.Keypad Installation
Wiring the Keypad/KeyProx
A 16-way rotary address switch is used to address Galaxy LCD keypads. The address switch assigns ahexadecimal address value to the keypad.NOTE: Any change to the keypad address must be made when the power is disconnected from the
keypad.
rotcennoC
slanimreTsdapyeKyxalaG
A lenapotenilA
B lenapotenilB
+ tupni.c.dV21
– V0
Table 4-2. Keypad/keyProx Terminal Connections

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-36. If an off the wall tamper is required, using a No. 6 Pan-head screw, secure the sacrificial wall
tamper, indicated in Figure 4-2, to the wall. Make sure that the tamper knockout is stillconnected to the backplate moulding.
7. Connect the A, B and power wires to the correct terminals of the removable, four-way connector
block.
Figure 4-2. Galaxy Mk7 Keypad/KeyProx Backplate Installation
8. Make sure that the power is disconnected then set the keypad to the required address using the 16
way rotary switch on the PCB.
9. To re-assemble the keypad, connect the four-way connector block onto the pins on the keypad
PCB. Attach the keypad front plate to the back plate by inserting the two clips on the top of thekeypad front plate into the two apertures at the top of the keypad back plate, then gently push thebottom of the keypad front plate into the back plate until it snaps securely into place. Ensure the frontand back sections of the keypad are securely fixed at all points of the keypad perimeter.
Note: The keypad door can be re-orientated to allow opening from either the left or right-hand
sides. However, fitting or removal of the door must only be done when the front plate isdetached from the back plate. Attempting to remove or install the door, when the keypad isassembled, may cause damage to the keypad mouldings.Keypad Installation (cont’d)
aperture keyhole slot aperture
cable
channel
cablestowagearea
elongatedhole
4-wayconnectorknockoutholesacrificialwalltamper
BA+-

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-4 Adding/Removing Keypads
Volume Control
Where fitted, the Mk7 keypad/keyprox has a volume control switch marked VOL at the bottom right-hand
corner of the pcb. Make sure the keypad/keyprox is powered up and adjust to the desired volume (+ or -)for buzzer functions. Refer to Appendix F for keypad/keyprox part numbers with volume control function.
Adding a Keypad/KeyProx to the System
When adding a keypad to an existing system, the following points must be considered:
1. Ensure that the keypad to be added has a unique address from the other keypads on the system.
2. Ensure that the keypad has a valid address.3. Connect the keypad to the system – refer to the Keypad Installation Procedure.Note: A new keypad can only be configured into an existing Galaxy system from engineer mode.
4. Access engineer mode.
5.Connect the RS485 (AB) line of the keypad in parallel with the RS485 (AB) line of the
existing keypads.
6. Connect + and – terminals of the keypad to a power supply.7. Exit engineer mode – engineer code + esc :
8. The Mk7 keypad displays the message 1 MOD. ADDED — esc=CONTINUE. Press the esc
key; the keypad returns to the unset banner.
NOTE: If this message is not displayed, the keypad is not communicating with the control panel and has not
been configured into the system. In this case all connections and addresses should be rechecked.
NOTE: If adding a keyProx to the system, the message 2 MOD ADDED will be displayed to indicate that
both a keypad and MAX have been added to the system.
9. The keypad is now configured into the system.
Removing a Keypad/KeyProx from the System
A keypad can only be removed from an existing Galaxy system from engineer mode
1. Access engineer mode.
2. Disconnect the keypad.3. Exit engineer mode. The message 1 MOD. MISSING — [<],[>] to View is displayed
4. Press the A or B key. The message KEYPAD XX — 77777 =REMOVE MODULE is displayed.
5. Press the 77777 key to acknowledge and accept that the keypad has been removed. The keypad
returns to the unset banner.
NOTE: If removing a keyProx from the system the message 2 MOD MISSING is displayed to indicate
both a keypad and MAX have been removed from the system. Each should be removed separatelyby pressing the * key twice.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-5 Keypad Operation
The number keys are used to enter the Personal Identification Number
(PIN) which identifies users to the Galaxy and permits access to the systemoptions. The PIN Code is a 5 or 6 digit number.Self Diagnostics
The keypad has a self diagnostic feature that is used to test the operational status of the inputs and outputs ofthe keypad.The test is started by disconnecting the power from the keypad, then reapplying the power while pressing theent key. The test routine commences immediately. Each test last approximately four seconds. The test is
terminated by removing the power.• Keypad address is displayed• Keypad buzzer is activated and a bell symbol is displayed.• Power LED is illuminated and an a.c. ( ) and LED ( ) symbol is displayed.
• Keypad keys are displayed. Each key press is confirmed by the buzzer sounding and the key display
being highlighted.
• To return keypad to operational mode remove and reapply power.
Keypad/KeyProx Operation
Number Keys
Table 4-3. Default Codes
The number keys are also used, once access to the system has been gained, to select and modify options.
View Keys
Enter KeyThese keys are used to initiate the setting of the Galaxy
Pressing the A or B key immediately after a valid PIN has been entered starts
one of the routines for setting the system. The A key initiates the full setting of
the Galaxy. The B key starts the part setting routine.
Once the system has been successfully accessed the A key can be used to
step forward through the Galaxy menu options and the B key to step back-
wards.The A and B keys can also be re-programmed for different functions.
The ent key is used to:
• Access the menu options• Confirm the programming selectionsedoCtluafeD
reenignE3 32211
resUetomeR0 12345
reganaMretsaM5 4321
noitasirohtuA1 23451 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
A
B
ent

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-6The # key is used :
• as a toggle key, which enables or disables the programming features of
the Galaxy options, for example, enabling the OMIT attribute of a zone,
• to give additional information on the programming options, for example
pressing the # key while in option 22=DISPLAY LOG shows details of the
user number, descriptor and keypad used to cancel alarms or unset thesystem.
• to activate the Duress and PA outputs; enter a valid user code followed by two
presses of the # key, then the ent key to activate the duress alarm.
The ș key is used:
• to correct or erase PINs in the CODES option and alpha-numeric
descriptors in the TEXT option,
• to start printing from the current event when viewing option
22=DISPLAY LOG.
• to display the set status of the groups. When Show Status (refer to option58.6=KEYPADS.Show Status) is enabled, pressing the ș and # keys simultaneously
when the normal banner is displayed indicates the group set status.R = Ready to Set (all active zones in group closed)
F= Faulted (at least one of the active zones in the group is open)
S = Set
P = Part Set
L = Locked Out
– = Group not assigned to keypadNote: The Show Status indicates the set conditions of groups when the system is set
(keypad blank) or unset (normal banner). Show Status does not operate while
engineer mode is accessed.Pressing the ș and # keys again toggles the display to show the status of the groups
individually. To move between each groups, press the ș and A or the ș and B keys
simultaneously.Pressing the ș and # again returns the keypad to the banner display.The esc key cancels any modification made to the current option and returns
to the previous option level. Successive pressing of this key returns the userto the banner display.The esc key also aborts the setting routine if pressed during the exit time. Keypad Operation (cont’d)
Escape Key
Hash Key
Star Keyesc
#
*

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-7 Keypad Operation (cont’d)
Multiple Group Systems
The larger Galaxy systems have more than eight groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight
groups. Press the A or B key to display each of the group blocks.
Power LED
The green power LED indicates the status of the a.c. power supply and the stand-by battery.
Table 4-4. a.c./Battery Status Indicator
NOTE: It is advised that a suitably rated stand-by battery is fitted to the system in order to provide contin-
ued protection in the event of a mains failure. The battery is not included.
Display
The Galaxy Keypad/KeyProx have a 2 x 16 character backlit display used to display programming informa-tion and system status.DELrewoPs utatS.c.as utatSyrettaBs utatSesuF
NOK O.c.aK OyrettaBK OsesuF
hsalfwolSl iaF.c.aK OyrettaBK OsesuF
hsalFkciuQK O/liaF.c.aw oLyrettaBn wolbesuF
GALAXY 264 V6.00GALAXY 264 V6.00GALAXY 264 V6.00GALAXY 264 V6.00GALAXY 264 V6.00
08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-8 Keyprox
The Galaxy KeyProx
General
The KeyProx is a standard Mk7 keypad with a proximity card reader built in to the lower right corner. This
allows users to set and unset the system, using proximity cards, rather than a pin.
NOTE: The keyProx is not intended for use as a door control unit. Installation and wiring of the KeyProx is
identical to the Mk7 keypad.
Addressing
Both the KeyProx and reader share a common address, set by the rotary address switch.An address must be chosen which will be valid for both the keypad and MAX.Please note that in order for the reader to operate, MAX mode must be enabled in the panel programming,(option 63.2.1 = Options.MAX.MAX Mode). The MAX addressing function in option 63.2.2 = MAX
Address, is not required for keyprox units.
Operation
The operation of the KeyProx is identical to the Mk7 keypad. The proximity reader is seen by the panel as an
on-line MAX reader. It is programmed in exactly the same way with the exception that it does not require tobe addressed (this being set already by the rotary switch).
Card Types
The KeyProx can read standard ASK (Amplitude Shift Keying) type cards up to 34 bit. A self learn feature isincorporared into the KeyProx to aid in card programming.
For further details on how to set up user cards, to set and unset the system, refer to Option 42 – Codes.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-9The Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter
General
The Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter connects to the RS485 data bus of the Galaxy Dimension panels. The
TouchCenter combines a clear graphical display with simple touch-screen control, providing an easy userinterface.TouchCenter
Figure 4.3 Homepage Screen
TouchCenter Installation Procedure
1 Remove the mounting plate from the TouchCenter by pushing it towards the bottom of the keypad.
2 Locate the mounting plate over the mounting surface such that the opening of the mounting plate is
aligned with the cable.
3 Pass the cable through the opening of the mounting plate.4 Secure the mounting plate to the mounting surface using the four screws supplied.5 Connect the wires to the T ouchCenter terminals as per the following table:
Table 4-5. TouchCenter Terminal Connections
6. Mount the TouchCenter to the mounting plate by locating the four elongated holes over the locations on
the mounting plate and pushing down until it snaps into position.Galaxy Terminals TouchCenter Terminals
AGBY
GND –
+12V +
Mk7 Keypad
Interface buttonEMERGENCYbutton

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-10Configuring a TouchCenter
To configure a new TouchCenter do the following:
1 – Set an Address
On first power up, the TouchCenter will immediately prompt for a bus address. This should be any valid
address that is not shared with any other keypad on the same RS485 (AB) Line. The default address isusually acceptable.
Or
If the address has previously been set and the address prompt does not appear, re-power the keypad and
within five seconds of power up, press the Console mode button
then press the ent button to change the
address.
2 – Register with the Control Panel
Once the address has been selected, the control panel must be repowered or, if another keypad is already
configured, exit from Engineer mode and the new TouchCenter will be registered.The Home Page will be displayed and the keypad is ready to use.
NOTE: Refer to the control panel literature for valid addresses. One TouchCenter can be fitted to each
Galaxy RS485 line.
Set-up Menu
The TouchCenter has a number of configuration settings which are set up directly within the keypad. Toaccess these settings, the TouchCenter must be in communication with the Galaxy Panel. The panel must be inEngineer’s mode. Proceed as follows:
1. From the home screen press the SECURITY button and then enter the Authorisation code. This is the
Engineer PIN of the control panel. The Security screen is displayed.
2. Press the MORE CHOICES button to enter the More Choices screen.
3. Press the KEYPAD SETUP button to enter the Setup screen.
4. Press the KEYPAD TEST button.
From this screen, the following options are available;
Self Diagnostics
A series of diagnostic tests are provided that allows verification of correct operation of the TouchCenter and
its connection to the Galaxy system. There are three diagnostic tests:• LCD Display Test• Audio Test• LED Test
Address
This allows the RS485 address to be changed. A change to this will require reconfiguration of theTouchCenter with the control panel.TouchCenter (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-11TouchCenter – Operation
For general operation refer to the on-screen information and to the separate user’s guide.
For programming of the control panel, all options can be accessed via the virtual terminal mode, that emulatesa standard installer keypad. To access the terminal mode, press the terminal keypad icon in the lower leftcorner of the Home Page.
Specifications
Mechanical
Dimensions:Width: 182 mm
Height: 128 mm
Depth: 34 mmWeight: 500g (approx)
Electrical
Operating V oltage: 10.5 to 14V DC
Current Drain:
Backlight OFF, Sound ON: 120mA
Backlight ON, Sound OFF 150mA
Backlight ON, Sound ON: 170mA
Standby: 105mATouchCenter (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
4-12

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-1SECTION 5: ACCESS CONTROL
Door Control Modules (DCMs) can be added onto the Galaxy bus lines to add fully integrated access con-
trol. Each DCM allows two Wiegand readers to be connected to control two separate doors; each door withan exit button or one door with an entry and exit reader..
Group Based Access Control
Access control works best when Group Mode is enabled. Each access reader can then be programmed to
control access to a particular group (or area/subsystem) within the building. Only users who have accessprivileges to that group will be granted access via that reader.
User and Access Templates
Every user on the system must be allocated an access template. An access template is a list of groups and
time schedules that will dictate which groups a user is able to gain access to and also the times that the user
can gain access. This method means that if there are multiple doors leading into one group or area, then a userwill be given access to all those doors in one move. This reduces programming time and complexity.
The Access Template to be used for each user is chosen within each user’s options in menu
42.1.11.= Template . There are multiple access templates available (dependant on panel variant) and each
one is fully customisable.
Access Templates are programmed in menu 45.7 = Access Templates . In each Access Template each
group on the system must be allocated a time schedule as required. If no schedule is allocated to a particulargroup (default) in the list then users will have full access through any doors leading to that group. When aschedule is allocated, access will be granted during the OFF periods of the schedule and denied during theON periods. Time schedules are programmed in menu 65 = Timers .
Time Schedules
A Time schedule is a weekly list of on and off times and can be used to control the security of any object that
it is assigned to. When a timer is ON it forces a secure state (system set, access denied etc). When a timer is
in the OFF state, it causes an un-secure state (system unset or access allowed etc). Up to 28 on or off times
can be programmed into each weekly schedule. Up to 67 schedules are available dependant on panel variant.
For each time schedule, it is possible to allocate one of 32 Holiday Calendars. A Holiday Calendar is a list of
20 holiday periods, each with a start and end date, which suspend normal timer operation. During a holidayperiod, one of two things can happen.
1. The timer is frozen in its current state (on or off) and will resume operation from the next event when the
holiday period finishes.
2. An alternate time schedule can be appointed to be used for the duration of the holiday period. Access Control

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-2Door Control Module
Door Control Modules (DCMs) can be added onto the Galaxy bus lines to add fully integrated access con-
trol. Each DCM allows up to two Wiegand readers to be connected to control two separate doors; each doorwith an exit button or one door with an entry and exit reader.
Figure 5-1. Door Control Module PCB Access Control (cont’d)
NOTES:
1. If only one door is being connected, then always use the connections for Door 1 (Left Side) and
terminate the inputs with a 1K resistor.
2. When door readers are being connected for entry and exit to the same door, then connect the entry
reader to Door 1 and connect the exit reader to Door 2.Shield
U EXT
0V
D0/
CLK
D1/
DATA
LED
Red
LED
Ye l
LED
Grn
BUZ
BC
0V
EC
DC
0V
FC
NC
C
NOShield
U EXT
0V
D0/
CLK
D1/
DATA
LED
Red
LED
Ye l
LED
Grn
BUZ
BC
0V
EC
DC
0V
FC
NC
C
NORS485 BUS1/2Shield
U in
0V
Data
0V
0V
A
B/K31/K32 /K76
/K69/K6E/K70/K75/K74/K42/K75/K73 /K31/K2F/K32 /K6E/K6F/K74/K73/K75/K70/K70/K6F/K72/K74/K65/K64 /K47/K61/K6C/K61/K78/K79 /K52/K53/K34/K38/K35/K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74
/K43/K6F/K6D/K6D/K6F/K6E /K70/K69/K6E /K66/K6F/K72 /K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74/K69/K6E/K67 /K3/K63/K61/K62/K6C/K65 /K73/K68/K69/K65/K6C/K64 /K6F/K72 /K64/K72/K61/K69/K6E /K77/K69/K72/K65
/K31/K32 /K76/K6F/K6C/K74 /K6F/K75/K74/K70/K75/K74
/K30 /K76/K6F/K6C/K74 /K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74
/K44/K4F /K28/K44/K61/K74/K61 /K4F/K75/K74/K29
/K44/K49 /K28/K44/K61/K74/K61 /K49/K6E/K29
/K4C/K45/K44 /K31
/K4C/K45/K44 /K32
/K4C/K45/K44 /K33
/K42/K75/K7A/K7A/K65/K72 /K6F/K75/K74/K70/K75/K74 /K66/K6F/K72 /K72/K65/K61/K64/K65/K72
12345678ON/K4E/K6F/K74 /K55/K73/K65/K64
/K30 /K76/K6F/K6C/K74 /K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74
/K52 /K54/K45 /K63/K6F/K6E/K74/K61/K63/K74
/K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K63/K6F/K6E/K74/K61/K63/K74 /K69/K6E/K70/K75/K74
/K30 /K76/K6F/K6C/K74 /K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74
/K46/K75/K6E/K63/K74/K69/K6F/K6E /K63/K6F/K6E/K74/K61/K63/K74
/K28/K6D/K65/K6E/K75 /K62/K75/K74/K74/K6F/K6E/K29
/K4E/K6F/K72/K6D/K61/K6C/K6C/K79 /K63/K6C/K6F/K73/K65/K64 /K72/K65/K6C/K61/K79
/K43/K6F/K6D/K6D/K6F/K6E /K70/K69/K6E /K72/K65/K6C/K61/K79
/K4E/K6F/K72/K6D/K61/K6C/K6C/K79 /K6F/K70/K65/K6E /K72/K65/K6C/K61/K79
TC 0V
/K4C/K69/K64 /K74/K61/K6D/K70/K65/K72/K73/K77/K69/K74/K63/K68 /K54 /K61/K6D/K70/K65/K72/K63/K6F/K6E/K6E/K65/K63/K74/K52/K6F/K74/K61/K72/K79/K61/K64/K64/K72/K65/K73/K73/K53/K77/K69/K74/K63/K68/K44/K49/K50 /K53/K77/K69/K74/K63/K68/K65/K73/K45/K6E/K67/K69/K6E/K65/K65/K72 /K48/K65/K61/K64/K65/K72
Wiegand
ReaderInputs
/K52/K65/K6C/K61/K79/K6F/K75/K74/K70/K75/K74/K73/K66/K6F/K72/K6D /K43/K52/K65/K61/K64/K65/K72 /K31 /K52/K65/K61/K64/K65/K72 /K32
/K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K31 /K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K32
/K4A/K75/K6D/K70/K65/K72 /K66/K6F/K72
/K6C/K69/K64 /K74/K61/K6D/K70/K65/K72LED 2
(power)LED 1
(comms)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-3Inputs
The DCM includes the following sensing inputs: Access Control (cont’d)
Door Contact (DC)
This input is a normal alarm zone input that has the same functionality as a
normal security zone type. It uses normal 1k/2k double balanced zonewiring.
Request To Exit Contact (EC)
This input is a normally open contact. When activated it will allowthe door to unlock for the programmed duration. Additionally, thedoor can be held unlocked indefinitely by holding the EC closed. Inthis case, the relay activates only for the programmed duration butthe door propped alarm is held off. This can be achieved, forexample, by using a keyswitch wired in parallel with the normal ECbutton.
Tamper Inputs
The tamper circuits for both readers should be wired to the same tamperterminals on the DCM. The two circuits are wired in parallel, each with itsown series resistor as follows:
The reader tamper is double-balanced.
• Reader 1 – 5.6k Ω
• Reader 2 – 12k Ω
Connecting a Wiegand Device
A standard Wiegand card reader or keypad can be connected to the DCM.
The keypad can operate in 4-bit and 8-bit burst mode.
Wiegand Reader Inputs
The wires from the Reader are connected to the Wiegand Reader Inputs (see
Figure 5-1). Refer to separate Reader instructions for method of wiring theReader to the DCM.Function Contact
This uses normal 1 k /2 k double balanced zone wiring. It
has the function of initiating a pre-programmed menu optionfollowing a valid card. The normal use is to activate thesetting procedure via the reader but any menu option canbe programmed.DC 0V
1k
Door Contact Wiring1k Normally
Closed
TC 0V
Tamper Contact Wiring5k6
12k Normally
ClosedEC 0V
Request to Exit
Contact WiringNormally
Open
FC 0V
1k
Function Contact Wiring1k Normally
Closed

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-4Buzzer Output
This activates the buzzer on the reader to indicate card read, access granted and card rejected. The output is
open collector and can switch up to 100 mA.
LED Output
LED output 3 is used to drive a reader LED. It is open collector and can switch up to 100 mA. LED outputs
1 and 2 are not used. The LED gives a visible indication on the reader of card read and access granted.
Relay Output
This is a relay output which is activated upon any valid card read or RTE button operation in order to tempo-
rarily unlock the door. The relay can switch up to 1A @ 30V AC.
Installation and Mounting
The DCM can be supplied installed in a standard plastic RIO box or within a Power RIO box.
Mounting the RIO Box
1. If necessary, remove the DCM PCB from the box to allow access to the screw holes.2. Fix the base to the mounting surface, using the screw holes provided.3. All cables must be brought into the enclosure base via the cable entry points. There are six cable entry
holes for the entry of alarm cables.
4. Attach the RIO box lid with the four thread forming screws provided.
Mounting the Power RIO Box
The DCM is mounted above the control PCB on a mounting plate.
1. Remove the screws securing the left hand control PCB to the box.
2. Fit the four mounting pillars supplied with the kit in place of the PCB screws.3. Fit the mounting plate to the pillars and secure using the screws removed from the PCB.4. Attach the DCM to the mounting plate using the plastic clips supplied.
Wiring the Reader to the DCM
The wires from the Reader are connected to the Weigand Reader Inputs (see Figure 5-3). Refer to separateReader instructions for method of wiring the Reader to the DCM.
Addressing with DIP Switches
The DCM must be given a unique address before it is connected to a power supply. The DCM can be ad-dressed with the DIP switches. The addressing works in a binary mode. The following table shows each DIPswitch with related address number. Switches 4 to 8 must be left in the off position. Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-5Table 5-1. DIP Switch Addressing
Connecting the DCM to Galaxy System
The DCM must be wired to the Galaxy RS485 ( AB) line in parallel (daisy-chain configuration). The DCM
requires 12V d.c. This can be supplied from the control panel power supply or from the Power RIO whenmounted inside the Power RIO box.
See Figure 5-1 for a diagram of the connections.
NOTE: If the DCM is the last module on the line, connect a 680 Ω EOL resistor across the A and B
terminals.
Configuring the DCM
The added DCM is configured into the system on power up of the control panel or when exiting from engineermode. The flash rate of the green comms LED (LED1) on the DCM indicates the status of the communicationwith the control panel. A short flash once per second indicates good communications.
LED 2 when lit indicates that there is power to the DCM. Access Control (cont’d)
Switch
Address 1 2 3 4-8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3O N O N O F F O F F
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5O N O F F O NO F F
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 O NO NO N O F F

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-6Specifications
Physical
Weight (RIO) : 270g approx.
Dimensions (RIO Box mm): 150 wide x 162 high x 39 deep
For additional weight and Dimension when housed within a Power RIO enclosure, please see the Power RIO
documentation.
Electrical
Operating voltage range: 10.5V to 15V
Current draw, Typical: 40mA Typical
Current draw, Maximum(2 readers): 130 mA
Compliance
This product is suitable for use in systems compliant to EN50131-1: 2006, EN50133-1 and PD6662.
This product has been tested for compliance to EN50131-3 and EN50133-3 by CNPP.Security Grade: 3
Environmental class: II Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-7MAX3
The MAX3 is a proximity reader access control device for a single door, which can also be used for setting
and unsetting of your alarm control panel. The MAX3 can be configured in one of two ways:
Standalone
In this configuration the MAX3 can be used for either door control or alarm system set/unset control, by either
connecting the internal relay output to a door lock or external relay. When in standalone mode the MAX3 is
programmed and operated using the MAX3 proximity cards or tags.The proximity cards and tags each have
unique ID numbers and must be identified to the MAX3 before being used to operate the system. The MAX3
memory can store up to 999 ID numbers, including at least three reserved for Masters. Once programmed,the ID number of the tags and cards are stored indefinitely in the MAX
3 memory until voided (removed) or
erased. Removing power from the MAX3 does not erase the programming memory.
Note : The MAX3 defaults to standalone mode. It can be configured to on-line mode directly from the
Galaxy Dimension control panels.
On-line
The MAX3 can operate in on-line mode, with the Galaxy Dimension control panel range, as a completely
integrated module on the system. In this configuration the MAX3 can be used for both door control and alarm
system set/unset control with complete user traceability stored within the Galaxy control panel.For detailed instructions on how to programme the MAX
3 onto the system in on-line mode refer to Option
69.2=MAX .
Installing the MAX3
MAX3 Pack
Your Max3 pack contains the following:
• Max3 proximity reader *
• Max3 drilling template
• Max3 installation instructions
• Surge suppressor
* The MAX3 is supplied with 3 metres of 12 wire E111235 AWG cable which is fixed and sealed through a
keyhole opening on the rear surface of the MAX3 .
Mounting the MAX3
To mount the MAX3 use the step by step diagrams provided with the drilling template.
The drilling template should be used as an aid to locate the holes required to secure the MAX3 and insert the
connection cable.The MAX
3 comes with an infra red lid tamper. The tamper is activated when the lid is removed from the
MAX3 unit. Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-8Wiring the MAX3
The MAX3 unit can be connected to the control panel in
one of two ways depending upon whether it is beingused in an on-line or standalone configuration. Thediagram opposite provides details for both configura-tions. The MAX
3 relay is configured in either the NC or
NO configuration depending upon the variant purchased(MX03 – Normally Closed, MX03-NO – NormallyOpen).
NOTE: Fitting of an external relay may be required
when using AC powered locks.
Figure 5-2. Connection diagram Access Control (cont’d)
/K56/K69/K6F/K6C/K65/K74 /K2D/K2B /K43
/K4E/K43
/K4E/K4F/K52/K65/K6C/K61/K79 /K4D/K6F/K64/K75/K6C/K65
/K41/K30/K36/K30
/K52/K65/K6C/K61/K79 /K4F/K75/K74/K2B/K31/K32/K56/K53/K75/K70/K70/K72/K65/K73/K73/K6F/K72
/K4F/K52
/K56/K69/K6F/K6C/K65/K74/K52/K65/K6C/K61/K79 /K4F/K75/K74 /K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K4C/K6F/K63/K6B
/K48/K6F/K72/K6E/K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K43/K6F/K6E/K74/K61/K63/K74 /K49/K2F/K50
/K52/K53/K34/K38/K35/K41 /K49/K6E/K45/K78/K74/K72/K61 /K47/K72/K6F/K75/K6E/K64
/K50/K6F/K77/K65/K72 /K49/K6E/K70/K75/K74/K47/K72/K6F/K75/K6E/K64
/K57/K68/K69/K74/K65/K47/K72/K65/K79/K2F/K50/K69/K6E/K6B/K47/K72/K65/K65/K6E
/K42/K6C/K75/K65/K50/K69/K6E/K6B/K59 /K65/K6C/K6C/K6F/K77/K42/K72/K6F/K77/K6E/K47/K72/K65/K79
/K52/K65/K64/K2F/K42/K6C/K75/K65/K42/K6C/K61/K63/K6B
/K52/K65/K64
/K53/K70/K61/K72/K65/K48/K6F/K72/K6E/K4F/K2F/K50/K45/K67/K72/K65/K73/K73 /K49/K2F/K50
/K52/K53/K34/K38/K35/K42 /K4F/K75/K74/K52/K53/K34/K38/K35/K41 /K4F/K75/K74/K52/K53/K34/K38/K35/K42 /K49/K6E/K44/K6F/K6F/K72 /K43/K6F/K6E/K74/K61/K63/K74
/K45/K67/K72/K65/K73/K73
/K2B/K31/K32/K56
/K2B/K31/K32/K56
/K47/K61/K6C/K61/K78/K79 /K52/K53/K34/K38/K35
/K44/K61/K74/K61 /K42/K75/K73 /K2D/K6F/K6E/K6C/K79 /K75/K73/K65/K64/K69/K6E /K6F/K6E/K2D/K6C/K69/K6E/K65/K63/K6F/K6E/K66/K69/K67/K75/K72/K61/K74/K69/K6F/K6E/K2B/K31/K32/K56/K53/K75/K70/K70/K72/K65/K73/K73/K6F/K72
Supply Volts 12V dc
Quiescent Current 35 mA
Maximum Current 50 mA
Maximum Switching Current 1A @ 30V dc max.
Security Grade 3
Environmental class IV
Weight (boxed) 267 gm
Dimensions (box) 185x120x48 mm (LxBxH)
Table 5-2. MAX3 Specifications
Table 5-3. Panel compatibility
x
P
MAX31 = Read (Amber)
2 = Open (Green)
3 = Closed (Red)
4 = Nightlock (Red)
5 = Add (Red)
6 = Void (Red)
7 = Program (Red)
Figure 5-3. MAX3 LED’sGalaxy Panel Compatibility
Galaxy Dimension
SeriesAll
Galaxy 2 Series V1.4 or later
Galaxy 8-512 Series V2 or later

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-9Configuring a MAX3 Reader into the System
NOTE: MAX3 readers can only be configured into the Galaxy system from engineer mode.
1. Connect the MAX3 to the Galaxy control panel as per the instructions given in Figure 5-1.
2. Access engineer mode.3. Ensure that the Mode is enabled (option 69.1.1 = Access Control.Mode.Enabled ).
4. Assign the MAX
3 reader as either On-Line or Stand-Alone using option 69.2.1 = Access
Control.MAX.MAX Address:
0 = On-Line: The MAX3 is fully integrated with the Galaxy system and communicates via the AB line,
sharing system resources and facilities.1 = Standalone (default): The MAX
3 operates as an entirely independent unit. The Galaxy does not
monitor the MAX3 for alarms, tampers or power failure.
5. Press the ent key; the Galaxy panel may prompt (depending on model) for the AB line (1 – 4)) that is
to be searched; select the line and press the ent key. The Galaxy searches for the MAX3 with the
highest address. New MAX3 readers are addressed as 8 (standalone) by default.
6. Only if adding a new MAX3 reader: On locating the MAX3 address, the keypad prompts for the
OPERATING MODE of MAX3 to be assigned: select 0 = On-Line or 1 = Standalone as required
and press the ent key.
When 0 = On-Line mode is selected, the keypad displays the current address of the MAX3 and the
range of valid addresses. Enter the new MAX3 address and press the ent key; the Galaxy then repro
grams the address of the MAX3. The keypad indicates the old and new MAX3 addresses and the
status of the reprogramming.
NOTE: It is recommended that when adding a reader, it is addressed as the lowest available number on the
line.
7. When the reprogramming is complete the MAX3 bleeps, the LED’s on the MAX3 switch off and the
keypad display returns to 1 = MAX Address .
8. Exit engineer mode – engineer code + esc: the keypad displays the message 1 MOD. ADDED –
esc=CONTINUE . LED 2 on the MAX3 reader switches on. Press the esc key; the keypad
returns to the unset banner.
If this message is not displayed, the MAX3 reader is not communicating with the control panel
and has not been configured into the system (LED 2 does not switch on).
NOTES:
1.The MAX3 reader will not operate until engineer mode is exited and the reader is configured into the
system.
2.All MAX3 doors must be closed, otherwise engineer mode cannot be exited.
9. The on-line MAX3 reader is now configured into the system. Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-10Removing a MAX3 Reader from the System
On-Line Mode
1. Access engineer mode.
2. Disconnect the MAX3 reader ( AB line and power).
3. Exit engineer mode.4. The message 1 MOD. MISSING — [<],[>] to View is displayed.
5. Press the A or B key.
6. The message MAX XX —ș =REMOVE MODULE is displayed.
7. Press the ș key to acknowledge and accept that the MAX
3 reader has been removed. The keypad
returns to the unset banner.
Operating Instructions
The MAX3 must be presented with a valid user card to allow access. Opening the door without presenting a
valid card activates a door forced alarm at the panel; the buzzer sounds and LED 2 flashes until the door isclosed.Activating the egress switch allows the door to be opened without activating an alarm when no card has beenpresented to the MAX
3.
1. Ensure that LED 3 is on and all other LEDs are off.2. Swipe the MAX with a standard user or nightlock access user card. LED 3 switches off and LED 2
switches on for the programmed Open Timeout .
3. Open the door while the LED 2 is on and access the area.4. Close the door; LED 2 switches off and LED 3 switches on. The door must be closed within the pro-
grammed Close Timeout ; if the door remains open longer than this, an alarm is activated.
Card-Held Function
The MAX3 or DCM card can be assigned a single menu option (refer to option 42.1.8 = CODES.User
Codes.MAX Function ). To activate the function assigned to the MAX3 or DCM card, hold the card in front
of the reader for three seconds; all of the LEDs switch on. If a keypad has been assigned to the MAX func-tion then it displays the details of this option. If no keypad is assigned, pressing a key on any of the keypadsassigned to a common group to the user displays the card-held function.
Card-Held System Setting
If the MAX3 or DCM card is assigned one of the setting options (option 12, 13, 14 & 16 – 19), the card-held
functions starts the setting procedure for the groups assigned to the card.
NOTE: If Group Restriction is assigned, then only the groups that are common to both the MAX3 reader
and the MAX3 user are set/unset
To unset the system using the MAX3 or DCM card, swipe the reader with a valid card. The reader beeps. All
of the groups assigned to the card are instantly unset. Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-11MAX3 Log
The Galaxy system has a panel dependent event log for recording the MAX3 activations. This log is shared by
all readers on the system and operates on a first-in-first-out basis for overwriting events when the log is filled.To display the events in the MAX
3 log select option 25 = ACCESS DOORS ; use the A or B keys to select
the required MAX3 address then press the ent key. The first event that occurred on the selected MAX3 is
displayed along with details of the time, date and MAX3 number.
To view the log press the A key to move forward in time through the events or the B key to move backwards.
Press the esc key to return to the MicroMAX address display. To view the log of another MAX3, use the A
or B key to select the required address. To escape from the Access Doors option press the esc key.
MAX3 Events Print-Out
The MAX3 events can be printed out as they occur to an on-line printer. To print the MAX3 events ensure
that option 51.27 = PARAMETERS.On-Line Print is enabled. Select option 51.28 =
PARAMETERS.On-Line Level and enter 2 to print out all system events including the MAX3 events or 3
to print out only the MAX3 events.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to line one of the Galaxy panel and the printer must remain on-line
(ready to print) at all times.
Downloading the MAX3/ DCM Log
The MAX3/DCM event log can be downloaded to Remote Servicing by using the MAX/DCM Log copy
option in Remote Servicing.Time and date
of event
MAX3 user number Event type02:25 SUN 22 OCT02:25 SUN 22 OCT02:25 SUN 22 OCT02:25 SUN 22 OCT02:25 SUN 22 OCT
USR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 Valid Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
5-12Dual Access Cards
If a user’s card number is assigned a *, then the card becomes Dual access. This means that it will not open
the door on its own; it needs another PIN or card as well. (see option 42 = Codes for programming).
Dual Focus (Card Held)
If a card has a # assigned to the number, then any card-held function will only work in conjunction with the
PIN from the same user, provided that the PIN has a # assigned also. The Dual Focus function will work ineither order, but if the card is presented first, it will simply enable the PIN to gain access to the normal menu(see option 42 = Codes for programming).
Timed Anti-Passback
When the Timed Anti-Passback feature is enabled, it will prevent more than one use of any particular card at a
particular reader within a given time period. See option69.2.2.6 = Access Control.MAX.Max Parameters.Anti-Passback for programming details.
A forgiveness function is available to clear all or particular antipassback restrictions in force. There are setAnti-Passback users as defined in the following Table . If a card belonging to one of these users is swiped at a
reader, all anti-passback restriction at that reader are cleared. A manager code can authorise a forgive functionon a particular user in option 42.1 = Codes.User Codes. An engineer code can authorise a forgive function
on a particular reader in option 69.2.2.6.3 = Access Control.MAX.Max Parameters.Anti-
Passback.Forgive. Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1SECTION 6: SYSTEM OPERATION
Menu Options
General
The Galaxy Dimension provides various menu options for modifying the functional performance of the system.
There are two menu structures:
1. Full Menu — only accessed by authorized users including the master manager code and by the
engineer.
2. Quick Menu — a selection of options from the full menu. The quick menu is the default menu
access for all user codes (type 2.3 and above), except master manager and engineer.
The Full Menu
The full menu has a hierarchy of 5 structures contained within it. Each structure is accessible by an increasedtype of user code.
The Quick Menu
The quick menu offers type 2.3 and above users a selection of up to 10 options, numbered 0 – 9. The optionsavailable from the quick menu can be modified to the user’s requirement via option 59 = QUICK MENU .
Table 6-1. Quick and Full Menu Options Reference
Menu Access
Only valid codes (type 2.3 and above) can access the menu options. Access to the user options is assigned
by the engineer (refer to options 42 = CODES and 68 = MENU ACCESS ). Users cannot view or access
options for which they are not authorized; this includes options in the Quick Menu.
NOTE: Menu options 51 – 67 (ENGINEER 1 and ENGINEER 2) can be assigned additional access to
user type 2.3 – 3.6, by the engineer. Menu options
Quick Menu Full Menu
User (Type 2.3) User (Type 2.4) User (Type 2.5) Manager (Type 3.6) Engineer (Type 3.7) Engineer (Type 3.7) Engineer (Type 3.7)
0 = Omit Zones 10 = Setting 20 = Display 30 = T est 40 = Modify 50 = Engineer 1 60 = Engineer 2 70 = Engineer 3
1 = Forced Set 11 = Omit Zones 21 = Display Zones 31 = Walk T est 41 = Time/Date 51 = Parameters 61 = Diagnostics 71 = Program Key
2 = Chime 12 = Timed Set 22 = Display Log 32 = Outputs 42 = Codes 52 = Program Zones 62 = Full T est3 = Display Zones 13 = Part Set 23 = System 43 = Summer 53 = Program Outputs 63 = Options
4 = Display Log 14 = Forced Set 24 = Print 44 = Trace 54 = Links 64 = Assemble Zone
5 = Print 15 = Chime 25 = Access Doors 45 = Timer Control 55 = Soak 65 = Timers
6 = Walk T est 16 = Instant Set 46 = Group Omit 56 = Communication 66 = Pre-Check
7 = Time/Date 17 = Silent Part 47 = Remote Access 57 = System Print 67 = Remote Reset
8 = Codes 18 = Home Set 48 = Eng Access 58 = Keypad 68 = Menu Access
9 = Summer 19 = All Set 59 = Quick Menu 69 = Access Control

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-2There are two methods of selecting menu options:
1. Direct Access:
Code + ent + option number + ent .
2. Menu Driven Access:
Code + ent + A (to select menu level) + ent;
A key (to select menu option) + ent .
Direct Access
Entering a valid menu option number while in the menu immediately moves to that option. For example, press-
ing 52 (type 3.7 only) when the keypad is displaying 22 = DISPLAY LOG moves directly to option
52 = PROGRAM ZONES ; Pressing 10 while accessing the PROGRAM ZONES option moves directly
to 10 = Group (group mode must be first enabled in option 63.1). The option number entered must be valid
for the type of the menu structure that is currently being accessed.
Menu Driven Access
Menu driven access allows the engineer (and users) to enter the menu and, by using the A and B keys, navi-
gate through the available options. The options are accessed by pressing the ent key. If you press and hold
the A key it will scroll forward through the options and if you press and hold the B key it will scroll backwards
through the options.
Keypad Menu Timeout
Once the user menu has been accessed (irrespective of user type), if there are no keypresses for two minutes,then the keypad timeout occurs; the system returns to the banner text.
NOTE: This feature does not apply when the system is in the Walk Test option. If no zones are tested or no
keypresses occur for 20 minutes when Walk Test is selected, then the keypad timeout occurs. In
Menu Option 66 (Pre-check ) there is also a 20 minute timeout after the last zone has been acti-
vated.
Engineer Mode
To program the Galaxy Dimension control panel, the system must be in engineering mode. This allows accessto the engineer menu options 50 = ENGINEER 1, 60 = ENGINEER 2 and 70 = ENGINEER 3 . Menu Access

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-3Accessing Engineer Mode
User Authorized Access
Entry to the engineer mode is authorized by a user with access to menu option 48.1.1 =Eng Access.System
Access.Engineer . The user selects this option and presses key 1 to enable engineer access. The engineer
code must then be entered within five minutes of the option being enabled. A single entry of the engineer codedirectly accesses the mode. If the code is not entered within the five minute period, the engineer code is invalidand has no effect. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the period that theengineer can remain in the mode.
On accessing engineering mode, any group that is set becomes inaccessible to the engineer. The set groups
cannot be assigned to zones, outputs and any other functions permitting group allocation. When the engineercode is entered three things happen:
• All system tampers become isolated.
• The engineer is given access to the full menu.• The banner message is changed to indicate engineer mode.
Exiting from Engineer Mode
To exit from engineer mode and return to the normal banner enter, carry out the following operation:
1. Return to the engineer banner
2. Enter the engineer code
3. Press the esc key
The Galaxy carries out the following checks:1. That there are no module or zone tampers. If there are any module or zone tampers the escape
procedure is aborted.
2. That it is communicating with all of the attached modules.
If any modules are reported as missing from the system, the Galaxy prompts the engineer toremove each of the missing modules by pressing the 7 key. If the engineer does not remove the
missing modules, the escape procedure is aborted.
3. That all of the access doors (controlled by the on-line MAX) are closed. If any of the access doors
are open, then the exit procedure is halted until all of the doors are closed.
4. That there are no power failures on the galaxy system, such as AC fail, fuse fail or battery fail. Engineer Menu

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4 User Access
Aborting the Exit Engineer Mode Procedure
If the esc key is pressed at any point while engineer mode is being exited, before the normal banner is dis-
played, the exit procedure is aborted and the system remains in engineering mode.
Multi User Access
The Galaxy allows multi-user access. A maximum of 4 users (GD-48), 8 users (GD-96) and 16 users(GD-264/520) can simultaneously carry out tasks on the system.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5 Setting the System
R = Ready
F = Fault (group is unset and at least 1
zone is open)
P = Part Set
S (flashing) = selected for setting
S (steady) = already set
L = Group is locked out and cannot be unset.- = Group is not available to the userSetting Options
Setting the System Using a PIN
Full Setting
Enter: USER CODE + A
If groups are enabled and the user code has been assigned group choice then the keypad displays the setstatus of the available groups:
Pressing the keys for the groups toggles the
R (Ready ) to an S (set flashing).
NOTE: On systems with more than eight groups, the groups are displayed in blocks of eight. Each block can
be viewed by pressing the A or B keys.
Once the required groups have been selected press the ent key to begin the setting procedure.
If groups are not enabled or the user does not have group choice, entering the user code followed by the A
key immediately starts the setting procedure.
The keypad displays the exit time countdown. At the end of the exit time, or when the setting procedure is
terminated by a FINAL or PUSH-SET zone closing, the ENTRY/EXIT HORN outputs and keypad buzz-
ers become silent for four seconds, then emit two long tones to confirm that the system is set. The messageSYSTEM IS SET appears briefly before the keypad display changes back to the normal day banner.
Part Setting
Enter: CODE + B
This is identical to the Full Setting procedure, except the keypad display indicates that the system is being
Part Set . Only the zones which have the Part attribute enabled (refer to option 52.5 = PROGRAM
ZONE.Part ), are included.
Cancelling the Setting
The full and part setting routines can be aborted by pressing the esc key (on the keypad used to begin setting)
before the system sets.TIMEDTIMEDTIMEDTIMEDTIMED 060 060 060 060 060
J J J J J J J J 
PART SETPART SETPART SETPART SETPART SET 060 060 060 060 060
J J J J J J J J SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678
Groups RRSRSSSSGroups RRSRSSSSGroups RRSRSSSSGroups RRSRSSSSGroups RRSRSSSS
SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678SET A12345678
Groups SSSRR–Groups SSSRR–Groups SSSRR–Groups SSSRR–Groups SSSRR–

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6Unsetting the System Using a PIN
During the unsetting procedure, initiated by the opening of FINAL or ENTRY zone on a set group, the
system is unset by entering the user code followed by the A key.
• If the user does not have group choice, all of the groups assigned to the code are instantly unset.
• If the user has group choice only the group that the FINAL or ENTRY zone is assigned to is
unset; all of the other groups remain set. The system displays the set status of the remaininggroups and prompts for the required groups to be unset. To unset the required groups press therelevant number keys — the S or P (Set or Part Set) changes to flashing U — and then press the
ent key.
• When the system/group is unset three short beeps are emitted to advise the user that the system/group is
unset
Engineer Unsetting
The engineer can only unset a system that was set using the engineer code. The engineer code cannot be usedto unset a system that was set by a user code.
Keyswitch Setting Options
Zones programmed as KEYSWITCH can be used to full set, part set and unset the system. Refer to option
52 = PROGRAM ZONE .
Setting the System with a Keyswitch
The KEYSWITCH starts the setting procedure of each of the groups assigned to the keyswitch zone. At the
end of the exit time, or when the setting procedure is terminated by a FINAL or PUSH-SET zone closing, the
ENTRY/EXIT HORN outputs and keypad buzzers become silent for four seconds, then emit two long tones
to confirm that the system is set.
NOTE: If the KEYSWITCH has its Part attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONE ) then
the KEYSWITCH part sets the system.
Unsetting the System with a Keyswitch
Activating the KEYSWITCH when the group that it is assigned to is set instantly unsets the group. All other
groups which have been “starred” to the KEYSWITCH are not affected and remain set.
Setting the System with Cards/Tags/Fobs
The Proximity user cards can be used to set and unset the system. This is done by assigning a user with one
of the setting options (refer to option 42.1.8 = CODES.User Codes.MAX Function ). When the card is
held against a MAX module or keyprox for five seconds, the card held function programmed to the card useris activated. For access control readers, a function button or triple swipe will be required to activate the cardfunction.
If the card user has a keypad assigned, the function will be shown as the assigned keypad. If the card user has
no keypad assigned then all keypads in the group assigned to the card user will show “Press any Key”. If a Unsetting the System

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-7 Card Setting
key is pressed the keypad containing the key to be pressed will show the card held function. If no keys are
pressed all keypads in the group(s) allocated to the card will show card the held menu function.
If the card user has group choice all groups available to the user will be displayed on the keypad. The user
must select the groups to be set/unset/part set using the appropriate number keys, as per normal PIN users.
If the card user has no group choice then the card held setting function will commence automatically.
Unsetting the System with Proximity Cards
The system or groups can be unset using proximity cards with the MAX, KeyProx modules and access
control readers.
If the unsetting procedure has been started by activating a Final or Entry zone then, swiping the card will unset
the system. If the card user has group choice then, only the group assigned to the Final or Entry zone will beunset. All other groups available to the user will be displayed on the programmed/selected keypad or keyprox.
NOTE: The reader module must have common groups to the proximity card user to allow the card held
function to be activated.
Cancelling and Resetting Alarms and Alerts
Following an alarm, sounders and strobes are activated. When a fault condition occurs in the unset state, analert condition is activated. This consists of an intermittent beep at the keypad and/or a visual alert on thekeypad. Following each alarm activation, the alarm must be cancelled and the Galaxy reset. The activation iscancelled by entry of any valid user code (type 2.2 and above) assigned to the group that has alarmed or bypresentation of a valid proximity card to a reader. The alarm sounders, Bell and Strobe outputs are silencedand the keypad displays information on the zones or faults that have been activated. Use the A> and <B keysto scroll through multiple activations.
If the user code entered is not of a sufficient level to reset the Galaxy, the keypad displays the message CALL
MANAGER RESET REQUIRED or CALL ENGINEER RESET REQUIRED (parameter 51.63 =
Banner Alerts must be enabled), depending on the type of alarm and level of reset required.
The Galaxy is reset by entering a valid user code assigned to the group that has alarmed, with the appropriate
reset level for the type of alarm that has activated — System , Tamper or PA (refer to option 51.6 =
PARAMETERS.System Reset , 51.7 = PARAMETERS.Tamper Reset and 51.22 =
PARAMETERS.PA Reset or 51.65 = PARAMETERS.Reset Levels ). The keypad displays informa-
tion on the zones that have been activated during the alarm.
NOTE: If a tamper alarm has activated (zone or module) then the system cannot be reset until the tamper
condition is restored.
On the next setting of the Galaxy, if any of the zones that were opened during the previous alarm have not
closed since the alarm activation, then the system is prevented from setting. The addresses of the open zonesare displayed on the keypad; there is no sounder activation. Closing the zones permits the setting procedure tostart.
NOTE: This is not the same as open zones being indicated on the keypad; these are accompanied by rapid
tones on the Entry/Exit Horn .
Recording of Events
During any given set period, there is no limit to the number of signals sent from individual activations. How-
ever, no more than three events from any single source will be recorded in the event log.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8 Setting Features
Resetting Using Alarm Cause Code
If enabled in menu option 51.72, when a reset is required, an alarm cause code must be entered to reset the
system.
If there are multiple alarm causes and/or multiple groups require to be reset, then the alarm cause code only
has to be entered once. The user enters the most appropriate code as determined on site. The cause codevalues should be determined in conjunction with the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC).
Overriding of Faults and Tampers
Whenever a user logs in, the display shows any unrestored faults and tampers. If the condition cannot becleared and restored, then to enable the system to be set, a facility to override the condition is included.
When a user tries to set the system, the system displays any conditions and allow the user to scroll through
multiple conditions. If the user has the authority to override the condition, the following display accompaniesthe condition;
ENT to ContinueENT to ContinueENT to ContinueENT to ContinueENT to Continue
0001 +CU-BATT0001 +CU-BATT0001 +CU-BATT0001 +CU-BATT0001 +CU-BATT
If the user cannot override the condition, the ENT to Continue will not be displayed.
The user can override each authorized condition, by pressing the ent key while the condition is displayed on
the keypad. Each and every condition is individually displayed and overridden.
Pressing enter omits the condition for one set period only. Pressing escape returns to the previous banner.
When setting the system with an overridden fault or tamper condition, the display indicates the overridden
function in place of the set mode by showing the omit message as detailed in the omit menu function. The
Override condition is logged, and will last for one set period only. When all the groups that are affected by theoverride condition become unset, the override status is cleared. An override restore is logged at unset.
If, during a setting attempt, there are conditions that haven’t restored and cannot be overridden, then the
system will not set. The display shows the CALL MANAGER RESET REQUIRED banner with a short
beep every 30 seconds .
Setting Features
The Galaxy control panels provide a range of features to assist the user in the setting and unsetting of thesystem, minimising the possibility of error when carrying out these procedures.
Show Set Status
When Show Status is enabled (refer to option 58.6 = KEYPAD.Show Status ), pressing the 7 and # keys
simultaneously when the normal banner is displayed indicates the group set status.
F = Fault
R = Ready
S = Set
P = Part Set
L = Locked Out
– = Group not assigned to keypad
NOTE: The Show Status indicates the set conditions of groups when the system is set (keypad blank) or
unset (normal banner). Show Status does not operate while engineer mode is accessed.Group BlockSTATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678
Groups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFP

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9 Setting Features (cont’d)
Pressing the 7 and # keys again toggles the display to show the status of the groups individually. To move
between each groups, press the 7 and A or the 7 and B keys simultaneously.
Pressing the 7 and # keys again returns the keypad to the banner display.08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV08:58 TUE 22 NOV
A1U Group A1A1U Group A1A1U Group A1A1U Group A1A1U Group A1
Group A1 is unset
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:
Exit Time
Once the setting routine starts, outputs programmed as Entry/Exit Horn emit a continuous tone. The keypad
used to set the system indicates the time, in seconds, remaining before the system sets.
Exit Time Reset
If any zones are open when setting starts or are opened during the setting routine, the sounder begins to pulserapidly; zones types other than Final , Exit, Entry or Push-Set (and Secure Final or Part Final when acting
as a Final ), indicate on the setting keypad the number of zones open. The A or B keys can be used to view
the open zone types and addresses. Closing the zones resets and restarts the exit time.
Omitted Zones
If zones are omitted when the system starts setting, this is indicated on the keypad. The keypad indicates howmany zones are omitted.
Expiry Warning
During the last 25% of the programmed exit time outputs programmed as Entry/Exit Horn begin to pulse
rapidly, indicating that time is running short.
System Set Indication
At the end of the exit time the Entry/Exit Horns become silent for four seconds. This allows the door to be
locked and secured and gives the detectors time to settle before the system finally sets. Two long tones areemitted to confirm that the system has set. If all groups are set the keypad briefly displays the message SYS-
TEM IS SET before returning to the normal banner.
Group Logic Setting Restriction
If Setting Logic has been assigned to a group (refer to 63.1.2 = OPTIONS.Groups.Setting Logic ), the set
status of the groups must satisfy the conditions defined in the option to permit the group to set. If the Setting
Logic conditions are not satisfied, then the group cannot set. If multiple groups are being set simultaneously,
but one group is restricted due to the programmed Setting Logic , the remainder of the groups set. The
restricted group does not set; there is no warning or indication given.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10 Setting Features (cont’d)
If the programmed Setting Logic results in none of the selected groups being allowed to set, a warning
message is displayed on the keypad. This message does not appear if at least one group sets.
2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set
[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view
Entry Time
The system begins the unsetting routine whenever a Final or Entry zone activates. The Entry/Exit Horns
pulse slowly indicating that the entry time countdown has started. The user must go directly to the keypad,using the agreed entry route, and unset the system before the entry time expires. When 75% of the entry timehas elapsed the Entry/Exit horns pulse rapidly, indicating that time is running short.
Timeout (Slow Entry)
If the entry time expires before a valid code is entered to unset the group, a full alarm occurs. This is recorded
in the event log as a Timeout against the group which was in the process of being unset.
Straying from the Entry Route
If, during the entry routine, the user strays from the agreed entry route and activates a zone in a protected
area, a full alarm occurs.
Abort Time
Should the user exceed the entry time or stray from the entry route a full alarm occurs. However the activationof the intruder output can be delayed to allow time for the user to abort the remote signalling.
The Abort Time parameter can also be programmed so that an Intruder alarm is activated immediately the
entry time expires or a zone is activated, but entry of any valid code cancels the alarm and deactivates theIntruder outputs without the need for a system reset.
Abort Setting Message
Zones that are open or opened during the exit period are indicated to the user by a rapid audible tone from the
entry/exit horns. The keypad displays the open zones and then prompts the user to abort the setting by press-ing the ESC key. This message is designed to prevent users from re-entering the building, closing the openzones, allowing the system to set and trapping the user in the building.
Fail to Set
An output type (Option 53-Program output 40, Fail Set) is available that activates if a full set has not
occurred after a programmed period of time (determined by Option 51-Parameter 35, Fail to Set ) from the
start of the setting procedure.
Power Failure While System is Set
When power is restored to the system, following a complete mains (a.c.) and standby battery (d.c.) powerfailure, the system attempts to return to the set status — full or part — prior to the power failure. The systembegins the setting procedure. If there are no zones open that prevent the system from setting, at the end of theprogrammed exit time, the appropriate groups and parts are set.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11Menu Options 11-19
Option 11 – Omit Zones (Quick Menu Option 0)
Code + ent + 11 + ent + A or B to select zone + # +
A or B to select zone + # + ……….ent (to set) or esc (to select another option)
This option allows zones to be temporarily removed (omitted) from the system. Once a zone has been omitted
it does not generate an alarm condition (including tamper). The omitted zones are reinstated automaticallywhen the system is unset or manually when the zone omit option is disabled.
On selecting the Omit Zones option, the first zone that has the omit attribute enabled is displayed (refer to
option 52 = PROGRAM ZONE ). If there are no omittable zones, then the message NO ENTRIES is
displayed.
Press the A or B keys to view other omittable zones. Press the # key to toggle the omit status of the required
zone. The display indicates the new omit status.
NOTE: A zone is omitted from the system as soon as it is selected.
This process is continued until all the required zones have been omitted:
• pressing the ent key starts the timed setting routine. The number of zones omitted from the system are
displayed during the exit time countdown;
• pressing the esc key returns to the 11 = OMIT ZONES without starting the setting routine.
On returning to the banner (normal or engineer) the keypad displays the message ZONES OMITTED .
Omitted zones remain omitted for one set period only or until they are manually reinstated to the system.
Outputs programmed as Zone Omit (mode programmed as reflex) are activated as soon as the zone is
omitted and remains active until the zone is reinstated. 11 – Omit Zones

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12There are five zone types which vary from the standard Omit Zones operation:
•Vibration Zones — if the omitted zone is a Vibration zone, then all zones (in all groups) programmed as
this type are block omitted. The Vibration zones remain omitted until they are manually reinstated.
Unsetting the system does not reinstate Vibration zones.
•ATM1/2/3/4 Zones — a single ATM zone type can be omitted for the duration of the period entered in
the ATM Timeout parameter (option 51.39 ). The ATM Delay parameter (option 51.38 ) determines
the delay before ATM zones are omitted following the entry of one of the ten ATM Codes.
Entry of a code allows the user to omit one of the ATM zone types. Once omitted, the initiating keypad
indicates the number of minutes remaining until the selected ATM zones are reintroduced to the system. A
warning is given ten and five minutes before the zones are reinstated. The omit time may be extended indefi-nitely by re-entering an ATM Code . Outputs programmed as ATM1/2/3/4 are active when the respective
ATM zone type is omitted, and remain active until the zone type is reinstated.
Refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES for details on the operation of Vibration and ATM zone types.
Manually Reintroducing Omitted Zones to the System
Selecting the OMIT ZONES option; using the A or B keys, select the omitted zone to be reinstated. Press
the # key toggle the omit status of the required zone. The display indicates the new omit status.
Normal Setting with Omitted Zones
Initiate the full or part setting routine. The system starts to set; the display indicates that zones have been
omitted. The zone remains omitted until the system is unset (with the exception of Vibration and ATM zones). 11 – Omit Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-13Option 12 – Timed Set
This option, when entered, starts the setting routine. The Entry/Exit Horns emit the expiry warning using the
programmed exit time (0-300 seconds). The system sets at the end of the exit time or earlier if a Final Zone is
opened and closed, key 0 is pressed — if programmed as an exit terminator — or if a push-set terminator is
operated. The option displays the time remaining until the system sets or the number of open zones preventingthe system from setting. Opening a zone during the exit routine resets the exit timer. Pressing the esc key prior
to the system setting aborts the setting routine.
NOTE: The factory default setting allows the timed setting routine to be initiated by entering a valid type2.3
(or above) user code and pressing the A key. By default the A key is assigned the function Timed
Set. The A key can be reprogrammed by the engineer to perform another function, or to start the
setting routine without a code being entered.
Option 13 – Part Set
This option operates exactly as the Timed Set option with the exception that only those zones that have the
part attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ) are set. All zones have the part attribute
enabled by default. Therefore selecting PART SET from the factory will set all zones. The part attribute of
the zones must be disabled if they are not to be included in the part set.
NOTE: The factory default setting allows the part setting routine to be initiated by entering a valid type 2.3
(or above) user code and pressing the B key. By default the B key is assigned the function Part Set.
The B key can be reprogrammed by the engineer to perform another function, or to start the part
setting routine without a code being entered.
Option 14 – Forced Set (Quick Menu Option 1)
Forced Set allows a timed set of the system when there are zones that are open at the point of se-
lecting the option . The open zones must have the omit attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM
ZONES ). This option is only available if the Forced parameter (option 51.26 ) is enabled; otherwise, the
selection is invalid and the keypad displays the message Option not available .
When the Forced Set option is entered, the keypad displays the number of zones that have been omitted
(manually by option 11 = OMIT ZONES and automatically by the Forced Set ) and the setting routine
begins. If there are any open zones that do not have the omit attribute enabled, the keypad displays thenumber of open zones that are not omittable and prompts the user to view them. The non-omittable zonesmust be closed before the setting routine can continue.
Option 15 – Chime (Quick Menu Option 2)
The Chime option allows the user to switch the chime facility on and off. Any zones that have the chime at-
tribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ) momentarily operate Entry/Exit Horns when
opened; 2 long tones are emitted.
Option 16 – Instant Set
Selecting this option immediately sets all zones. No sounder or exit time is involved.
NOTE: The zones must be closed to allow the system to set. If any zones are open, then the exit time reset
feature (detailed previously) is activated. Options 12 – 16

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-14Options 17 – 19
Option 17 – Silent Part
Selecting this option sets all zones that have the part attribute enabled. It starts a normal timed exit procedure
but exit sounders are not activated. In the event of an alarm occuring during a Silent Part set (e.g. fire alarm),
normal operation will be re-instated.
When group mode is enabled (Menu option 63.1), setting of a group using Silent Part set will not affect the
operation of any of the other group setting options.
NOTE: The zones must be closed to allow the system to silent set. If any zones are open, then the Exit
Time Reset feature (detailed previously) is activated.
Unsetting from Menu option 17 will still give a double beep.
Option 18 – Home Set
The Home Set option either fully sets or part sets the system. The system is:
• fully set if the exit time is manually terminated via a Final or Push-Set zone operation;
• part set if the exit time is allowed to expire.
Option 19 – All Set
All Set allows a timed set of groups assigned to the user code without offering the choice of which groups are
to be set. No group choice is offered. The groups that are set when this option is selected is determined by thekeypad group restriction (refer to option 58.7 = KEYPADS.Groups ):
• If there is no keypad group restriction then all of the groups assigned to the user are set — as long as
there is at least one common group assigned to the keypad.
• If there is a group restriction on the setting keypad, then only the groups that are common to both the user
and the keypad on which the menu option is selected are set. For example, a user assigned groups 1, 2, 3,and 4 selecting the All Set option on a keypad assigned groups 2 and 3 will only set groups 2 and 3.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-15Display Options
Option 21 – Display Zones (Quick Menu Option 3)
Selecting and entering the Display Zones option shows the first zone on the system. Other zones may be
viewed by pressing the A and B keys or by entering the zone number directly.
The top line displays:
• the address;
• the group assigned — if the group mode is enabled. Only the zones assigned to the user’s group are
displayed.
• the zone function alternating with the status — open, closed, high resistance, low resistance, tamper short
or tamper open circuit or masked.
The bottom line shows:
• the zone descriptor (if used);
• by pressing the # key the bottom line changes to show the circuit resistance in Ohms, if using a hardwired
RIO and the RIO (not zone) voltage, pressing the # key returns the bottom line to the zone descriptor.
Pressing the # key twice gives the maximum (+) and minimum (-) zone resistance for a particular day. Thescroll keys (A & B) scrolls between the stored values for the past 14 days.
A printout of all the zones is available from this option by pressing the 7 key; pressing the esc key aborts the
printout.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module, an RS232
interface module, or the on-board RS232 serial port.21 – Display Zones

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-16Option 22 – Display Log (Quick Menu Option 4)
The Galaxy event log is viewed using this menu option. The number of events that each of the Galaxy panels
can store are as follows:
• GD-48 – 1000 events
• GD-96/264/520 – 1500 events
The alarm log uses a FIFO (First In, First Out) method to log and store alarms. The control panel differenti-
ates between mandatory and non-mandatory events. All events are logged, however when the log becomesfull, non-mandatory events are dropped first. The log will always contain at least 500 mandatory events(assuming 500 or more mandatory events have been generated). A full list of EN50131-1 mandatory eventsand non-mandatory events logged by the Galaxy panel is given in Appendix D of this manual.
NOTE: The number of events logged from any one source during any set/unset period is controlled by
parameter 51.48 (Alarm Limits).
If group mode is enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ) and the user code has group choice (refer to
option 42 = CODES ), then the available groups are displayed for selection. Press the number of the groups
to be displayed, the N below the selected group changes to a flashing Y. When all the required groups are
selected press the ent key to access the log; only the events in the selected groups are displayed.
Once the event log is accessed, the most recent event is displayed. The B key steps backwards in time
through the log, while the A key moves forward in time. Holding down either key quickly steps through the
dates until the required date is found. When a selected date is on display the events of that day and previousdays can be viewed by repeatedly pressing the B key; events on subsequent days are viewed by repeatedly
pressing the A key.
The event log is wrapped round from beginning to end. The message START or END (depending on
whether the A key or the B key is being pressed) is briefly displayed when the wraparound is passed through.
The following information is detailed in the event log:
• time – time that event occurred;
• date – day and date that event occurred;• event – information about the type of event that occurred. Certain events are displayed with a +
(positive — indicating that the event started or was activated) or – (negative — indicating that the event
ended or was terminated) symbol;
• user – alternates between the name and number of the user who initiated the event. If the event is
one that is not associated with a user code, for example, an alarm activation or a Final zoneclosing, then no user information is displayed.
Pressing the # key while viewing the log can reveal additional information about certain event types:
• User events reveal the keypad, user type and user group involved in the event;
• Alarm events reveal the zone descriptor, if programmed.• Walk tested RF zones reveal the measured signal strength of each RF device.• REM CALL event displays the Remote Station ID for the Remote Servicing Software which has made
the connection with the panel.22 – Display Log

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17NOTES:
1. Where two identical events occur within 1 second, only one is logged.
2. Only the first occurrences of high resistance and low resistance events on each day are logged.
Subsequent activations are ignored until midnight of the same day. This is to prevent the logfrom being filled with high and low resistance activations from a faulty zone.
The event log can be printed while accessing the Display Log option. Pressing the 77777 key while displaying an
event starts the printout from the displayed event and prints forward to the most recent event. The esc key
aborts the print out.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module, the RS232
interface module, or the RS232 serial port.
Option 23 – System
This option provides a quick overview of the system configuration; two lines of information are displayed at a
time – the A and B keys are used to scroll through the entire list:
• Groups use the A and B keys to scroll through groups A1–8 , B1–8 , C1–8 and D1–8
• Group status U = Unset, S = Set, P = Part set and L = Locked-out for each of the groups
displayed;
NOTE: Enabling the Show Status option (refer to option 58 = KEYPADS ) allows the group set status to
be displayed from the normal banner (when the system is set or unset) by pressing the 7 and # keys
simultaneously.
• Type Galaxy 48, 96, 264 or 520;
• Version version of software in Galaxy panel;
• RIOs fitted includes the on-board RIOs;
• Codes used includes the manager, engineer and remote codes;
• Keypads fitted 1–8 (Galaxy 48), 1–16 (Galaxy 96/264), 1–32 (Galaxy 520);
• Comms modules 1-7 (Telecom, RS232, ISDN, Ethernet, Int Telecom, Int RS232, Audio Module);
• Printer 0–1 (Printer Interface Module);
• MAX Modules gives the number of MAX modules on the system;
• DCM Modules gives the number of Door Control Modules on the system;
• MUX Modules gives the number of MUX Modules on the system• Panel location up to 16 characters of text entered in System Text parameter (option 51.15.2 ).23 – System
Level of User Code10:24 SUN 01 JAN10:24 SUN 01 JAN10:24 SUN 01 JAN10:24 SUN 01 JAN10:24 SUN 01 JAN
K10 L7K10 L7K10 L7K10 L7K10 L7
K = Keypad
AB Line Keypad Address
• Default Set gives the default settings set up in menu 51.17.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18Option 24 – Print (Quick Menu Option 5)
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module, an RS232
interface module, or an on-board RS232 serial port.
This option has two sub-menus:
1 = Printer Module
2 = INT RS232 1
Each of these two sub-menus allows one of the four listed options below to be printed. Only information
corresponding to the groups assigned to the user is printed.
1 = Codes
Prints user number and name, type and groups assigned;
NOTE: Only the manager can print out the user PINS; the Print Codes parameter (option 51.23 ) must be
enabled (default is disabled).
2 = Zones
Prints address, function, group (if group mode is enabled), status, descriptor (if assigned),
status of the chime, omit and part attributes, the RIO voltage and the zone resistance in Ohms;
3 = Log
Prints all events in the log, starting with the most recent and working backwards;
4 = All
Prints codes, zones and log details respectively.
The required option is selected by pressing the appropriate key 1-4. The printing begins immediately and can
be aborted by pressing esc.24 – Print

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-19Option 25 – Access Doors
This option dispays information about the DCM and MAX readers together with users connected to the
system. There are 4 options:
1 = View All
This option displays the access log but with no filter. All events are displayed.
NOTE: If the Access mode has not been enabled (refer to option 69.1 = Mode) the message No Entries is
displayed on entering this option.
2 = User
This option shows all events for the selected user. Managers can see all the users. Induvidual users can onlysee their own events.
3 = Reader
Accessing this option when the access mode is enabled (option 69.1) and there are MAX/DCM modulesconnected to the system displays the address and descriptor details of the first MAX/DCM module on thesystem. Press the A and B keys to view details of the other MAX/DCM modules on the system.
If there are no MAX/DCM modules attached to the system the message None Detected is displayed.
4 = Date
This option allows a specific date to be entered in the format DD/MM/YY . This forces the display to go to a
specific date.
Access Log
Access events are transmitted using Contact ID, SIA and Alarm Monitoring formats. Access events transmit-ted are listed in the table that follows:25 – Access Doors
Table 6-3. Access Log Event SizetnevEn oitpircseDe doCAISDIC
edoCreggirTo NdoMD IresU
sseccA
detnarGdnadetneserpdracdilaV
detadilavGD1 24S GATXAMs eYs eY
draCdilavnItonsahdetneserpdraC
otnodemmargorpneeb
metsysDD2 24S GATXAMs eYo N
draC
detcejeRtub,detneserpdracdilaV
nosaeremosrofdetcejerKD2 24S GATXAMs eYs eY
Table 6-2. Access Log Events
Galaxy Variant Access Log
Event Size
GD-48 500
GD-96 1000
GD-264 1000
GD-520 1000

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-20Access Log Print and Store Option
The Access Doors (MAX Log) is printed on-line and stored in the event memory.
The Access Door Log print displays in the format of the Event Log and allows information to be accessed.
The format is as follows:
HH:MM_XXXXXXXXXX_USR_NNN_UUUUUU_MYY_—_ (39 character display)HH:MM = time in hour:minutes (5 characters). The date will be printed only at the beginning of every day,
that is midnight.XXXXXXXXXX = access message (10 character) Valid, Invalid Card, Reject Card
USR = User (3 characters)
NNN = User number to which MAX card is assigned (3 characters)
UUUUUU = User descriptor (6 characters)
M = MAX reader address (1 character)
YY = MAX physical address-M10, M24 etc (3 characters)
– (dash) = unused character slot
__ (underscore) = this represents a space and is not printed or displayed in the access log.
For example: A valid card read at MAX
3 30 from the card held by user 020, name Albert, at 13:48 would
be:-
13:48 Valid USR 020 Albert M30 –Access Log Information
The access log contains a reason why the door will not operate. These can be:
• Not Grp Match
• Reject Grp Set• Illegal Time
01:00 THU 26 APR01:00 THU 26 APR01:00 THU 26 APR01:00 THU 26 APR01:00 THU 26 APR
USERUSERUSERUSERUSER 001 Rejct001 Rejct001 Rejct001 Rejct001 Rejct
Press the # key to view the reason for rejection:The keypad display in the access log also shows user information:25 – Access Doors (cont’d)
The line number for MAX or prox readers is in the format, for example 0013:
00 = not required
1 = line number 1
3 = Address number 3.10211021102110211021 Grp A1Grp A1Grp A1Grp A1Grp A1
Reject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp SetReader numberDCM Address
Line number

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-21Access Door MAX LED Status
When the access doors option is entered in engineering mode the MAX address can be displayed by pressing
the # key. This is shown in the following Figure graphically for a MAX address as 26.
Figure 6-1. LED Status
The line numbers are represented by the top row in MAX and blocks 2nd and 3rd from the top in the
MicroMAX/MAX3 and the address numbers are represented by the bottom row of blocks in the MAX and
the four bottom blocks in the MicroMAX/MAX3. The top LED on the MicroMAX or MAX3 is always off in
this mode.
The combinations are shown in the following Figure :-
Figure 6-2. Line Number/Module Address
Address
The first digit of the two digit number refers to the line that the module is connected to ( Line 1 on the Galaxy
GD-48; lines 1-2 on Galaxy GD-96/264; and lines 1–4 on the Galaxy GD-520); the second digit is thephysical address number of the MAX module. For example, a MAX module displaying as 25 indicates that
the module is on line 2 and is addressed as 5.
Pressing the # key gives a graphic representation of the MAX address in a binary format. The top two boxes
on the top row indicate the line address; the bottom four boxes indicate the physical address.
Descriptor
The descriptor is a maximum of 16 characters entered in the MAX Parameters option ( 69.2.2 ) or DCM
Parameters (69.3.1 ).
Engineer Mode
On accessing the Access Doors option in engineering mode, each on-line MAX/DCM module displays its
address by lighting the appropriate LEDs. To help the engineer identify each of the MAX/DCM modules, thekeypad displays a graphic representation of the MAX/DCM module address. By matching the … (LED off)
and „ (LED on) image to the LEDs on the MAX/DCM, the engineer can identify each MAX/DCM module
on the system.25 – Access Doors (cont’d)
Line No. Module Address
41
32
41
320
7652 6 M A X2 6 MicroMAX/MAX3 LEDs Displayed MAX LEDs Displayed
M A X
Top (unused)
Bottom

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-22MAX Log
The Galaxy system has a 1000 event log (GD-96, GD-264, GD-520) or 500 event log (GD-48) for the
recording the MAX activations. This log is shared by all readers on the system and operates on a first-in-first-out basis for overwriting events when the log is filled.
To display the events in the MAX log select option 25 = ACCESS DOORS ; use the A or B keys to select
the required MAX address then press the ent key. The first event that occurred on the selected MAX is
displayed along with details of the time, date and MAX number.
To view the log press the A key to move forward in time through the events or the B key to move backwards.
Press the esc key to return to the MAX address display. To view the log of another MAX, use the A or B
key to select the required address. To escape from the Access Doors option press the esc key.25 – Access Doors (cont’d)
02:25 SUN OCT02:25 SUN OCT02:25 SUN OCT02:25 SUN OCT02:25 SUN OCT
USR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 ValidUSR032 ValidTime and date
of event
MAX user number Event type
Press the # key for typical additional information:
NOTE: See Appendix D for MAX Event Log Messages.READER01 GrpA1READER01 GrpA1READER01 GrpA1READER01 GrpA1READER01 GrpA1
Reject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp SetReject Grp Set
Max Events Print-Out
The MAX events can be printed out as they occur to an on-line printer. To print the MAX events ensure that
option 51.28 = PARAMETERS.On-Line Print is enabled. Select option 51.29= PARAMETERS.On-
Line Level and enter 2 to print out all system events including the MAX events or 3 to print out only the
MAX events.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to line one of the Galaxy panel and the printer must remain on-line
(ready to print) at all times.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-23Test Options
Option 31 – Walk Test (Quick Menu Option 6)31 – Walk Test
31 = Walk Test
1 = View 1 = Zones Untested
2 = Zones Tested
2 = Activate 1 = Silent 1 = Test all Zones
2 = Selected Zones
2 = Audible1 = Test All Zones
2 = Selected Zones
31.1 = View
This option allows the user to log on to any keypad to view which zones have been tested and which zones
have still to be tested.
1 = Zones Untested
If this option is selected then the first zone that has not been tested will be displayed. Pressing the A or B keys
scrolls through all the untested zones.
2 = Zones Tested
If this option is selected then the user can view those zones already tested.
31.2 = Activate
This option allows a Walk Test to be carried out silently or audibly.
1 = Silent
This option allows the user to do a Walk Test that does not produce any audible sound. It will be completely
silent. The walk Test offers two methods of testing zones:
1 = Test all Zones
This option initiates a walk test that includes all zones that have the omit attribute enabled (refer to option 52 =
PROGRAM ZONES ). When selected, the walk test starts immediately. The message NO ENTRIES is
displayed if all zones are non-omittable when selecting All Zones. Non-omittable zones are not included in thistest and remain active throughout the test.
2 = Selected Zones
This option allows the user to select any zones, irrespective of function type, for walk testing. As many zonesas necessary may be added to the list before starting the test. On entering this option the details of the firstzone are displayed. Each zone required for test can be selected using the A or B keys or by entering the zoneFigure 6-3. Walk Test Menu

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-24number. Press the # key to toggle the test status of each zone in the Walk Test: the test status of the zone
changes to TEST if it is included in the test and # = TEST if it is not. When all the required zones have beenselected, press the ent key to start the walk test.
Press the 7 key to include all zones in the Selected Zones walk test, without having to individually select the
zones. Once all zones are selected, the # key can be used to remove selected zones from the test.NOTE: PA, PA Silent, PA Delay, PA Silent Delay and Fire are not included in the test when the 7 key is
used to include all zones.
The response times of the zone circuits are reduced to 20 msecs (40 msecs for RF RIO’s) for the duration ofthe walk test to facilitate the detection of loose connections or damaged wiring.
Once the walk test has started, opening a zone (or a zone that is open at the start of the test) activates outputs
programmed as Entry/Exit Horn . If a single zone is open, the keypad displays the address and function of
the zone. If multiple zones are open, then the keypad indicates how many zones are open; the open zones canbe viewed by pressing the A or B keys.
NOTE: The Walk Test option does not display the status of the zones. If an open zone is included in the
walk test, the Entry/Exit Horn will activate as soon as the test is started and remains active until the
zone is closed.
While the walk test is active the message WALK TEST ACTIVE / ESC to abort is displayed; press the #
key to view all zones that have been walk tested so far. To return to the walk test press the # key again.
NOTE: RF zones will also record the signal strength in reduced gain mode.
2 = Audible
This option allows the user to do a Walk Test that does produce an audible sound. The Walk Test works in
the same way as the Silent Walk Test.
Ending the Walk Test
To terminate the walk test, press the esc key. The test will terminate automatically if no zones are activated for
20 minutes.
The results of the test can be viewed by accessing the event log (refer to option 22 = DISPLAY LOG ). The
start of the walk test is indicated by the display WALK TEST + ; each zone that was tested is recorded (the
activation of each zone is recorded only once during the test — even if it was opened several times); the endof the test is indicated by WALK TEST – .31 – Walk Test (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-25Option 32 – Outputs
Outputs are tested by function: for example, when 01 = BELLS is selected, then all outputs programmed as
Bells are activated. Refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUT for a full description of each output func-
tion.
On selecting the Outputs option, output function type 01 = BELLS is offered for selection. Press the A or B
keys to move to the required output function type. Alternatively, the function type number can be entereddirectly, for example entering 13 selects SECURITY . To test the selected output function press the ent key.
The ent key can be used to toggle the function ON and OFF as required. To escape from the Outputs
option, press the esc key.
UsersUser types 2.5 & 3.6 only have access to 01 = BELLS and 02 = STROBE of the Output option. Only the
engineer has access to all the output types.32 – Outputs

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-26Modify Options
Option 41 – Time/Date (Quick Menu Option 7)
The Time/Date option can be accessed and modified by type 3.6 codes, the engineer and the remote code.
If any groups are locked, then the time and date cannot be modified.
Modifying the Time and Date
The Time/Date option allows the system time and date to be modified. On entering this option the display
prompts for selection A = TIME B = DATE . Press the A key to select the time option; this allows a new
time to be entered. The time must be a valid four digit number — in the 24 hour format (hh:mm). The entry, ifvalid, will be accepted immediately and the display is returned to the selection screen. Press the B key to
select the date option; this allows a new date to be entered. The date must be a valid 6 digit number – in theday, month and year format (dd/mm/yy). The date entry, if valid, will be accepted immediately and the displayis returned to the selection screen.
NOTE: The time and date can be modified when groups are set.
Adjusting the Clock Speed
Variations in the accuracy of the clock speed can be compensated by pressing the # key while the A = TIME
B = DATE selection screen in the Time/Date menu is displayed. The keypads prompts for the Adjustment/
Week , in seconds, to be entered; the range is 0 – 120 seconds. If the clock requires to gain time, enter the
required number of seconds. If the clock requires to lose time, enter the required number of seconds andpress the 7 key; the 7 retards the clock speed.41 – Time/Date

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-2742 – Codes
Figure 6-4. Programming CodesOption 42 – Codes (Quick Menu Option 8)
The Codes option is used to assign, modify and delete the codes that allow users to operate and access the
system. The Codes option is divided into two sub-menus:
1. User Codes – sub-divided into up to 11 menus (depending on panel used and whether the group and
MAX mode options are enabled in Menu 63) that determine all of the access information for users who arerequiring PINs. This option also assigns MAX details to user numbers;
2. PIN Warning – determines the warning period given to users prior to the programmed PIN Change
date (refer to option 51.42 = PARAMETER.PIN Change );
3. Card Users – determines the tags/cards on the system for various users.
Programming Codes
1 = User Codes 1 = Modify Pin 4, 5 or 6 digit pin
2 = Modify Level
3 = Modify Name
4 = Schedule1.0 to 3.6
6 alpha-numeric characters
5 = Temp Code 00-99 days
6 = Modify Groups
GD-48: 1-4
GD-96: 1-16GD-264: 1-32GD-520: 1-32
7 = Card Number 10 digit number on access control card or fob
8 = MAX Function number of required menu option9 = MAX Keypad address of keypad that MAX function displays on
10 = APB Forgive This function clears passback restrictions
2 = PIN Warning 1 – 28 days
3 = Card Users 1 = Add Batch
2 = Test Batch
3 = Delete Batch
4 = Batch Start
5 = Batch End
6 = Batch DCM Rdr
7 = Template User(00=None)
11 = Template

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-28Table 6-4. Default Codes
* The authorization code is a secondary system manager code but is not programmed by default.
Engineer Code
• Engineer access is enabled via menu 48.1. This menu is only available to type 3.6 users.
• The engineer code can only modify the engineer PIN.• The engineer code cannot assign, modify or delete the manager or user codes;• On accessing engineering mode, any group that is set becomes inaccessible to the engineer. The
set groups cannot be assigned to zones, outputs and any other functions permitting groupallocation;
• While engineer mode is accessed, all tampers are disabled, however, all constantly alert zone
types — PA zone types, 24 Hour , Security , Fire — remain active.
• The engineer banner is shown on all keypads while engineer mode is being accessed; the
message ENGINEER MODE is displayed;
Entry to the engineer mode must be authorized by a valid type 3.6 user (refer to option 48 = ACCESS
AUTHORIZATION ). The engineer code must then be entered within five minutes of the option being ena-
bled. A single entry of the engineer code directly accesses engineer mode, without activating an engineertamper alarm; ENGINEER MODE is displayed on the keypad. If the engineer code is not entered within
the five minute period, the code is invalid and an Insufficient Access Rights message is displayed on the
keypad. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the period that the engineer canremain in the mode.
NOTE: Dual entry of the engineer code in a system requiring user authorization does not give access to
engineer mode.Default Codes
The Galaxy system provides four default codes: Manager, Engineer, Remote and Authorization User. Refer tothe following table:42 – Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy No. of CodesManager Engineer Remote Authorization*
Default PIN User No. Default PIN User No. Default PIN User No. Default PIN User No.
GD-48 100 12345 98 112233 99 543210 100 – 97
GD-96 250 12345 248 112233 249 543210 250 – 247
GD-264 1000 12345 998 112233 999 54321 1000 997
GD-520 1000 12345 998 112233 999 543210 1000 – 997

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-29Escaping from Engineer Mode
1. Return to the engineer banner.
2. Enter the engineer code.
3. Press the esc key.
The Galaxy begins the exit engineer mode procedure by checking the integrity and security of the system:
•CHECKING FOR TAMPERS — the panel calculates that the standby battery connected to it is capable of
operating the system for the required period (as entered in the Standby Battery parameter — refer to
option 51.37 ). The system then verifies that there are no tamper conditions present on the panel, the
modules or the zones.
•SYSTEM MODULES — if there are no tamper conditions the Galaxy checks the number of modules con-
nected to the system:
• If no modules have been added or removed, “ NO MODULES ADDED, ESC TO CONTINUE” is
displayed. Pressing esc returns the system to the normal banner.
• If modules have been removed they are reported as missing; the engineer is prompted to view the missing
modules and to remove them from the system by pressing the 7; a warning is given before the module is
removed. Press the ent key to confirm the removal of the module. Once all missing modules are removed,
the Galaxy reports the previous and current number of modules connected to the system, before returningto the normal banner.
• If modules have been added, the Galaxy reports the previous and current number of modules connected
to the system, before returning to the normal banner.
If the esc key is pressed at any time during the exit engineer mode procedure, the procedure is aborted and
the Galaxy returns to the engineer mode. This return may take several seconds to complete.42 – Codes (cont’d)
ATM User Codes
ATM ( Automatic Teller Machine) user codes work in conjunction with ATM zone types (refer to Menu
Option 52.48-51=Program Zones ATM1-4 ). ATM user codes cannot be used as normal user codes for
setting/unsetting etc. The following table shows the users for each Galaxy variant that are dedicated as ATMusers::
Table 6-5. ATM User codesGalaxy Variant User codes
GD-48 94 to 96
GD-96 242 to 246
GD-264 986 to 995
GD-520 986 to 995

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-3042 – Codes (cont’d)
Manager Code
The manager is authorized to:
• modify the manager PIN — the manager PIN cannot be deleted — and assign the MAX features
to the code.
If authorized via menu option 48.2 the manager is also authorized to:• program the User Code options of each of the user codes;
• allocate other codes to the manager type (3.6);
NOTE: T he manager PIN can be reset to the default code (12345) by the engineer and remote code using
the Reset Mgr (Manager ) parameter (refer to option 51.21 ).
The manager code defaults to group choice when groups are enabled. The manager is able to togglethe group choice option on and off (using the 7 key) as required.
The manager code defaults to accessing the full menu (options 11 – 48). To access the quick menu (options 0
– 9), remove the 7 assigned to the manager in the Modify Level option.
Programming Codes
Each PIN user has access to modify their own PIN. Users do not have access to user codes other than their
own. The only exception to this is the manager code.
42.1 = User Codes
Enter option 42=Codes and select option 1=User Codes . Press the ent key; details of the first user ( User
001) are displayed. The following typical information is displayed on the keypad.
Group modemax card/tag/fob assigned
Each of the users can be displayed using the A and B keys, or a specific user can be selected by entering the
required user number, for example 023, 069. When the required code is displayed, press the ent key to select
the user codes modification options; 1=Modify PIN is displayed. The available modification options can be
viewed by pressing the A or B keys; press the ent key to select the required option. The options are detailed
in the following paragraphs:User No User Name
001001001001001 User User User User User
L2.3 A 1234L2.3 A 1234L2.3 A 1234L2.3 A 1234L2.3 A 1234
User Type= no pin assigned
= pin assigned
mmmmm

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-31STANDARD USER ACCESS
1 = Modify PIN
The PIN identifies each user to the Galaxy panel and permits the user to operate the system. The Modify
PIN option allows a PIN to be assigned to the user or an existing PIN to be modified. The PIN must be a
four, five or six digit number that is unique to the system.
NOTE: PIN size is dependent upon programming of parameter 51.66=Min Pin Size .
If a duplicate PIN is assigned, the message DUPLICATE ENTRY is displayed; the PIN is not assigned to
the user. As each digits is entered it appears on the lower line of the display. Pressing the 7 key erases the last
digit displayed; continued pressing of the 7 key will erase all of the digits. When the correct PIN has been
assigned press the ent key to accept the programming. If a MAX No. has been previously assigned the
display will prompt: delete max no. A = YES, B = NO and return to the previous menu level. When a PIN
has been assigned to a user number, a solid box ( Q) is displayed on the top line of the user number details
screen.
AUTHORIZED MANAGER ACCESS
Deleting a PIN
Existing PIN entries can be completely erased by using the 7 key instead of a digit entry. When there is no
PIN assigned to a user number a hollow square ( …) is displayed on the top line of the user number details
screen.
Assigning Dual Codes
To program a user code as a Dual Code press the # key while the Modify PIN option is selected. The #
displays at the start of the assigned user PIN ( #1314 ). When a PIN has been assigned as a dual code two
solid boxes ( Q Q) are displayed on the top line of the user number details screen.
NOTE: The Master manager code can not be assigned as dual.
Dual Codes Operation
Entry of a single dual code can not gain access to the menu, set or unset the system. The message NO AC-
CESS – ADDITIONAL CODE is displayed. A second dual code must be entered within 60 seconds of the
first dual code to access the menu, set or unset the system. Dual codes can be different types, the highest typeentered is granted access to the system — whether it is entered first or second.
A single entry of a dual code – without a second dual code entry within 60 seconds – is recorded in the event
log as an Illegal Code ; all outputs programmed as Illegal Code are activated.
Dual Focus
If a MAX number for the same user has a # assigned the dual function only works between the PIN and the
MAX card of the same user.42 – Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-3242 – Codes (cont’d)
Table 6-6. User Access Levels
Duress Code
If the # key is pressed while the Modify Level option is accessed, then the current user code is assigned as a
Duress Code . Entry of a Duress Code at any time activates any output programmed as Duress (refer to
option 53 = OUTPUTS ). There is no limit to the number of codes that can be assigned as Duress Codes .
Entry of any valid user code followed by ## is also a duress code (disabled in the UK to comply withregulations).
Quick Menu
All of the user codes default to the quick menu. This menu is made up of a selection of ten options
(0 – 9) from the full menu options 11 – 68. Access to the quick menu is controlled by the user type. Any usercan be upgraded from the quick menu to the full menu by assigning a 7 to the user while the Modify Type
option is accessed. Therefore a user with type 72.5 would have access to the full menu from options 11 – 42.
No code can access both menus.
The engineer can reprogram the options contained in the quick menu (refer to option 59 = QUICK MENU ).
NOTE: The master manager code defaults to the full menu.
The engineer can determine the menu option access type (refer to option 68 = MENU ACCESS ); this allows
users to access menu options that their code types are not, by default, authorized to access.2=Modify Level
Each user is assigned an access level which determines the menu options available to the user. The program-
mable level are from 1.0 – 2.5.
3.6 is assigned to the manager.3.7 is assigned to the engineer — this is fixed and cannot be assigned to user codes.3.8 is assigned to the remote code. This is fixed and cannot be assigned to the engineer or user codes. The
remote code can only be used via keypads addressed as E.
On selecting this option, enter the level to be assigned to the user and press the ent key to accept the pro-
gramming and return to the previous menu level.
EN50131-1
LevelLevel Access Availab ility
1 1.0† Guard Entered into event memory – no other option
2 2.1† Cleaner Can only set the system and change own PIN
2 2.2† Caretaker Can only set and unset the system and change own PIN2 2.3 Users Menu options 11 – 192 2.4 Users Menu options 11 – 25
2 2.5 Users Menu options 11 – 322 3.6‡ Manager Menu options 11 – 48
3 3.7‡ Engineer Menu options 11 – 713 3.8‡ Remote Menu options 11 – 71
†
‡No access to menu functions
The manager, engineer and remote codes (the last three codes on
the system) have fixed types which cannot be reprogrammed.
NOTE: All levels except guard can change their own PIN.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-333 = Modify Name
This option allows a name to be assigned to the user (maximum 6 characters). Each of the user codes default
to the name USER . The engineer ( ENG ) and manager ( MGR ) are fixed and cannot be reprogrammed. On
selecting the Modify Name option, a section of the alpha-numeric characters that can be assigned to the user
name is displayed on the bottom line of the keypad; the cursor flashes on the letter L. Press the 7 key to
erase the characters of the default or previous name. When the previous name has been erased, use the A or
B keys to move the cursor to the first character of the name and press the ent key; the selected character
appears on the top line. Continue this process until the name is completed.
The # key moves between upper and lower case characters and the system library. The alpha-numeric char-
acters and library words can be selected by entering the character or word reference number (refer to Appen-
dix A — Library ) or by pressing the A or B keys.
When the user name is completed, press the esc key to accept the programming and return to the previous
menu level.
4 = Schedule
This option allows the user’s pin code access to the panel menu options for setting and unsetting. The pin code
only operates during the OFF period of an assigned weekly schedule which is created in option 65.1 .
If a user attempts to use his pin code during the ON periods of his assigned schedule, then an illegal code
event is logged and any outputs programmed as illegal code are activated.
Setting this option to 00=None means that pin codes are always operational.
NOTE: This option does not control card access through doors at all. This is now controlled by templates
and is allocated to a user in option 42.11=Template.42 – Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-345 = Temporary Codes
Temporary Codes allows a PIN to be temporarily allocated to a user. On selecting this option, enter the
number of days (0 – 99) that the code is to remain active. The default setting of 0 indicates that the code is
permanent. A temporary code expires and is removed from the codes list at midnight after the assignednumber of days. A code that has been assigned as a Temporary Code is indicated on the user code display
by a ^ between the user number and the user name, for example 001^USER .
NOTE: The manager, engineer, or remote codes cannot be assigned as Temporary Codes .
PIN Change
If a user is assigned the PIN Change feature in the Temporary Code option, the user must assign a new PIN
after a predetermined period — refer to option 51.42 = PARAMETERS.PIN Change — otherwise the
user PIN expires and is no longer operational.
To program a user code to prompt for a PIN change select the Temporary Code and press the 7 key
instead of entering a number of days for a temporary code; press the ent key to accept the programming and
return to the previous menu level. A code that has been assigned as a PIN Change code is indicated on theused code display with a 7 between the user number and the user name, for example 00177777USER . The
Manager, Engineer, or Remote codes cannot be assigned as PIN Change Codes .
If the value entered in the PIN Change parameter is 0 then the code is assigned as a permanent PIN — a
warning message is briefly displayed to indicate that a Pin Change will not be requested. However, if PIN
Change is within the range 1 – 12, then the number entered is number of months after which the code must be
changed, otherwise it expires.
NOTE: The PIN expires on the first day of the following month.
A notification (1 – 28 days) that the PIN requires to be changed can be assigned using the PIN Warning
option (refer to option 42.2) ; this prompts the user to assign a new code whenever the expiring code is en-
tered – except when the system is unsetting – for the number of days in the PIN Warning before the day the
PIN expires. The new PIN must be six digits and must be different from any current PIN including the user’s
existing one. The new PIN must be re-entered and, if confirmed, the user is returned to the banner. If the esc
key is pressed or the new PIN entered is invalid, the user may continue to use the panel as normal; the nextentry of the PIN will prompt for the PIN change.
NOTE: If the user has not assigned a new PIN by the end of the PIN Warning period, then the code is
erased on the next unsetting of the system.
6 = Modify Group
This option determines the system groups that the user has access to and operational control over. The
Modify Groups option is only available when the group mode is enabled.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
Code has been enabled (refer to option 63.1 = OPTIONS.Groups ); the system defaults to groups disabled.42 – Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-35On selecting the Modify Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the user are displayed. All user
default to group 1. Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the user; pressing 2 and 3 assign
groups 2 and 3 to the user; pressing 1 (when group 1 is already assigned) removes group 1 from the user
code. To assign group choice to the user, press the 7 key. When the required groups have been assigned to
the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Multi-Group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
Table 6-7. Groups
Group Options
Single Group A user can be assigned to any single group. In this case the type 2.2 and above user can
only access, set and unset the single group.
Multiple Groups Users can be allocated to more than one group in which case access and operation is
collective; the user cannot choose to operate on a single or combination of the assignedgroups.
Group Choice Users can be allocated more than one group but also have the choice of which of the
allocated groups to view , set or unset. Pressing the 7 key while assigning groups to the
user assigns the group choice feature.
NOTES:
1. The manager, engineer and remote codes have fixed access to all system groups; this cannot be
reprogrammed.
2. The manager, engineer and remote codes are assigned group choice by default. The manager can
have the group choice feature removed; the engineer and remote codes have fixed group choice.
3. Users authorized to access Option 42 = CODES , can only assign the groups that have been
assigned to their user code; A user who does not have access to group 4, cannot assign group 4 toanother user code.
7 = Card Number
The Card Number contains one of the following:
• the serial number from an access control card
• the 10 digit number etched onto the card/fob/tag• a number generated by the RF RIO identifying an RF Keyfob button• the decrypted code of cards/tags self learned into the system for use with the keyprox.
These numbers identify the card/tag/fob to the system and references it to the user it has been assigned to.42 – Codes (cont’d)
kcolBpuorGs puorGlacisyhP
8-1A8 -1
8-1B6 1-9
8-1C4 2-71
8-1D2 3-52

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-36By default card number is empty.
To enter the required number:
1. Enter the unique 10 digit number laser etched onto the card/fob/ tag or
enter the unique RF keyfob button identifier generated by the RF RIO (refer to RF RIO programming
instructions II1-0076 for details) or
press the A and 1 keys simultaneously of the KeyProx and present the card/fob to the KeyProx reader
within five seconds. The decrypted number in the card will be self learned onto the Galaxy panel anddisplayed on the KeyProx.
2. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: A card number can be assigned to a user code that does not have a PIN allocated to it. All other
options assigned to this user are valid for the card/fob/tag button programmed.
NOTE: For access control cards, when the serial number is not printed on the card, the card number can be
learned using the add batch menu (42.3.1).
8 = MAX Function
The card/fob/tag/button can be assigned a single menu option. The user must be authorized to access the
menu option assigned to the MAX – either by the user level assigned or menu option 68 = Menu Access .
The default option is Not Used . A new option is assigned by pressing the A or B key until the required option
is displayed or by entering the option number directly and then pressing the ent to accept the selection.
9 = MAX Keypad
The menu option assigned to the MAX card can be limited to operate on a single keypad. On selecting this
option the display shows 77, indicating that a keypad has not been specified. To specify a keypad, press the
# key. The address of the first keypad on the system is displayed. Use the A or B key to select the required
keypad and press the ent key to accept the selection.
NOTE: The address of the keypad that is currently being used is indicated by a black square flashing over
the first digit of the keypad address.
“Card-Held” Operation
The programmed MAX function is activated when either,
• the card/fob /tag is held continuously in front of the MAX/MicroMAX/KeyProx reader for 3 seconds
or
• the programmed RF keyfob button is pressed. It should be noted that if button 1 of the RF keyfob is
programmed as a setting function, button 2 will automatically become the unset action, as long asbutton 2 has been programmed for MAX operation on the RF RIO.
If using a MAX/MicroMAX or KeyProx the reader or KeyProx must be assigned a common group to the
user. The keypad specified in option 9 = MAX Keypad displays the assigned MAX function.
Assigning Dual Functions to MAX Numbers
If a card has a # assigned to the number, then any card-held function will only work in conjunction with the
PIN from the same user, provided that the PIN has a # assigned also. The Dual Focus function will work ineither order, but if the card is presented first, it will simply enable the PIN to gain access to the normal menu(see option 42 = Codes for programming).
If a user’s card number is assigned a *, then the card becomes Dual access. This means that it will not open42 – Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-3742 – Codes (cont’d)
the door on its own; it needs another PIN or card as well (see option 42 = Codes for programming).
10 = APB Forgive
This function, if selected, clears all antipassback restrictions for the selected user.
11 = Template
Every user on the system must be allocated an access template. Multiple users can be assigned the same
template. An access template is a list of groups and time schedules that will govern card access through
doors. This method means that if there are multiple doors leading into one group or area, then a user will begiven access to all those doors in one move. This reduces programming time and complexity. The templatesare created in option 45.7 which are in turn made up from the weekly schedules created in option 65.1 .
42.2 = PIN Warning
This option determines the number of days notification before the PIN Change expiry date (refer to option
51.42 = PARAMETERS.PIN Change ) that the user is prompted to assign new code on entry of the expir-
ing PIN. The default period is 28 days, with a programmable range of 1 – 28 . If the user does not assign a
new code by the end of the PIN Warning period, then the code is erased on the next unsetting of the system.
NOTE: The PIN Warning ends on the last day of the month, the PIN expires on the first day of the follow-
ing month.
42.3 = Card Users
This option determines the tags/cards on the system for various users. There are seven options:
1 = Add Batch
This option starts enrolment and displays the user/tag for each presentation. When batch enrolling (auto
assigning of tags to users), the panel increments the user number, starting from Batch Start. It does this for
every new tag presented at the DCM assigned in Batch DCM.
2 = Test Batch
This option checks the tag number stored at the panel for the current tag presented at the Batch DCM. It can
also be used to go directly to the user programming details that are assigned to the presented tag.
3 = Delete Batch
This option removes card numbers from enrolment. A warning is given before deletion.
4 = Batch Start
This option determines the user number where enrolment starts.
5 = Batch End
This option determines the user number where enrolment ends.
6 = Batch DCM Rdr
This option determines the DCM reader used for enrolment. Pressing the * key returns the system to the
default of any reader.
7 = Template User
This option chooses a user to be a template whose access authority and non-unique attributes are applied to
other users on the system when using the 1 = Add Batch function.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-38Option 43 – Summer (Quick Menu Option 9)
The Daylight Savings Time is in accordance with European standards. The Daylight Savings time is described
as follows:
On the first day of each year, the British Summer Time (BST) Start date is set to the last Sunday in March
and the End date is set to the last Sunday in October.
The operation of the Summer option is as follows: at 01:00 hours (GMT) on the Start date, the system clock
advances to 02:00 hours (DST); at 02:00 hours (DST) on the End date, the system clock goes back to 01:00
hours (GMT).
NOTE: The time always changes with reference to GMT. For example, Italy, which is +1 hour would be:
Last Sunday in March – 02.00 to 03.00Last Sunday in October – 03.00 to 02.00
The Start and End dates can be reprogrammed by authorized user codes. Press the A key to modify the
Start date or the B key select the End date; the new date must be a valid four-digit number – in the day/
month format (dd/mm).
Option 44 – Trace
This option provides a record of the most recent alarm activation. The Trace option records the details of the
setting and unsetting of the system immediately before and after the alarm activation and the first five eventsoccurring during the alarm activation. This information is maintained in the trace until the next alarm activation.On entering the option pressing the A and B keys steps through each of the seven trace entries.
Pressing the # key while viewing the Trace option displays additional information about certain events — user
events reveal the keypad, user level and current group; alarm events reveal the zone descriptor if pro-grammed.
The currently display trace can be printed out by pressing the 7 key; pressing the esc key aborts the print-
out.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via the on-board serial port, a printer inter-
face module or an RS232 interface module.
Group Mode
If group mode is enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), there is a separate trace for the most recent
alarm activation in each of the groups. On selecting the Trace option, a user with group choice (refer to option
42 = CODES ) can view the trace of the assigning groups; press the number of the group to be displayed —
the N below the selected group changes to a Y — and then press the ent key.
If more than one group is selected, or the user does not have group choice, then the trace for the group with
the most recent alarm activation is displayed.43 – Summer/44 – Trace

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-3945 – Timer Control
Option 45 – Timer Control
45.1 = View
This option allows the weekly schedules programmed in option 65.1 to be viewed:
1 = Weekly Schedule
Use the A and B keys to scroll through each of the programmed schedules and on/off times.
2 = Timer Outputs
This option allows the Timer- A and Timer-B outputs with on/off times, allocated in option 65.2, to be
viewed.
3 = Autoset
Use the A and B keys to scroll through the groups to select one (optional) and also to view the time schedule
allocated per group.
4 = Lockout
Use the A and B keys to scroll through the groups to select one (optional) and also to view the time schedule
allocated per group.
NOTE: The programmed times cannot be modified using this option.
All of the programmed timers – Weekly Schedule , Timer Outputs , Autoset and Lockout – can be printed
out using option 57.11 = SYSTEM PRINT.Timers .
45.2 = Holidays
This function allows up to 32 holiday periods to be allocated. A Start and End date is entered for each holi-
day period using the 1=Modify Dates option, and the groups that are affected by the programmed holiday
periods are assigned using the 2 = Assign Groups function. The operation of all timers for the assigned
groups is suspended during these dates; the last operation of the Timers before the start date remains in
operation until the first operation after the end date. For example, a code which has been allocated the Timer
A period in the CODES option ( 42.1.4.1 ) will be inoperative during the programmed holiday period if the
Timer A is in the On time when the holidays starts.
1 = Modify Dates
On selecting this option, the first holiday period with 1=Name and 2=Modify Dates options are displayed.
Upon selection of 2=Modify Dates , the Start and End dates for holiday period 1 are displayed; an arrow
(>) points to the Start date. If no dates have been entered for this period, then the display shows 77/77.
To program the Start date, press the ent key; the date display changes to >DD/MM< ; enter a valid four
digit number and press the ent key to accept the selection; the year is not required, only the day and months
(dd/mm).
Press the # key to move to the end date and follow the procedure for programming the Start date. The #
key toggles between the Start and End dates for each holiday; the arrow ( >) indicates which date is currently
selected.
To remove a programmed date, press the 7 key. The date display returns to 77/77.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-402 = Assign Groups
This function determines which of the groups are affected by the programmed holiday periods.
On selecting the Assign Groups option, the groups currently assigned to the programmed holiday periods are
indicated by a Y below the group; an N is displayed below the unassigned groups. All groups default to Y .
Pressing the group number toggles the group status. When the required groups have been assigned to theholidays, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
45.3 = Early Open
If the Early Open option ( 45.3.2 ) is enabled, the Lockout OFF time (refer to option 65 = TIMERS ) for
the following day is brought forward by the number of minutes (0 – 240) programmed in parameter 44 =
Early Open . This allows the system to be manually unset earlier than normal.
1 = Early Times
If the Timer is set to off, the operation of the Timer is suspended; this option cannot be used to alter the
programmed times. The timer defaults to 0 = Off . To switch the timer on, select change the setting to 1 =On .
The Timer Status can also be altered through menu option 65.1 by the engineer only.On selecting the option, the early opening status of the groups is displayed; early opening enabled is indicated
by a Y below the group; an N is displayed below the groups that are not programmed to open early. All
groups default to N.
NOTE: Only the engineer can enable early opening for individual groups, but global enable must be done
first.
2 = Early Open
Type 3. 6 Users and Engineer when Groups are Disabled
If groups have not been enabled on the system, the programming of the Early Open option is identical for
type 3.6 users and the engineer; the option permits early opening to be disabled or enabled:
0 = Disabled (default) — early opening not permitted;
1 = Enabled — early opening permitted.
Select the required status and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu.
Engineer Mode with Groups Enabled
If groups have been enabled (option 63 = OPTIONS + early open permitted ), then the groups can be
individually enabled to permit early opening.45 – Timer Control (cont’d)
Use the A or B key to move between the different holiday periods or enter the number of the holiday period
(1 – 10 ) to be programmed.
The holiday periods can only be programmed by the master manager and engineer. Users can access this
option, however, they can only view the programmed holiday dates.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4145 – Timer Control (cont’d)
45.4 = Timers
This option allows each of the programmed weekly timer schedules to be switched on and off as required. If a
timer schedule is set to off, the operation of the timer is suspended; this option cannot be used to alter the
programmed times. All timer schedules default to 0 = Off . To switch the timer schedule on, select the required
timer and change the setting to 1 =On .
The Timer Status can also be altered through menu option 65.1 by the engineer only.On selecting the option, the early opening status of the groups is displayed; early opening enabled is indicated
by a Y below the group; an N is displayed below the groups that are not programmed to open early. All
groups default to N.
NOTE: Only the engineer can enable early opening for individual groups, but global enable must be done
first.
45.5 = Late Work
The Late Work option — if programmed as 1 = Enabled — authorizes an Autoset Extension in advance
of the prewarning period (refer to option 65.3 = TIMERS.Autoset );
NOTE: Additional extensions can be authorized by entry of a valid code during the subsequent autoset
prewarning periods.
45.6 = Weekend Work
The Weekend Work option allows a valid user code to authorize the system to unset at the weekend. There
are two options:
1 = Program Days
This option allows the weekend day option to be selected.
1 = Weekend Day
On selecting this option the programmed Weekend Day is displayed; the default is 0 = OFF . Use the A or B
keys to select the required day or days and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the
previous menu level:
0 = OFF
1=S A T2 = SUN3 = BOTH (Saturday and Sunday)
The selected Weekend Day remains active for one occurrence only. The Weekend Day returns to the
default of OFF immediately following the assigned day. The Weekend Day must be allocated each time the
function is required.
If the Weekend Day is programmed other than 0 = OFF (default), on the next occurrence of the pro-
grammed Weekend Day , the Timers adopt the times assigned in Pattern day from option 65.1.6. For
example, this allows a Sunday to use the Autoset and Lockout Timers from Monday to Friday.
NOTE: Parameter 51.41 = Weekend Work must be enabled (default is Disabled ) to allow the Weekend
Day to be selected by the user.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4245 – Timer Control (cont’d)
2 = Pattern Day
Option not available. See Option 65.1.6
2 = Assign groups
This option assigns the groups that will be unset at the weekend.
NOTE: The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight
groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D. Press the A or B key to display each of the group blocks.
45.7 = Access Template
An access template defines when and where a user is allowed access. For each access template, a schedule is
given to each group (area) to define when access to each group is possible. Up to 100 templates are availableper system. There are two options for each template:
1 = Name
A name of up to 12 characters can be allocated to each template.
2 = Schedules
The schedules programmed in Menu option 65, Timers, are allocated to each group with the selected access
template under this option. Group mode has to be enabled in menu option 63.1 to allocate a weekly scheduleto a group.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4346 – Group Omit
Option 46 – Group Omit
This option allows a 3.6 type code to block omit all the omittable zones that are open at the end of the confirm
time in a group or multiple groups. All zones in the required groups that have the omit attribute enabled (referto option 52.4 = PROGRAM ZONES.Omit ) are omitted when this option is selected. Groups can be
omitted and reinstated without setting and unsetting the system.
On selecting the Group Omit Option the groups assigned to the user code and keypad are displayed as well
as the omit status of each group ( Y below the group indicates that it is omitted, N indicates that it is not omit-
ted). To omit a group, press the required key. The letter beneath the group number changes from N to Y. To
reinstate the group press the key to toggle from Y to N.
NOTE: The type 3.6 user must have group choice to enter Group Omit.
NOTE: The zones in the selected groups are omitted from the system as soon as the group is selected.
On returning to the banner (normal or engineer) the keypad displays the message ZONES OMITTED .
Omitted zones remain omitted for one set period only or until they are manually reinstated to the system.
Outputs programmed as Zone Omit (mode programmed as reflex) are activated as soon as the zone is
omitted and remains active until the zone is reinstated. If the output mode is programmed as latch, then theZone Omit outputs activate when the system is set and remain active until the system is unset — reinstating
the omitted zones.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4447 – Remote Access
Option 47 – Remote Access
This menu option permits control of all site initiated remote connectors. The menu structure for this option is
shown below.
Figure 6-5. Remote Access Structure47 = Remote Access
1= Service 0 = Int Telecoms 0 = Direct Access
1 = Call back-1 to 5 = Call back-5
1 = ISDN 0 = Direct Access
1 = Call back-1 to 5 = Call back-5
2 = Ethernet 0 = Direct Access
1 = Call back-1 to 5 = Call back-5
3 = Ext Telecoms0 = Direct Access1 = Call back-1 to 5 = Call back-5
2 = Send Alarms (Option not Available)
3 = Call Galaxy (Option not Available)
4 = Auto service1 = Mode 0 = Off
1 = Timed2 = Instant3 = Confirm
2 = Timers
1 = Start Time
2 = End Time3 = Sync Schedule 000 (0-365) days4 = Schedule Reset
0 = Off1 = Auto Reset2 = Manual Reset
3 = Terminate Idle
Idle Time 10 (0-60 mins)
4 = Conn Retry 1 = Retry Interval 30 (0-60) mins
2 = Retry Duration 06 (0-24) hours3 = Redial Mode
0 = Off1 = Retry2 = Direct
5 = Control Upload 1 = Eng Prog
2 = User Prog3 = Either
6 = Remote Maint 1 = Schedule 000 (0-365) days2 = Advice
1 = Code Only 0 = Disabled1 = Enabled
2 = Code + Notice
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
3 = No Code/Notice 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
7 = Service Pin
8 = Send Panel ID0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
9 = Delay Time 03 (3-10) secs

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4547.1 Service
This option enables type 3.6 users to control the access mode of the remote servicing package. There are
several options available for increased flexibility and security.
0 = INT Telecoms
This option selects the on-board telecoms as the communication device.
0 = Direct Access
On selecting this option, a 40 minute access period is enabled on the Galaxy panel; remote servicing software
can directly access the system during this period. Once access to the panel has been gained, it can be main-tained indefinitely; there is no maximum duration. On terminating the remote servicing connection to the panel,the access period remains valid for an additional 15 minutes.
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5
A maximum of five numbers can be preprogrammed by the engineer (refer to option 56.1.12 =
COMMUNICATIONS.Telecom.Remote Access ). On selecting one of the numbers (1 – 5) followed by
the ent key, the Galaxy panel dials out to the preprogrammed telephone number associated with the Call
Back number.
If the number selected does not have a preprogrammed telephone number, the system prompts for a number 1
to be entered. Enter the required telephone number and press the ent key; the panel then dials out to the
telephone number entered.
NOTE: The PC that the panel is dialling to must have remote servicing software running in the Waiting for
Call-Back mode.
1 = ISDN
0 = Direct Access
See INT Telecoms description
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5
See INT Telecoms description (except menu option 56.3.09 replaces 56.1.12).
2 = Ethernet
0 = Direct Access
See INT Telecoms description
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5
See INT Telecoms description (except menu option 56.4.03 replaces 56.1.12).47 – Remote Access (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-463 = EXT Telecoms
0 = Direct Access
See INT Telecoms description
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5 (see Telecoms description)
47.2 Send Alarms
Option not available
47.3 Call Galaxy
Option not available
47.4 Auto Service
The Galaxy Dimension panels can be programmed to automatically initiate communications to remote servic-
ing software, under three circumstances:
• If any site programming has changed the panel will automatically send the new programming to the
downloader.
• On a predetermined schedule the panel can activate an automatic periodic upload.• On a predetermined schedule the panel can activate an automatic remote routine inspection.
NOTE: The Auto Service function works for both the Internal Telecomms and Ethernet module.
The following sub options allow the engineer to select the mode of the automatic communication in each of the
three situations. These options are not available to users.
1 = Mode
This selects the mode of the automated connection following a change to the panel programming. There are
four modes:
0 = Off
In this mode the panel will not automatically initiate a remote servicing call even if the panel programming haschanged. This is the default setting.
1 = Timed
In this mode, following modification to panel programming, a remote servicing call will be initiated automati-cally between a programmed start time (option 47.4.2.1) and end time (option 47.4.2.2). To avoid traffic
congestion the panel selects a random time between the start and end times to initiate the call. Once theconnection is made, the new panel programming will be uploaded to the remote servicing package.47 – Remote Access (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4747 – Remote Access (contd)
2 = Instant
In this mode, following modification to panel programming, the connection to the remote servicing package is
initiated immediately, using call back number 1, on exiting engineering mode. Once the connection is made, thenew programming will be uploaded to the remote servicing package.
3 = Confirm
In this mode, when engineering mode is exited following a change to the panel programming, a message isdisplayed at the keypad to asking whether a remote connection should be initiated. This must be authorized byan appropriate user type before the call is made.
Once authorized, a two minute delay period is initiated. During this period, the engineer can initiate or cancel
the call.
If connection is initiated the panel uploads the new panel programming to the remote servicing package.
2 = Timers
This option selects the mode for automatic schedule to start a periodic upload. There are four further options:
1 = Start Time
This is the start time of the off-peak window during which the panel can initiate an automated remote servicing
call. The default is 01:00.
2 = End time
This is the end time of the off-peak window of the automated remote servicing call. The default is 06:00.
3 = Sync Schedule
If this option is programmed, after a period equal to the number of days entered (0-365), the panel will auto-matically carry out an automatic connection to the remote servicing application and upload the latest panelprogramming during the off-peak window time programmed in menu 47.4.2.1=Start Time and
47.4.2.2=End Time . The default number of days is 0 which disables the option.
4 = Schedule Reset
The schedule reset option controls the way in which the Sync Schedule operates. There are three further
options:
0 = Off
The panel will never initiate a remote servicing connection. This is the default setting.
1 = Auto Reset
This option resets the Sync Schedule timer after an automated connection.
2 = Manual Reset
This option resets the Sync Schedule timer after a copy of site data whether done automatically or
manually..
3 = Terminate Idle
This option allows a timeout period to be programmed into the panel which terminates a remote connection
after the programmed period of activity. This is programmable within the range 0-60 minutes. After termination

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-48the panel records in the event log the message REM ABORT to indicate that the connection was unexpectedly
terminated. The default timeout period is 10 minutes.
4 = Conn. Retry
If the attempt to initiate a remote servicing call fails, the panel can be programmed to do repeat dial attempts.
There are three further options:
1 = Retry Interval
The dial attempts can be programmed to occur from 0-60 minutes. Setting the value to 0 disables the featureThe default setting is 30 minutes.
2 = Retry Duration
The length of time that the panel tries to do a remote servicing call can be programmed from 0-24 hours.setting the value to 0 disables the feature. The default setting is 6 hours.
3 = Redial Mode
In the event of a remote servicing session terminating unexpectedly, the panel enters one of the three program-mable modes that follow.
0 = Off
The panel does not try to re-establish a connection.
1 = Retry
The panel initiates a remote servicing call to re-establish a connection. The retries will be as per option47.4.4.1 (Retry Interval) and 47.4.4.2 (Retry Duration).
2 = Direct
The panel access mode changes to allow direct access for 30 minutes. This mode operates as peroption 47.1=Service when Direct Access is selected.
5 = Control Upload
This option controls whether a connection is established when only engineer or user programming data is
uploaded. This feature has three options.
1 = Eng Prog
Only initiates a connection when engineering programming has been modified.
2 = User Prog
Only initiates a connection when user programming has been modified.
3 = Either
Initiates a connection when either engineering or user programming has been modified.
6 = Remote Maint
This option controls the mode for automatically initiating communications for remote routine inspection and47 – Remote Access (contd)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-4947 – Remote Access (contd)
maintenance. The panel uploads only the most recent information available from 61=Diagnostics . No other
panel programming is uploaded. There are two sub-options that control this:
1 = Schedule
This option controls the schedule for the initiation of communication for remote routine inspection. The sched-ule can be set from 0-365 days. The default is 0 days which disables the function.
2 = Advice
This option controls the method by which communication is initiated. It can be initiated automatically by theschedule programmed above or manually by user entry of the Service PIN code, with or without a notificationmessage. There are three options. The default value for each is disabled.
1 = Code Only
Entry of a Service PIN code automatically initiates a remote servicing connection to call back number 1.The Service PIN code can only be modified by remote users. When the Service PIN code is entered,it resets any scheduled connection timers.
2 = Code + Notice
This enables the remote servicing notification timer, and display of remote servicing notification. Theremote service notification message is not displayed if the system is set. It only becomes active when thepanel is unset. The message REMOTE CALL INIT, A=SP PIN ENTER is displayed on the keypad
after entry of a valid manager type user code.
3 = No Code/Notice
This enables a remote servicing session without the need for a Service PIN code and the panel’sremote servicing notification message. This option uses the start and end times programmed in menu47.4.2.1 and 47.4.2.2 respectively.
7 = Service Pin
This is a 6-digit numeric Service PIN code (default 987654), which initiates an automated call to the Remote
Servicing application. The Service PIN code can only be changed from Remote Servicing and sending theService PIN code to the panel via the Send Remote Access Start Code . The Service PIN code cannot be
the same as any other user codes on the system. This option is only available when option 47.4.6.1 (schedule)is greater than 0 and when option 47.4.6.2.1 (code only) are enabled.
8 = Send Panel ID
When a remote servicing connection is established, this option allows panel identification and authentication.
When enabled, the following sequence of events occur.
Once a remote servicing connection is established, whether panel or PC initiated, the panel delays for a period
as determined by Delay Time for incoming information from the remote servicing package.
If a valid control character is received by the panel within the delay period, the panel transmits an identity
string. If no character is received during the delay period the call is terminated.
9 = Delay Time
This is the time that the panel delays for incoming information from the remote servicing package. The delay
time can be set from 3-10 seconds. The default is 3 seconds

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-50Option 48 – Engineer access
This option allows access to be authorized for engineers for system programming and for managers in order to
add/delete/change all user codes.
48.1 = System Access
This option allows system programming of the Galaxy panel and is sub-divided into 1 = Engineer and
2 = Manager .
48.1.1 = Engineer
The engineer code is assigned programmed as dual by default. This prevents the engineer from accessing
engineer mode unless authorized to do so by a valid code. To gain access to the engineer menu a type 3.6user must enter their code, and enable the Engineer Access option. This provides a five minute period during
which a single entry of the engineer code provides access to engineering mode without causing a tamperalarm. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the access period.
If the Engineer Mode option has not been enabled, or the code is not entered within the five minute period,
then the Engineer code is invalid and has no effect.
If the PIN is programmed without the #, the Engineer Access option does not require to be enabled to allow
the engineer to gain access to engineer mode. The engineer code requires to be entered twice. The first entryactivates a tamper alarm which is cancelled by the second entry.
NOTE: Dual entry of the engineer code in a system requiring user authorization does not give access to
engineer mode.
When a manager gives authorization, from menu 48.1, for engineer access, the access is limited to one visit
only. When the engineer returns the system to user mode, the authorization is still valid for five minutes. Afterthis time it must be granted again by the manager.
48.1.2 = Manager
This option allows type 3.6 manager codes to be enabled for user code adding/deleting/changing. This option
can only be enabled by the authorization code. However, this option is not used by default. Manager codesare always authorized. It can be enabled, if required, to comply with standards in certain regions. An authori-zation code must be assigned in Menu 42 Codes, before the function is enabled.
48.2 = SIA Access
This option allows access to the SIA alarm signalling format and has two levels of access
48.2.0 = Full Access
This option allows a SIA level 4 user to send commands to the Galaxy control panel. The user can reset the
panel after an alarm signal.
48.2.1 = Limited access
This option only allows up to SIA level 3 access but excludes resetting of the panel after an alarm signal.48 – Engineer Access

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-51Engineer 1
Option 51 – Parameters
This option allows the engineer to modify the system functions. Options can be selected using the A or B keys
or by entering the two digit parameter number and pressing the ent key. The selected options can then be
programmed by using the A key to increase or the B key to decrease the values assigned to the parameter;
pressing the ent key accepts the new value and returns to the previous menu level. Any parameters that differ
from this procedure are indicated in the following paragraphs. The parameters also prompt the engineer onwhich keys to press.
For example, press:
•1 then 6 parameter 16 = Soak Time selected;
•ent currently soak time is displayed along with the programmable range
07 (1–14) days ;
•08 value of the required soak time, the display shows the new value 08 (1–14) days ;
•ent accept the programming and return to 16 = Soak Time displayed.
NOTE: Default settings must be changed before programming in Menu Option 55 – Soak.
Assigning Parameters to Groups
Several of the parameters allow separate values to be assigned to the groups on the system. If groups have
been enabled, the relevant parameters prompt for a group to be selected; when selected, the value is assignedto the group parameter using the procedure outlined in the previous example.
The parameters that permit group selection are indicated in the following paragraphs.51 – Parameters

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5251 – Parameters (cont’d)
Table 6-8. System ParametersParameter Groups Ga laxy 48/96/264/520
01 Bell Time 99
02 Bell Delay 99
03 Abort Time 99
04 Exit Time 99
05 Entry Time 99
06 System Reset 99
07 Ta m p e r R e s e t 99
08 No. Re-arms 99
09 Omit All 99
10 Key '0' not available 9
11 Local Part 99
12 Banner not available 9
13 PA Delay 99
14 KEY/SW Level not available 9
15 System T ext not available 9
16 Soak Time not available 9
17 Restart not available 9
18 Stop Set not available 9
19 Part Alarm 99
20 Power Delay 99
21 Reset Mgr. not available 9
22 PA reset 99
23 Print Codes not available 9
24 Exit Alarm 99
25 Global Copy not available 9
26 Forced not available 9
27 cct Debounce not available 9
28 Online print not available 9
29 Online level not available 9
30 Video 99
31 Delay Alarm 99
32 Show Alarms not available 9
33 Secure Code not available 9
34 Comfort Time not available 9
35 Fail T o Set 99
36 Battery Size not available 9
37 Standby Time not available 9
38 ATM Delay not available 9
39 ATM Timeout not available 9
40 Datelock not available not available
41 Weekend Work not available 9
42 PIN Change not available 9
43 Timer Access not available not available
44 Early Open not available 9
45 High Security not available 9
46 Res. Select not available 9
47 Set Confirm not available 9
48 Alarm Limits not available 9
49 Confirm Time not available 9
50 RF Bat Delay not available 9
51 RF Jam Delay not available 9
52 RF Stop Set not available 9Parameter Groups Ga laxy 48/96/264/520
53 RF Stop Mode not available 9
54 Keypad Access not available 9
55 Confirm not available 9
56 Force Restore not available 9
57 Bell Extend not available 9
58 Power Alarm not available 9
59 Part T one not available 9
60 RF Parameters not available 9
61 Activity Mon not available 9
62 Lockout not available 9
63 Banner alerts not available 9
64 Set Override not available 9
65 Reset Levels not available 9
66 Min Pin Size not available 9
67 Level Format not available 9
68 Line Fail not available 9
69 Alert Inds not available 9
70 SWDC Set Dly not available 9
71 MF BL Enable not available 9
72 Max Alm Cause not available 9
73 Guard Unset not available 9
74 Back-up Link not available 9
75 Back-up Timer not available 9

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5301 = Bell Time
The duration of the Bells output activation is programmable within the range 0–30 minutes; the default is 15.
Assigning a value of 00 minutes sets the Bell Time to infinity.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.The Entry/Exit Horn is subject to the Bell Time parameter in both the set and unset conditions.
02 = Bell Delay
The delayed activation of the bell is programmable within the range 0–20 minutes; the default is 0. The Bell
Delay is overridden by a comms failure (either a Comms Fail on the Communication Module or by the
activation of a Line Fail zone used to monitor a digicom); an alarm condition in either of these conditions
results in instant bells activation.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
03 = Abort Time
The abort function delays the activation of a full intruder alarm condition following an entry alarm. This param-
eter has 2 sub-options:
1 = Abort Time
The abort time is programmable within the range 0-300 seconds and can be assigned a different value for each
group. The abort time will be initiated:
• whenever a zone that is not on the entry route ( Final, Entry and Exit zones) is activated — a
user strays from the entry route;
• a valid code is not entered before the entry time expires.The abort operation can be modified by adding a ș or # to the programmed time. The standard abort
operation is as follows:
ƒFor entry route deviation, the signalling of an intruder alarm is delayed.
ƒIf a valid code is entered before the entry time expires:
(1) The intruder is not signalled.(2) The system does not require a system reset.
ƒIf a valid code is not entered before the entry time expires or an entry timeout condition occurs:
(1) The intruder is signalled at the end of the entry time.(2) The Abort timer starts on expiry of the entry time.
ƒIf a valid code is entered within the programmed abort time:
(1) If an abort output/channel is allocated to the alarmed group:
a) The Abort signal is sent.b) The intruder condition is not restored.c) Intruder restore is not signalled.
(2) If there is no abort output allocated to the alarmed group:
a) The intruder condition is restored.b) Intruder restore is signalled
ƒIf the programmed abort time is allowed to expire without a valid code being entered, then the system
requires a system reset. The panel cannot be set until this occurs.
NOTE: If reduced resets (51.55.3) is enabled, the alarm will be reset by the user code, if the alarm is
unconfirmed.51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-54Modified Abort Operation
Hash # abort alters the standard operation so that the signalling of the intruder condition is delayed until the
end of the abort time. If the system is unset during the entry time or abort time, no alarm conditions will besignalled.
Star ș abort alters the standard operation so that if a user strays from the entry route within the entry time,
the intruder is signalled as soon as the entry deviation occurs.
NOTE 1: To comply with DD243:2002, the Standard abort operation must be used, with the abort time
set to 001 seconds.
NOTE 2: To comply with EN50131:2004 and DD243:2004, the Hash # abort operation must be used
with the Abort Time set to 30 seconds or longer.
2=Bell Delay
This option is either enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will hold off the start of any bell delay time pro-grammed in parameter 03, until the end of the abort time programmed above.
04 = Exit Time
This parameter determines the time allowed to leave the premises via the exit route before the system sets.
The Exit Time is programmable within the range 0–300 seconds; the default is 120 seconds.
Infinite Exit Time
Assigning a value of 000 seconds sets the Exit Time to infinity; an Exit terminator activation ( Final or Push-
set zone) is required to complete the setting of the system. The infinite Exit Time is normally used with a
Push-set zone to terminate the setting and an Entry zone to start the unsetting procedure.
NOTE: If the system is programmed to Autoset and the Exit Time is programmed to 000, the Exit
Time will be set to 60 seconds for the Autoset — there is no requirement for a Push-Set zone to
be activated.
Setting Multiple Groups
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group. If more than one is group is being set, the
longest exit time is adopted for all setting groups.51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5505 = Entry Time
This parameter determines the entry time allowed to users when unsetting the system. The Entry Time is
programmable within the range 0–300 seconds; the default is 45. Assigning a value of 000 seconds sets the
Entry Time to infinity.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: A Final zone assigned a 7 when programming the function will double the programmed Entry
Time for the group it is allocated to.
06 = System Reset
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the type that can reset the system following
an intruder alarm. The default type is 3.6 — manager; the programmable range is:
•2.3–2.5 for the user
•3.6 for the manager
•3.7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: This option is affected by reduced resets, menu option 51.55.3.
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if alarms have been signalled, via the Communication Module
and appropriate type reset is set to 3.7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically reduce to type3.6. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
NOTE: This option can also be programmed from parameter 65 = Reset Levels.
07 = Tamper Reset
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the code type that can reset the system
following a tamper. The default type is 3.7 — engineer; the programmable range is:
•2.3–2.5 for the user
•3.6 for the manager
•3.7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: This option is affected by reduced resets, menu option (51.55.3)
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if alarms have been signalled, via the Communication Module
and appropriate level reset is set to 7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically reduce to type3.7. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
08 = No. Re-Arms
The Number of Re-arms parameter determines the number of times that an armed system can re-arm the
bells, following an alarm activation. The default setting is 9 (infinite) with a programmable range of 0 – 9,
where 9 is infinite re-arm. If the option is enabled, then the system re-arms at the end of the programmed
confirm time – only if all zones are closed or are open and can be omitted, or if the Omit all force is enabled.
The intruder output remains active until a system re-arm occurs.51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-56Zones that are open at the end of the bell time must be omittable ( Omit attribute enabled); the re-arm will omit
these zones. The complete zone circuit, including the tamper facility, is omitted. Refer to menu option 52 =
PROGRAM ZONES for details on enabling the zone omit attribute.
NOTE: If an open zone is not omittable, then the system will not re-arm, unless parameter 09 = Omit All is
set to 2.
09 = Omit All
This option determines if activated zones can be omitted at re-arm as described above.
0 = Disabled
1 = Omit All When set to 1 (enabled), omits any omittable zones that are open at re-arm. The complete zone
circuit including tamper is omitted.
2 = Force. As Omit All but omits zones whether omittable or not.
Refer to menu option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES for details on enabling the zone omit attribute.
10 = Key “0”
Key 0 on the keypad can be assigned to operate as a Push-set zone function; this will terminate the timed
setting procedure. When the option is set to 1 (enabled), pressing key 0 during the exit time completes the
setting of the system. The default is 0 (disabled).
NOTE: Key 0 must be pressed only on the keypad used to start the setting procedure.
11 = Local Part
When the Local Part parameter is set to 0 (disabled – default setting) the Intruder outputs are disabled when
the system is part set; the programmed bell delay is overridden. This is normally used to prevent the communi-cator from dialling the Alarm Receiving Centre.
If the Local Part parameter is set to 1 (enabled) the Intruder outputs activate if an alarm condition occurs
when the system is part set.
Option 2 (SIA part off ) is identical to option 1 with the exception that when the alarm format of the telecom
module is set to SIA then the part setting and unsetting of the system is not signalled to the ARC.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
12 = Banner
This option can be used to customise both the top and bottom lines of the banner display. Press 1 to select
the TOP LINE or 2 to select the BOTTOM LINE ; the display is written using the alpha-numeric assembly
method:
•7 erases characters;
•# selects upper case, lower case or library;
•A B selects alphabet character/words;
•000–500 selects alphabet character or words;
•ent positions selected characters/words;
•esc accepts the programming and returns to the previous level; exits from the option.
The banner is displayed when the system is in the normal mode (set/unset).51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5713 = PA Delay
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of a PA Delay or PA Delay Silent zone and the
alarm sounding and signalling a PA via the communicator. The PA Delay is programmable within the range
1–60 seconds; the default is 60.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
14 = Key/SW Level
This parameter assigns a code type to zones programmed as Keyswitch . The Keyswitch zone can be used
to reset system, tamper and PA alarms – depending on the reset type assigned to each of these parameters.The default type is 3.6 – manager; the programmable range is:
•3.7 for the engineer
•3.8 for the remote code
15 = System Text
This parameter allows two text strings to be assigned to the system: press 1 to select the System ID or 2 to
select the Panel Location .
1. System ID — 16 character identification of system. This is used when connecting Remote Servicing
software.
2. Panel Location — 16 character message of where control is fitted.
The text is written using the alpha-numeric assembly method:
•7 erases characters;
•# selects upper case, lower case or library;
•
A B selects alphabet character/words;
•000–538 selects alphabet character or words;
•ent positions selected characters/words;
•esc accepts the programming and returns to the previous level; exits from the option.
16 = Soak Time
This parameter determines the number of days that zones can be soak tested for; the programmable range is
1 – 14 days; the default is 7.
NOTE: Default settings must be changed before programming in Menu Option 55 – Soak.51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5817 = Restart
This parameter has three options:
1 = Restart
This option re-configures the system without the need to remove and reconnect the power. The system dis-
plays a WARNING!!! ent=RESET SYSTEM , press the ent key to reconfigure the system. The keypad
display becomes blank for a few seconds, then displays the message Configuring Please Wait . When
configuration is complete the banner returns to the normal display (day mode). The Restart option configures
any modules that have been added to the system but gives an alarm if there are any tampers open or if anymodules are reported as missing.
NOTE: This parameter exits engineer mode. It is however recommended that the exit engineer mode se-
quence is used when adding or removing modules from the system.
NOTE: Outputs are momentarily reset during the restart. If the system has a communications requirement,
put it on test before using the restart.
2 = Defaults
This option chooses the panel default settings for a particular country. These are: 1 = UK, 2 = Spain,3 = Portugal, 4 = Germany, 5 = Italy.
The system displays a WARNING!!! ent=RESET SYSTEM , press the ent key to reconfigure the system.
3 = Language
This option chooses the language shown on the keypad display. These are: 1 = English, 2 = Espanol,
3 = Portugues, 4 = Deutch, 5 = Italiano. Pressing ent changes the display immediately.
18 = Stop Set
This parameter, when set to 1 (enabled), prevents the system from set override if there is a communication or
power fail condition at the time of starting the setting procedure. If the condition is the result of an open Line
Fail or AC Fail zone, then the system can not be set until the zone is closed or omitted. The Stop Set param-
eter is set to 0 (disabled) by default.
NOTE: Battery Low will also prevent the system from setting.
19 = Part Alarm
When the Part Alarm parameter is set to 1 (enabled — default setting) the Bells and Strobe outputs activate
if an alarm condition occurs when the system is part set.
When the Part Alarm parameter is set to 0 (disabled) the Bells and Strobe outputs are disabled when the
system is part set.
NOTE: The Horn, Entry/Exit and Intruder outputs are not affected by this parameter.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.51 – Parameters (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-5951 – Parameters (cont’d)
20 = Power Delay
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of AC Fail outputs following a mains failure to
allow the power to return before signalling the fault. The Power Delay is programmable within the range
0–600 minutes; the default is 10.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
21 = Reset MGR
This parameter should only be used if the Master Manager code is lost or must be replaced. On selecting the
Reset MGR parameter, a warning message is displayed: WARNING!!! ENT=Code Change ; press the
ent key to erase current code and reset it to the default of 12345 .
22 = PA Reset
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the code type that can reset the system
following a PA activation. The default type is 3.6 — manager; the programmable range is:
•2.3 – 2.5 for the user
•3.6 for the manager
•3.7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if alarms have been signalled, via the Communication Module
and appropriate type reset is set to 3.7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically be reduced totype 3.6. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
23 = Print Codes
The Print Codes option, when set to 1 (enabled), allows the manager to print a list of the PINS for each of
the users. The option defaults to 0 (disabled).
24 = Exit Alarm
If the Exit Alarm parameter is set to 1 (enabled), any zone other than Final , Exit, Entry or Push-Set (or
Secure Final or Part Final when acting as a Final ) that is opened during the exit time causes a full alarm
condition to be activated. The default is 0 (disabled).
NOTE: This option must be used only when specified.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
If the Exit Alarm parameter is enabled, any zone that is open when the Autoset begins (at the end of the pre-
warning period) causes an immediate full alarm condition to be activated.
If the Exit Alarm parameter is disabled, any zone open when the Autoset begins (at the end of the pre-
warning period) results in an “urgent” bleeping from the Entry/Exit Horns . If the open zones are not closed
by the end the time assigned in parameter 35 = Fail To Set , a full alarm is activated along with any outputs
programmed as Fail-Set .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6051 – Parameters (cont’d)
25 = Global Copy
The Global Copy parameter changes all zones within the selected range to the function and parameters of the
first zone in the range. On selection of the parameter, a warning message is displayed indicating that the zonefunctions will be altered — WARNING!!! ENT=ZONE CHANGES : press the ent key to continue or the
esc key to abort the programming. The address and function of the first zone on the system are displayed:
•Copy Start: Use the A or B key to select the first zone in the range to be copied and press the ent key.
The function of this zone will be copied to all subsequent zones in the range;
•Copy End: Use the A key to move to the last zone in the range to be copied.
• Press the ent key to copy the zone function to the selected range.
26 = Forced
The Forced parameter enables or disables Menu option 14 = FORCED SET . If the parameter is set to 1
(enabled) the user can force the system to set, automatically omitting any omittable zones that are open at thetime of setting. If the parameter is set to 0 (disabled), option 14 = FORCED SET is not available to the user;
the message Option not available is displayed. The parameter defaults to 0 (disabled).
NOTE: It is recommended that Final , Entry and Push-Set zones have the omit attribute disabled.
27 = CCT Debounce
The cct Debounce parameter determines the response time of the zones (how long they must remain open
before registering as changing state). The cct Debounce is programmable within the range 20–1000 millisec-
onds ( 0.02–1 second); the default is 300 msecs. All entries are rounded up to the nearest 20 msecs.
NOTE: The value programmed in this option is the value allocated to the SYSTEM selection when program-
ming zone response time in option 52.
28 = Online Print
This parameter is used to select the print mode required when connecting a serial printer to the Galaxy panel;
there are two options:
0 = disabled (default): system only prints specific details at the user’s request. The printer can be
connected and disconnected at any time as required;
1 = enabled : this option switches the printer to on-line mode and requires that a printer be
continuously connected to the system. Events are printed as and when they occur. The events printedare controlled by parameter 29 = Online Level .
NOTE: If Online Print is enabled, the event log and other options will not be printed at the user’s request.
The parameter must be disabled to permit all other print options to operate.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6151 – Parameters (cont’d)
29 = Online Level
The On-line Level parameter determines the level of events that are printed when parameter 28 = Online
Print is enabled:
0 (default) – basic print (setting, unsetting, alarms);
1 – full print excluding MAX events (setting, unsetting, alarms, modifications, technical
details)
2 – full print including MAX events (all logged events).
3 – MAX events only (only card events).
4 – Basic Print plus MAX events (option 0 + MAX events).
30 = Video
This parameter determines the number of activations that must occur on any of the zones programmed as
Video , in a single set period, before a full alarm occurs; there is no time limit on the period between
activations. The Video parameter is programmable within the range 1–9 activations; the default is 2. The video
output occurs on every activation but a full alarm does not occur until the programmed number of activations isreached. The Video zones activation counter is reset when the system is unset.
NOTE: The activations of the Video zones are cumulative – the counter is incremented each time any Video
zone in the group is activated.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
31 = Delay Alarm
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of an Intruder Delay zone and the alarm sound-
ing or a Log Delay zone being recorded as opening in the event log. The Delay Alarm is programmable
within the range 0–3000 seconds; the default is 60.
If a second Intruder Delay zone opens followed by the first zone closing, the Delay Alarm time continues to
count from the activation of the first zone. The Delay Alarm timer is reset only when all delay type zones
return to the closed state.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
32 = Show Alarms
If the Show Alarms parameter is enabled, the first alarm activation is immediately displayed on all the
keypads when an alarm condition occurs. Normally alarm messages are not displayed until the alarm iscancelled by entry of a valid code. Parameter 51.63 , Banner Alerts must be enabled to view alarms on the
keypad banner.
0 = disabled (default)
1 = enabledNOTE: This parameter will only function when at least one group is unset.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6251 – Parameters (cont’d)
33 = Secure Code
Once this parameter has been selected, the engineer code is randomly changed each day at 08:00 hours. The
service engineer must be informed of the “code of the day” by head office. The random code that is generatedis dependent on the local engineer code, therefore each area, company, branch or even system can have aunique secure code.
Either the engineer or remote user code can select the Secure Code parameter. On selecting this parameter
the secure code equivalent to the current engineer code must be entered to confirm the selection. Only theremote user code (or a cold start – erasing all programming details) can cancel it.
Select 1 to enable Secure Code , or 0 to disable the parameter; the default is 0 (disabled).
34 = Comfort Time
The Comfort Time parameter permits a period of time to be allocated when the values assigned to the entry
and abort time parameters and the number of wrong code attempts are doubled; the programmable range is0–14 days; the default is 0. This allows new or unfamiliar users to become accustomed to the system without
causing false alarm activations. At the end of the Comfort Time the system returns all the affected parameters
to the programmed values.
35 = Fail to Set
This parameter determines the period of time that a zone must remain open, following the start of the setting
procedure, before the Fail Set outputs activate. The programmable range is 0–999 seconds; the default is
360 .
NOTE: The Fail to Set countdown time begins as soon as the setting procedure is started.
NOTE: The Fail to Set time should be at a minimum 5 seconds longer than the Exit Time (option 51.04),
to allow for the setting period to expire.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
36 = Battery Size
Enter the size of the standby battery on the control Panel PSU. The programmable range is 0–99 Ah; the
default is 0.
37 = Standby Time
Enter the value (in hours) that the system is required to run on standby battery if there is a mains fail. The
programmable range is 0–99 hours; the default is 0.
The Control Panel PSU calculates the battery run time from the programmed Battery Size (parameter 36)
and the load current. If the programmed Standby Time exceeds the calculated battery run time, a
STANDBY TIME LOW message is displayed on the keypad on attempting to exit engineer mode. Exiting
engineer mode is prevented until a Standby Time that is less than the calculated battery time is entered or a
larger battery is installed in the system and the new battery size is entered in the Battery Size parameter.
To view the latest battery Standby Time refer to Option 61.1.4=Diagnostics.Latest.PSU Comms.
NOTE: The calculated battery run time has a 10% safety margin built in.
38 = ATM Delay
This parameter determines the period of time before the selected ATM zone type is omitted following the
entry of one of the ATM codes. The programmable range is 0–30 minutes; the default ATM Delay is 5.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6351 – Parameters (cont’d)
39 = ATM Timeout
This parameter determines the period of time that the selected ATM zone type is omitted following the entry
of one of the ATM codes. The programmable range is 1–90 minutes; the default ATM Timeout is 30.
40 = Datelock
Option not available
41 = Weekend Work
This parameter is used to enable or disable menu option 45.6 = TIMER CONTROL.Weekend Work . If
the parameter is set to 1, the engineer can assign a Pattern Day and the user can authorize Weekend Work-
ing. If the parameter is set to 0 (disabled — default setting), the message Option not available is displayed
on selecting menu option 45.6, Weekend Work .
42 = PIN Change
This parameter defines the expiry period of user codes allocated the PIN Change attribute (refer to option 42
= CODES ). The PIN Change parameter is programmable within the range 0–12 months; the default is 0.
The user PIN must be changed before the assigned PIN Change month ends. On entering the expiring user
code a warning that the code is due to expire and a prompt to assign a new code is given to the user. Theperiod of this warning message is determined by the PIN Warning option (refer to menu option 42.2 =
CODES. PIN Warning ).
The default value is 0 – this means that although codes have been allocated the expiry attribute, they do not
expire.
43 = Timer Access
Option not available.
44 = Early Open
This parameter determines the number of minutes before the Lockout OFF time that the system can be
manually unset when the Early Open option (refer to menu option 45 = TIMERS ) is switched on. The
Early Open parameter is programmable within the range 0–240 minutes; the default is 0.
45 = High Security
This option allows RIO zones to be monitored for Constant V oltage Tampers. A constant voltage tamper is
activated if a zone detector is replaced by a constant voltage source, for example, battery. This feature caneither be enabled or disabled. Only RIO zones are affected by this feature.
The High Security feature is disabled by default in the RIO, so must be turned on by the panel for this feature
to be activated. The feature can be turned on from the panel via Parameter 45 (High Security). The defaultvalue for this parameter is disabled. If enabled, all RIOs on the system are affected.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6446 = Resistance Select
RIOs rev 1.2 and Smart PSUs rev 0.7 and above allow the zones to be programmed, with different resistance
preset values for zone status activation. This feature allows selection of End Of Line or Double Balanced zoneresistance types. The on-board zones can also be modified using this feature.
The “EOL/Dbl. Bal.” resistance types are selectable from this option. The system default value is 1k Fault
(Double Balanced). There are 10 preset pre-programmable resistance configurations:
1 = Preset 1 (BAL); 2 = Preset 1(EOL); 3 = Preset 2 (BAL); 4 = Preset 2 (EOL); 5 = Preset 3 (BAL);
6 = Preset 3 (EOL); 7 = Preset 4 (BAL); 8 = Preset 4 (EOL); 9 = 1K Fault (BAL); 10 = 1K Fault (EOL).
The tables that follows shows the resistance windows for each type:51 – Parameters (cont’d)
Table 6-9. Preset value limits (ohms) – double balanced
Table 6-10. Preset value limits (ohms) – end of line
When a preset is selected, this will be the zone resistance range used by every zone on the system. Each zone
on the system can be further customised to a specific preset by using menu option 52.9, Resistance Select.Option 01 – 1k Option 03 – 2k2 Option 05 – 4k7 Option 07 – 5K6 Option 09 – 1k Fault
T amper S/C 0 – 800 0 – 1800 0 – 3700 0 -1400 0 – 800
Low Res 800 – 900 1800 – 2000 3700 – 4200 1400 – 2800 800 – 900
Normal 900 – 1200 2000 – 2500 4200 – 5500 2800 – 8400 900 -1200
High Res 1200 – 1300 2500 – 2700 5500 – 6500 8400 – 9800 1200 – 1300Open 1300 – 12000 2700 – 12000 6500 – 19000 9800 – 12600 1300 – 3500
Fault – – – – 3500 – 4500
Masked 12000 – 19000 12000 – 15000 19000 – 22000 12600 – 22000 4500 – 19000
T amper O/C 19000 – infinity 15000 – infinity 22000 – infinity 22000 – infinity 19000 – infinity
Option 02 – 1k Option 04 – 2k2 Option 06 – 4k7 Option 08 – 5k6 Option 10 -1k Fault
T amper S/C 0 – 800 0 – 1800 0 – 3700 0 – 1400 0 – 800
Low Res 800 – 900 1800 – 2000 3700 – 4200 1400 – 2800 800 – 900
Normal 900 – 1200 2000 – 2500 4200 – 5500 2800 – 8400 900 – 1200
High Res 1200 – 1300 2500 – 2700 5500 – 6500 8400 – 9800 1200 – 1300
Fault – – – – 1300 – 4500Masked 1300 – 12000 2700 – 12000 6500 – 19000 9800 – 19000 4500 – 19000
Open 12000 – infinity 12000 – infinity 19000 – infinity 19000 – infinity 19000 – infinity

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6551 – Parameters (cont’d)
47 = Set Confirm
This parameter allows the system to emit a short double beep when the system/group has set. There are three
options.
0 = Off
No indication
1 = Alert on Set
A double beep when the system has set
2 = Alert on Comm
A double beep after a successful signal to the ARC that setting has occurred.
48 = Alarm Limits
This parameter allows the user to program the maximum number of alarms, per group, which may be transmit-
ted to an Alarm Receiving Centre in any set period. There are three options:
1 = No of Alarms
This is the total number of zone activations logged in any one set period. The selectable values are 0-10
where 0 is unlimited.
2 = Unset Limit
This is the number of activations logged from any one zone in any one unset period. The selectable values are
0-7. The default is 3.
Fire alarms are not restricted by this parameter.
3 = Set Limit
This is the number of activations logged from any one zone in any one set period. The selectable values are 0-
7. The default is 3.
Fire alarms are not restricted by this parameter.
NOTE: This feature only affects Contact ID, SIA and Microtech communication formats.
49 = Confirm Time
This option is the maximum time between two separate zones for a confirmed alarm to be generated up to a
maximum of 99 minutes, which is equivalent to the complete set period, with a default of 30 minutes.
50 = RF Bat Delay
This option allows a warning to be given at the Galaxy panel if an RF low battery is detected. An additional
option is given at the panel that allows a delay up to a maximum of 100 hours (default) before a signal of RF
BAT LOW is sent to the ARC.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6651 – Parameters (cont’d)
51 = RF Jam Delay
This option allows the RF RIO to send an RF jam signal to the Galaxy panel if it detects interference for 30
seconds. If the interference is continuously present for five minutes (default), the signal is transmitted to centralstation. The programmable range is 0 – 30 minutes.
52 = RF Stop Set
If this option is enabled, the setting is prevented if all supervised devices have not signalled to the receiver in
the stop set period prior to setting. This is selectable from 0 – 250 minutes. The default is 20 minutes.
53 = RF Stop Mode
This option controls if and how an RF fault prevents the panel from being set. There are three options:
0 = Disabled: An RF fault will not prevent setting
1 = Warning: If there is a failure the user will get a warning but can continue to set.
2 = Auto Check: If there is a failure the system cannot be set until the zone(s) have been activated.
54 = Keypad Access
This option allows the keypad to unset the system. There are two options:
1 = Always
2 = Except Entry: Except when entry time is running. This ensures that users are unsetting using a fob or
MAX tag (portable device)
55 = Confirm
This option controls how confirmed alarms are generated. It controls the operation of confirm outputs plus the
signalling of confirmed alarms. There are three options:
1 = Operation: This option controls when confirmed alarms can be triggered. An entry timeout alarm will
never contribute to a confirmed alarm. Here are three options:
1 = Before Entry . Confirmed alarms can be triggered before starting entry time only.
2 = Except entry (UK) . Confirmed alarms can be triggered any time except during the entry delay
period.
3 = Always (EU) . Confirmed alarms are always enabled.
2 = Entry Timeout: This option controls whether exit type zones can cause confirmed alarms, after an entry
timeout.
0 = Disable Exits . Exit type zones will only cause unconfirmed intruder alarms. They will not contribute
to the two activations required for a confirmed alarm.
1 = Enable Exits . After the expiry of the entry delay, activation of an exit type zone will be identical to an
intruder zone.
3 = Reduce Reset : This option allows user reset following an unconfirmed alarm.
0 = Off . Full system reset is required for any intruder alarm.
1 = On Unconfirmed . The system can be reset by user, if the alarm is unconfirmed. If the alarm is
classed as confirmed, a full system reset will be required.
56 = Force Restore
This option dictates when intruder restore signals are transmitted.
1 = Unset/Unconfirm: On unset or at the end of the confirmed time if the alarm is not confirmed.
2 = System Reset: Sent when the system is fully reset.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6751 – Parameters (cont’d)
57 = Bell Extend
If enabled, this parameter extends the bell time if the system cannot rearm. For example , if the zone is still
open and cannot be omitted. The bell time can be extended up to 30 minutes maximum . The Default is 0, noextension.
58 = Power Alarm
If enabled, this parameter allows the Bells, Strobe and Horn outputs to activate when there is an AC fail and
the system is set. The default is 0.
59 = Part Tone
When enabled, this parameter changes the setting tone for a part set. The new tone is on 2 secs, off 0.1 sec.
60 = RF Parameters
1 = Supervision
This parameter has two sub options:
1 = Silent Alarm. If enabled, it stops Supervision alarms from activating sounders when set.
2 = Debounce. This extends the normal 2 hour delay for supervision by a further 24 hours.
61 = Activity Mon.
This parameter allows zone activity to be checked. If zones programmed for zone activity checks are not
activated within the programmed time period and/or number of set/unset cycles a zone masked fault is indi-
cated at the panel. Six different combinations of check criteria are available for each zone.
Each criteria type can be programmed to check the number of days, the set/unset cycles or both. Default
value is both.
1 = Mode
The mode can be set to one of three options: Max Period, Max Unsets or Either.
2 = MAX Period
The time period that zone activity is checked can be set to between 1 and 28 days. Default is 14 days.
3 = MAX Unsets
This is the number of programmable set/unset cycles that must take place before a zone masked fault is indi-cated at the panel. The number of set/unsets can be programmed from 1 – 10. The default is 7.
62 = Lockout
This parameter prevents code guessing on the Galaxy system.
1=Lockout
This parameter determines the number of invalid code attempts, which can be tried before keypad lockout
occurs. Keypad lockout prevents any entry via all keypads associated to the groups assigned to the keypadwhere the invalid attempts were made. The lockout lasts for 90 seconds. Each subsequent invalid attempt tocause a further 90 second lockout to occur. Entry of a valid code will reset the lockout counter. Lockout canbe programmed between 0 and 10. Default is 6. Setting to 0 disables the function.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6865 = Reset levels
This parameter determines the type of user that can reset specific fault types. The default values are shown in
the table below.
Table 6-12. User Type Reset Level51 – Parameters (cont’d)
2=Tamper
This parameter determines the number of invalid code attempts, which can be tried before system tamper
occurs. Lockout tamper can be programmed between 0 and 21. Default is 15. Setting to 0 disables thefunction.
63 = Banner Alerts
This parameter determines whether system alerts are displayed on the Galaxy keypad banner. If enabled
system events will be indicated on the display. The default value for this parameter is disabled.
64 = Set Override
This parameter determines the type of user that can override specific fault events to set the system. The default
values are shown in the table below.
Table 6-11. User Type Override Level
A different value can be programmed for each group.epyTtluaFepyTresU
leveLedirrevO
metsyS1 .2
repmaT6 .3
AP1 .2
liaFeniL6 .3
tluaFlareneG1 .2
liafrewoP1 .2
NOTE: This parameter affects and is affected by parameters 51.6 (System Reset), 51.7 (Tamper Reset) and
51.22 (PA Reset). If the parameter reset level is changed at 51.65 then this change is reflected at51.6, 51.7 and 51.22.
66 = Min Pin Size
This parameter determines the minimum size of each user code. This can be set from four to six digits. The
default is five digits.Fault TypeUser Type
Reset Level
System 3.6
T amper 3.7
PA 3.6
Line Fail 3.7
General Fault 3.7
Power Fail 3.6

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-6951 – Parameters (cont’d)
67 = Level Format
This parameter determines the format used for user code authorization levels.
1 = EN.Galaxy (Default)
Uses new EN Galaxy user types 1.0 to 3.8.
2 = Galaxy
Uses standard Galaxy levels 0-8.
68 = Line Fail
This parameter allows the programming of the period between the panel being alerted by a communication
module of a Line Fail condition, and the user being alerted of the alarm condition. This value can be pro-grammed between 0 and 1800 seconds. The default is 50 seconds.
NOTE: The communication module may take up to 40 seconds to alert the panel of a Line Fail condition.
This time is in addition to the programmed time of 0-1800 seconds.
This parameter affects all communication modules on the system.
69 = Alert Inds
This parameter allows the alert audio indication to be switched off. The default is 1 = Audio only .
0 = No Indication
1 = Audio Only
2 = Visual Only (only when parameter 63 enabled)
3 = Audio/Visual (only when parameter 63 enabled)
70 = SWDC Set Dly
When enabled, this parameter delays the indication of open zones at the start of a set sequence whilst the
Switch DC output (53.08) is active; this includes keypad text and sounders.
If there are no outputs programmed as Switch DC then there will be no delay at the start of the set.
71 = MF BL Enable
When enabled, this parameter allows the panel to send a SIA event when the battery is low and there is a
mains power failure. When the event is sent, the Power Delay time set in parameter 51.20 stops immediately.
72 = Max Alm Cause
This option defines the range of valid cause codes, as agreed with the Alarm Receiving Centre. When this
function is enabled, a cause code must be entered by the user when a reset of the system is required.
This parameter can be disabled by setting the alarm cause code to 000.
73 = Guard Unset
If set to 1 = Enabled this option allows a type 2.1 user code to unset the system if an alarm has occured. The
user code becomes type 2.4 after 3 minutes of the alarm but after 60 minuts returns to type 2.1. The usercode can set the system at any time provided there are no outstanding resets required.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-7051 – Parameters (cont’d)
74 = Backup Link
If the Ethernet fails to report, this parameter, when enabled, allows the communication to revert to Telecoms.
75 = Backup Timer
This is the time that the backup link is active. The time can be set from 0-300 seconds. The default is 90
seconds.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-71Option 52 – Program Zones
This option is used by the engineer to modify the programming of the zones on the system. The option also
allows the attributes of the zone to be changed. The programmable options are shown in the table that follows:
Table 6-13. Zone Attributes
Selecting Zones
On entering the option, the first zone on the system is displayed; the zone address, function and group as-
signed are displayed on the top line, the descriptor is displayed on the bottom line. Pressing the # key togglesthe descriptor to reveal the status of the chime, omit and part attributes. If the attribute is enabled, the initialattribute letter is displayed, if it is disabled, a dash (–) is shown. For example, chime, part and omit enableddisplay as COP , if omit is disabled the display would be C – P .
From the display of the first zone, any zone on the system can be displayed by pressing the A or B keys or by
entering the address of a specific zone.
The zone is selected for programming by pressing the ent key; the first zone programming attribute 1=Func-
tion is displayed.
Attributes
The attributes can be stepped through by pressing the A or B keys or directly selected by pressing the at-
tribute number ( 1–8). Once the required attribute is on display, press the ent key to gain access for modifica-
tion.
Once the attribute has been assigned press the ent key to save the programming and return to the attribute
selection level.
Pressing the esc key at any time when assigning attributes 1 and 3–10 to a zone aborts the programming and
returns to the attribute selection level. Pressing the esc key when assigning a descriptor to a zone saves the
assigned alphanumeric text and returns to the attribute selection level.52 – Program Zones
setubirttAn oitpircseD
1n oitcnuFe pytenozngissa
2r otpircseDn oitpircsedciremun-ahpla).xam(retcarahc61
3e mihC tesnuelihwdenepoenozfitceffeemihcyliratnemom=delbane
4t imOd ettimoebnacenoz=delbane
5t raPm etsysfognittestrapnidedulcnienoz=delbane
6e miT.pseRe mitecnuobedtiucricyfidoM
7A ISmotsuCt neveAIStceleS
8. noMytivitcAg nikcehcytivitcaenozrofairetircstceleS
9t celeS.seRe nozrofegnarecnatsiserstceleS
01p uorGm etsysehtnopuorgelgnisaotenozngissa
:etoN delbanesinoitpopuorGehtfiraeppaylnospuorG
.)spuorG.SNOITPO=1.36noitpootrefer(

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-721 = Function
Entering the Function attribute displays the address and the current function of the selected zone along with
the zone function reference number. The zone functions can be stepped through, forwards or backwards,using the A and B keys. Alternatively a zone function can be directly selected by entering the zone function
reference number, for example, entering the 19 displays zone function 19 = FIRE .
Once the required zone function is displayed, it is assigned to the zone by pressing the ent key.
2 = Descriptor
Each zone can be assigned with an alpha-numeric descriptor of up to 16 characters. This descriptor is assem-
bled from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor attribute, the currently as-
signed descriptor (blank by default) is displayed on the top line – an underscore shows where the next charac-ter will be positioned, and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line – the cursor flashes on theletter L.
Press the 7 key to erase the characters already assigned to the descriptor.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned
underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the char-
acter to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required zone descriptor.
Text Case and LibraryOn entering the Descriptor attribute the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing
the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number – refer to
Appendix A – Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the descriptor.
NOTE: Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.
3 = Chime
If the Chime attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone will chime momentarily whenever it is opened while the
system is unset. The Chime attribute defaults to 0 (disabled) for all zone functions.
The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Chime attribute — pressing 1 or 0 will also select the
required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
NOTE: The Chime option (full menu option 15, quick menu option 2) must be enabled if the zones are to
chime when opened.
4 = Omit
If the Omit attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone can be omitted from the system by using one of the omit
functions ( 11 = OMIT ZONES , 14 = FORCED SET , 46 = GROUP OMIT
). The Omit attribute defaults
to 0 (disabled) for all zone functions.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-73The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Omit attribute – pressing 1 or 0 will also select the
required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
5 = Part
If the Part attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone will be included in the setting procedure when one of the
part setting options is used to set the system ( 13 = PART SET , 17 = INSTANT PART ). The Part attribute
defaults to 1 (enabled) for all zone functions except zones programmed as 09 = Keyswitch .
The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Part attribute – pressing 1 or 0 will also select the
required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
6 = Resp. Time
This function is only applicable to zones on RIO rev 1.2 and Smart PSU rev 0.7 and above.
This option allows the user to select , either Fast (10ms), System (default value programmed in 51 – Param-
eters, Option 27) or Slow (750ms), for each zone.
7 = Custom SIA
This option allows a different SIA mnemonic to be allocated to the selected zone. The default is the standard
SIA mnemonic for the zone type selection. The default mnemonic can be reselected by pressing the 7 key.
The table that follows shows the list of available customisable mnemonics:
Table 6-14. Customisable Mnemonics52 – Program Zones (cont’d)
oNt xettnevEn oitpircseDm ralAd esolCt imOt imonUb uorTs eR.rTt seTp maT
1t luafeD
2r ewoPR/TAl arotseRCA,elbuorTCAT AR AB BU BT BJ BX BA T
3y ralgruBR/ABl arotseRyralgruB,mralAyralgruBA BR BB BU BT BJ BX BA T
4s seccAD/GDd eineDsseccA,detnarGsseccAG DD DB BU BT DJ DX BA T
5e riFR/AFl arotseReriF,mralAeriFA FR FB FU FT FJ FX FA T
6s aGR/AGl arotseRsaG,mralAsaGA GR GB GU GT GJ GX GA T
7p udloHR/AHl arotseRpudloH,mralApudloHA HR HB HU HT HJ HX BA T
8t aeHR/AKl arotseRtaeH,mralAtaeHA KR KB KU KT KJ KX BA T
9l iaFeniLR/TLl arotseReniL,elbuorTeniLT LR LB BU BT BJ BX BA T
01l acideMR/AMl arotseRlacideM,mralAlacideMA MR MB MU MT MJ MX BA T
11c inaPR/APl arotseRcinaP,mralAcinaPA PR PB PU PT PJ PX BA T
21t sissAR/AQycnegremE,mralAycnegremE
larotseRAQR QB QU QT QJ QX BA T
31y aleRC/ORd esolCyaleR,nepOyaleRO RC RB BU BT BJ BX BA T
41r lknirpSR/ASl arotseRrelknirpS,mralArelknirpSA SR SB SU ST SJ SX BA T
51r epmaTR/ATl arotseRrepmaT,mralArepmaTA TR TB TU TT BJ BX TA T
61r etaWR/AWl arotseRretaW,mralAretaWA WR WB WU WT WJ WX BA T
71y rettaBR/TYl arotseRyrettaB,mralAyrettaBT YR YB BU BT BJ BX BA T
81r ezeerFR/AZl arotseRrezeerF,mralArezeerFA ZR ZB ZU ZT ZJ ZX BA T
NOTE: If two zones, programmed as Custom SIA, activate within the confirm time window, whether it be in
the SET or UNSET condition, then a CONFIRM is logged.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-748 = Activity Mon.
This attribute allows a zone to be checked for activity during a set time period or set/unset cycles. The options
are:
• 0 = None
• 1 = Type1• 2 = Type2• 3 = Type3• 4 = Type4• 5 = Type5• 6 = Type6
The default option is 0 = None.If the zone does not activate at least once within the programmed criteria a zone masked fault is indicated at
the panel. The fault is logged as a masked event which indicates that the zone has been inactive for the pro-grammed period. See Option 51.61=Parameters.Activity Monitoring.
9 = Res. Select
This option allows the zone resistor configuration to be selected from a pre-defined value.
• 00 = System (follows the system default as programmed in parameter 51.46 = Zone Resistance)• Option 01 = Preset 1 – 1k (double balanced)• Option 02 = Preset 1 – 1k (end-of-line)
• Option 03 = Preset 2 – 2k2 (double balanced)
• Option 04 = Preset 2 – 2k2 (end-of-line)• Option 05 = Preset 3 – 4k7 (double balanced)• Option 06 = Preset 3 – 4k7 (end-of-line)• Option 07 = Preset 4 – 5k6 (double balanced)• Option 08 = Preset 4 – 5k6 (end-of-line)• Option 09 = 1k Fault (double balanced)
• Option 10 = 1k Fault (end-of-line)
The values assigned by each of the options are shown in tables 10 and 11, Parameter 51.46=Zone Resist-
ance.
10 = Group
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63
= OPTIONS ).
The Group attribute allows the zone to be assigned to a single group on the system. All zones default to
Group A1 .
On selecting the Group attribute, the group that the zone is currently assigned to is displayed. All zones
default to group A1. Press the number of the group that the zone is to be reassigned to and press the ent key.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-7552 – Program Zones (cont’d)
enoZm ralAn oitpircseD
1000T TABUCw olyrettabtinulortnoC
2000C AUCl iafCAtinulortnoC
3000R EPMATDILr epmatdiltinulortnoC
4000R EPMATXUAn ruterrepmattinulortnoC
Table 6-15. Control Panel AlarmsUse the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next
block of eight groups is displayed; use keys 1–8 to assign the relevant group in the current block to the zone;
press the ent key to accept the selection.
Star ( 77777) Group Function
Certain zone functions have an additional Group attribute feature that allows the other groups to be affected
by their operation. This feature is assigned by pressing the 7 key when allocating the group to the zone.
On pressing the 7 key the display indicates the group currently assigned to the zone and prompts for other
groups to be added, for example 17 1 – – – – – – – , pressing 4 and 7 assigns 1 71 – – 4 – – 7 – .
Final, Secure Final, Part Final Keyswitch and Push Set Zones
If the star 7 group feature is assigned a zone programmed as Final , Secure Final , Part Final or Push Set ,
then closing the zone when setting multiple groups terminates the setting procedure for all groups assigned tothe zone.
Refer to the zone functions for further information on the operation of these zone functions.
Exit Zones
The star 7 group feature can be assigned to a zone programmed as Exit. This allows an Exit zone to be
activated in a group which is not currently being unset without activating an Intruder alarm condition.
Refer to the zone functions for further information on the operation of this zone function.
System Alarms
The Galaxy panels have tamper and alarm monitoring circuits which are not programmable. These circuits
maintain the integrity of the system and all correspond to Group A1 .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-76Table 6-16. Available Zone Functions52 – Program Zones (cont’d)
Zone Function
01 Final
02 Exit
03 Intruder 04 24 Hours
05 Security
06 Dual
07 Entry
08 Push Set
09 Keyswitch
10 Secure Final
11 Part Final12 Part Entry
13 PA
14 PA Silent15 PA Delay16 PA Delay Silent
17 Link
18 Spare19 Fire
20 T amper21 Bell T amper
22 Beam Pair23 Battery Low24 Line Fail
25 AC Fail
26 LogZone Function
27 Remote Access
28 Video
29 Video Exit
30 Intruder Delay31 Log Delay32 Set Log33 Custom-A
34 Custom-B
35 Exitguard36 Mask
37 Urgent
38 PA Unset39 Keyswitch Reset
40 Bell Fail
41 Intr Low42 Intr High43 PSU Fault44 Not Used
45 Not Used
46 Not Used47 Vibration
48 ATM-1
49 ATM-2
50 ATM-3
51 ATM-4
52 Alarm Extend

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-7701 Final
Zones programmed as Final initiate the unsetting procedure and terminate setting procedure; opening the
Final zone when the system or group is set starts the entry timer; opening and then closing the Final zone
during the exit procedure sets the system or assigned groups, providing all the zones are closed. The opening(+) and closing ( –) of Final zones during the setting and unsetting procedures are recorded in the event log.
Pressing the 7 key when programming a Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Final zone during the exit time is reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit Horns
bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The termination feature of a Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups
by pressing the 7 key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star 7 Group Function .
02 Exit
Zones that protect the entry and exit routes are programmed as Exit. During the setting and unsetting proce-
dures Exit zones have a non-alarm operation. If the Exit zone is activated while the system is set – without the
unsetting of the group being initiated – an Intruder alarm condition is activated.
Opening an Exit zone during the exit time is reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit Horns
bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The Exit zone can be assigned to multiple groups by pressing the 7 key when assigning a group to
the zone. This allows an Exit zone to be activated in a group which is not currently being unset
without activating an Intruder alarm. Refer to the Star 7 Group Function .
03 Intruder
The Intruder function is inactive when the system is unset. When the system is set, activation of an Intruder
zone causes a full alarm activation that requires to be reset with a code authorized for System Reset – refer
to option 51.6 = PARAMETERS.System Reset and option
51.55.3 = PARAMETERS.Confirm.Reduce Reset.
All zones are programmed as Intruder by default; this includes the zones on RIOs that are added to the
system at a later date.
04 24 Hours
The 24 Hours zone function is continuously operational. In the unset state, activation of the zone function
generates a local alarm condition (the Intruder outputs are not activated). If the zone is activated while the
system is set, the 24 Hours function operates the same as an Intruder function and results in a full alarm
condition. The 24 Hours zone function requires a system reset following an activation in both the set and unset
conditions.
05 Security
The operation of the Security zone function is identical to the 24 Hours zone function, except a Security
zone activation in the unset generates a local alarm ( Horn outputs activated) that does not require a system
reset; any valid code (type 2 or above) cancels the alarm and resets the system. An activation in the set stategenerates a full alarm that requires a system reset. The activation ( +) and restoration (–) of Security zones is
recorded in the event log.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-7806 Dual (Double Knock)
The operation of the Dual (Double Knock) function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception
that an alarm condition is activated only when there have been two activations from any Dual zones (assigned
to the same group) within a 20 minute period while the system is set.
07 Entry
This function initiates the unsetting procedure in the same way as a Final zone. However, during the setting
routine an Entry zone operates as an Exit zone type. This function is normally used in conjunction with a
Push Set zone, which acts as the exit terminator for the setting procedure.
Pressing the 7 key when programming an Entry zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening an Entry zone during the exit time is reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
08 Push Set
This zone function is used to terminate the setting routine. The system sets when the Push Set zone, usually a
push button, is activated. The Entry/Exit Horn stops immediately the button is pressed; the system sets after
four seconds, allowing the doors to settle to the closed state. The Push Set zone remains inactive until the
next setting routine.
NOTE: The Push Set zone can be either 1k Ω going to 2k Ω or 2k Ω to 1k Ω – refer to Installation Manual
(II1-0033), System Architecture for wiring details. The first time that the Push Set is used to
terminate the setting, the button will require to be pressed twice; the first press identifies the normalstatus of the button to the system.
Activating a Push Set zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/
Exit Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The termination feature of a Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups
by pressing the 7 key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star 7 Group Function .
09 Keyswitch
The Keyswitch function allows a zone to be used as an on/off switch for the system or assigned groups.
Operating a Keyswitch zone when the system is unset starts the timed full setting routine, therefore the exit
time is applicable. The system sets when the exit time expires or a Final or Push Set is activated.
NOTE: Assigning a # to the keyswitch zone function will cause the Instant setting routine to be activated. In
this case the exit time is not applicable. If a Keyswitch Zone has its omit attribute enabled, activationof the Keyswitch will force set the assigned groups. Only zones with the omit attribute enabled willbe omitted.
When the keyswitch is activated twice during the exit time of an autoset, the autoset is temporarily cancelled
for a few seconds, then it restarts the exit time causing the panel to reset.
Operating a keyswitch zone type during the pre-warn period of an autoset will start a Force Set. If you then
activate the switch again (i.e. unset with keyswitch) before the panel sets, the pre-warn continues on theautoset.
NOTE: When the keyswitch is activated the second time to take panel back into pre-warn, it can be up to
10 seconds before the pre-warn tones at the keypad start up again.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-79 If the system is set, operating a Keyswitch immediately unsets the assigned groups; there is no entry time
countdown.
The Part attribute of the Keyswitch function defaults to 0 (disabled); the standard Keyswitch function full
sets the system. To part set the system using the Keyswitch , the Part attribute must be enabled.
NOTE: The operation of a Keyswitch zone can be extended to the setting and unsetting of multiple groups
by pressing the 7 key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star 7 Group Function .
The standard programming of the Keyswitch function requires a momentary change from 1k Ω to 2k Ω to
both set and unset the system. If the Keyswitch connected has a latching mechanism, press the 7 key when
assigning the function; the display indicates 09=7KEYSWITCH has been assigned. The
7 Keyswitch operation is as follows: 1k Ω to 2k Ω sets the system; 2k Ω to 1k Ω unsets the system.
The Keyswitch function can also be programmed to reset alarms – refer to option 51.14 =
PARAMETERS.Keyswitch Level . If the Keyswitch is assigned a sufficient type to reset the alarm condi-
tion, the alarm is cancelled and immediately reset when the Keyswitch is used to unset the system following
an alarm activation.
NOTE: The activated zones are not displayed on the keypad when a Keyswitch is used to reset the alarm.
10 Secure Final
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is set or unset. When the system is setting,
set or unsetting the operation is identical to the Final zone function. When the system is unset the operation is
identical to the Security zone function.
Pressing the 7 key when programming a Secure Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Secure Final zone during the exit time is reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
The termination feature of a Secure Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups by
pressing the 7 key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star 7 Group Function .
11 Part Final
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is full set or part set. When the system is full
set the zone operation is identical to the Final zone function. When the system is part set the zone operation is
identical to the Intruder zone function.
Pressing the 7 key when programming a Part Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Part Final zone during the exit time is reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
12 Part Entry
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is full set or part set. When the system is full
set the zone operation is identical to the Exit zone function. When the system is part set the zone operation is
identical to the Entry zone function.
Pressing the 7 key when programming a Part Entry zone doubles the entry time of the group.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8013 PA
The PA (Personal Attack) function is continuously operational. Activation of this zone type overrides the Bell
Delay parameter and causes an instant full alarm condition that requires to be reset with a code authorized for
PA Reset — refer to Option 51 – PARAMETERS, 22 = PA Reset ; the Intruder outputs are not acti-
vated by PA zones.
NOTE: If a PA zone is open, it is indicated on the keypad whenever a valid code is entered. The group that
the open PA is assigned to cannot be set until it is closed.
14 PA Silent
The PA Silent function is identical to the PA function, with the exception that there is no audible or visual
indication of the activation; that is, no bells or strobes are activated. Only the PA output (normally channel 2
on the digital communicator) signals the alarm. The activation ( +) and restoral (–) of PA Silent zones is
recorded in the event log.
NOTES
1.At the time of setting, any PA Silent zones that are currently open are reported to the user.
2.The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.
3.Engineer mode cannot be exited if a PA Silent zone is open.
15 PA Delay
The PA Delay function is identical to the PA function, with the exception that the PA output activation can be
delayed for up to 60 seconds; this is determined by option 51.13 = PARAMETER.PA Delay . During the
period of delay the Entry/Exit Horns activate to remind the user that the PA delay is counting down; entering
a valid code or closing the PA Delay zone aborts the alarm.
NOTES
1.If a PA Delay zone is open, it is indicated on the keypad whenever a valid code is entered. The group
that the open PA Delay is assigned to cannot be set until it is closed.
2.The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.
16 PA Delay Silent
The PA Delay Silent function is identical to the PA Delay function, with the exception that there is no audible
or visual indication of the activation; that is, no bells or strobes are activated. Only the PA output (normally
channel 2 on the digital communicator) signals the alarm. The activation ( +) and restoral (–) of PA Delay
Silent zones are recorded in the event log.
NOTES
1.At the time of setting, any PA Delay Silent zones that are currently open are reported to the user.
2.The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8117 Link
This zone type has no operational function; it is designed to be used as a source of a link – refer to option 54 =
LINKS . The activation ( +) and de-activation (–) of Link zones is recorded in the event log.
18 Spare
The Spare function allows any zones that are not being used to be ignored by the system; the resistance
readings from the circuit – including the tamper conditions – do not activate an alarm condition.
NOTE: It is recommended that all unused zones are programmed as Spare and that a 1k Ω 1% resistor is
connected across each of these zones.
19 Fire
The Fire function is continuously operational. When activated, a FIRE zone overrides the Bell Delay pa-
rameter and activates an instant alarm ( Bell, Strobe and Fire). The keypad buzzer and control panel horn
output, if fitted, emit an interrupted tone (one second on, 0.5 seconds OFF), easily distinguishable from allother alarm conditions. Any valid code entry cancels the Fire activation.
20 Tamper
The Tamper function is continuously operational. When a Tamper zone is activated (1k Ω to 2k Ω), a tamper
alarm is generated; this requires to be reset by a code authorized for Tamper Reset – refer to option 51.7 =
PARAMETERS.Tamper Reset . If a tamper condition (open or short circuit) occurs, a tamper alarm is also
generated.
21 Bell Tamper
This function is identical to the operation of the Tamper function but is dedicated to bells, sirens and other
modules or output devices requiring tamper protection.
22 Beam Pair
This function is only operational when two consecutively addressed zones programmed as Beam Pair are
open in the set condition; the activation is identical to the Intruder function. The system cannot set if a single
Beam Pair is open.
NOTE: Beam Pair zones must be consecutively addressed; the first Beam Pair zone must have an even
number address, the second Beam Pair must have the next address (an odd number). For example,
valid Beam Pair addresses are 1036 & 1037 , 2018 & 2031 – in this case, RIO 202 has not been
connected, therefore zone 2031 is the next address to 2018 .
23 Battery Low
This function is used to monitor the voltage output of a standby battery connected to a power supply. The
activation ( +) and de-activation (–) of Battery Low zones is recorded in the event log.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8224 Line Fail
The Line Fail function is used to monitor the communication line that a remote signalling device is connected
to for communications failure.
When the system is in the unset state, the first activation of a Line Fail zone causes a local alarm and the
message COMMS FAILURE is displayed, subsequent Line Fail activations do not sound the local alarm;
the only indication is the keypad display.
When the system is set, activation of the Line Fail zone overrides the Bell Delay parameter; on unsetting the
system a local alarm is generated and the keypad gives an indication that Line Fail zone has activated. If an
alarm condition occurs while the Line Fail is active, an instant full alarm is generated.
If the Line Fail zone is active at the point of setting, a warning message is displayed; the user can choose to
continue or abort the setting procedure. It is also possible to prevent the system setting if the Line Fail is
active by enabling the Stop Set parameter (option 51.18 ).
25 AC Fail
This function is used to monitor a remote power supply. In the event of a power failure the AC Fail zone is
activated; the activation ( +) and de-activation (–) of the zone is recorded in the event log.
26 Log
This zone type has no operational function; it is designed to record the activation of a zone in both the set and
unset state. The activation ( +) and de-activation (–) of Log zones is recorded in the event log.
27 Remote Access
This function is used to disable remote servicing of the Galaxy panel. When the Remote Access zone is
active the Remote Servicing software is prevented from gaining access to the Galaxy panel.
28 Video
This function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that the cumulative number of activations
from Video zones, before a full alarm is generated, is programmable. The number of activations required is
determined by the Video parameter (option 51.30 ); the range is 1–9. The activation count is incremented
when any Video zone in the group activates; the count is reset to zero when the group is unset.
29 Video Exit
The Video Exit function is identical to the Video function, with the exception that the user can activate the
zone during setting and unsetting without incrementing the Video activations count. The Video output is not
activated during setting and unsetting.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8330 Intruder Delay
The Intruder Delay function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that the full alarm activa-
tion can be delayed for up to 50 minutes (0–3000 seconds); this is determined by the Delay Alarm param-
eter (option 51.31 ). The Intruder Delay zone must remain open for the period of the Delay Alarm param-
eter; while the zone is open the Entry/Exit Horns activate to remind the user that the Delay Alarm is count-
ing down. Unsetting the system or closing the Intruder Delay zone aborts the alarm and resets the timer.
If a second Intruder Delay zone opens followed by the first zone closing, the Delay Alarm time continues to
count from the activation of the first zone. The Delay Alarm timer is reset only when all delay type zones
return to the closed state.
31 Log Delay
The Log Delay function operation is identical to the Log function, with the exception that the recording of the
zone activation can be delayed for up to 50 minutes (0–3000 seconds); this is determined by the Delay
Alarm parameter (option 51.31 ). Closing the Log Delay zone resets the timer and aborts the recording of
the event in the log.
32 Set Log
The Set Log function is identical to the Log function, with the exception that zone activations are only re-
corded in the event log during the set period.
33 Custom A
The Custom A function allows a zone to be assembled. The functionality of the zone; when it activates; the
outputs activated; if it sets or unsets the systems; if it logs, are assigned using menu option 64 = ASSEMBLE
ZONE . Once the Custom A zone has been created, it can be assigned to as many zones as required.
34 Custom B
This function is identical in operation and assembly to Custom A .52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8435 = Exit Guard
The Exitguard function allows a zone to be used to omit other zones on the system. This is useful for permit-
ting access via doors programmed as 24 Hours or Security .
The Exitguard zone must be the source of a link (refer to option 54 = LINKS ); the destination of the
Exitguard link is either a zone address or an output type.
When opened, the Exitguard omits the zone entered as the link destination; an alarm is not activated if the
Exitguard zone is open while a zone that it is omitting is open. If the destination zone is opened while the
Exitguard zone is closed, an alarm activation occurs; opening the Exitguard omits the zone and silences the
output types assigned to the link destination. Closing the Exitguard zone while the destination zone is still
open does not result in an alarm activation; closing the destination zone deactivates the link and returns thezone to its normal operation.
NOTE: The Exitguard function cannot be used as a link source to activate a link destination output.
Programming Example: • Zone 1014 = An on/off keyswitch programmed as Exitguard .
• Zone 1015 = A door contact programmed as Security .
• Output type Link A = An output wired to a local horn and programmed as Link
A.
NOTE: Exit Guard zones do not omit zones open when the exit guard zone is activated , even if they are
subsequently closed.
Operation: The Security door contact ( 1015 ) can be omitted at any time by operating the Exitguard
keyswitch (1014). If the door (1015) is opened without first being omitted, then the Link A horn activates and
needs to be reset by operating the keyswitch (1014).
Table 6-17. Exit Guard Zones
36 Mask
The Mask function is designed to be used with detectors capable of reporting that their field of view has been
blocked or masked. The Mask function is identical to the Security function, with the exception that the
Mask output is activated instead of Security .
NOTE: This zone type is independent from the mask zone state which can be detected for zones supporting
the masked feature.
37 Urgent
The Urgent function is continuously operational; it is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that
it activates a full alarm condition (including the Intruder outputs) in any set or unset condition.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)
kniLe cruoSn oitanitseD
14 101=enoZ5 101=enoZ
25 101=enoZA kniL=tuptuO
34 101=enoZA kniL=tuptuO

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8538 PA Unset
This PA Unset function is identical to the PA Silent function, with the exception that it is only operational
when the system is unset; the function is inactive when the group is set.
39 Keyswitch Reset
The Keyswitch Reset function allows alarms to be cancelled and the system to rearm without unsetting the
Galaxy. The type of reset authorization is determined by the Keyswitch Level (option 51.14 ). The type
required to reset Intruder , PA and Tamper alarms is determined by the System Reset , Tamper Reset
and PA Reset parameters (option 51.06 , 51.07 and 51.22 ) respectively.
This function is designed to permit a remote signal, for example REDCare’s Return Path Signalling feature, to
reset the system following an alarm condition.
40 Bell Fail
This zone type is intended for bells which have diagnostic capabilities and failure outputs. If activated, this zone
causes a fault condition.
41 Intr Low
This zone type assigns a low priority to a zone in the event of an intruder alarm. The event is logged as low
priority in the event log.
42 Intr High
This zone type assigns a high priority to a zone in the event of an intruder alarm. The event is logged as high
priority in the event log.
43 PSU Fault
This zone type triggers a general fault output and logs a PSU fault in the event log. The fault is signalled to the
ARC as YP when using SIA format and 314 when using CID format.
44-46
Not used
47 Vibration
The Vibration function is continuously operational and is designed for use with vault sensors. Vibration
zones can be block omitted using menu option 11 = Omit Zones . If the zone selected to be omitted from the
system is a Vibration zone , then all zones programmed with this function are omitted.
NOTES
1.All Vibration zones in all groups are omitted when any Vibration zone is omitted. The user code does
not have to have access to all of the groups.
2. Vibration zones remain omitted until a single Vibration zone is manually reinstated. The unsetting of the
system does not reinstate omitted Vibration zones.52 – Program Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-8652 – Program Zones (cont’d)
48-51 ATM-1, ATM-2, ATM-3 & ATM-4
There are four ATM (Automatic Teller Machine) zone types. These zone functions are continuously opera-
tional and are designed for the special maintenance and restocking requirements of ATM’s.
A single ATM zone type can be omitted for the duration of the period entered in the ATM Timeout param-
eter (option 51.39 ). The ATM Delay parameter (option 51.38 ) determines the delay before the selected
ATM zones are omitted once selected by an ATM code. Each of the zones ATM-1 to ATM-4 zones acti-
vates a corresponding ATM output.
NOTE: The relevant ATM outputs are activated as soon as the ATM Delay expires.
On entering an ATM code, the system prompts for one of the ATM zone types to be selected; to select the
ATM zone type to be omitted use the A or B key or enter the number of the ATM zone type. Once the zone
is selected, the keypad indicates the DELAY ACCESS – the number of minutes remaining until the ATM
zones are omitted. Once the zone is omitted, the initiating keypad indicates the ACCESS TIMEOUT – the
number of minutes remaining until the selected ATM zones are reintroduced to the system. The Entry/Exit
Horns sound a warning ten and five minutes before the zones are reinstated.
The omitted ATM zone type can be reinstated at any time, or the omit period can be extended by the ATM
user code. Enter the ATM code and press the ent key; the system prompts for 1 = RESET ACCESS or 2 =
ABORT ACCESS . Press 1 to restart the ATM Timeout or 2 to reinstate the omitted ATM’s .
NOTE: Only one ATM zone type may be omitted at any time.
52 Alarm Extend
The Alarm Extend function is identical to the Urgent function, with the exception that if the zone is open (and
has not been previously omitted) at the end of the bell duration (refer to option 51.1 = PARAMETERS.Bell
Time ) it immediately activates another full alarm condition. Alarm Extend zones can only be omitted by
option 11 = OMIT ZONES .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-87Option 53 – Program Outputs
This option is used by the engineer to modify the programming of the outputs on the system. The option also
allows the attributes of the outputs to be changed. The programmable options are:
Table 6-18. Output Attributes
Selecting Outputs
RIO Outputs
On entering the option, the first output on the system is displayed; the output address, function and mode are
displayed on the top line, the polarity and assigned groups are displayed on the bottom line.
From the display of the first output, any output on the system can be displayed by pressing the A or B keys or
by entering the address of a specific output.
The output is selected for programming by pressing the ent key; the first output programming attribute 1=Op
Function is displayed.
Trigger Header Outputs
There are six trigger outputs, that can be used as communication triggers, but can also be used for any other
purpose. The output address and default function of these outputs are as follows:
0001 – Fire0002 – Panic0003 – Intruder0004 – Set0005 – Zone Omit
0006 – Confirm53 – Program Outputs
Attributes Description
1 Output Function Assign output type
2 Output Mode 1 = Latch – requires valid code to reset
2 = Reflex – follows activation status of zones3 = Pulse (001 – 3000 secs) – activates for programmed period
3 Output Polarity 0 = POS – 12V going to 0V in activation
1 = NEG – 0V going to 12V in activation
4 Diag. Recording Assigns output to be active during Diagnostic T est
5 Descriptor Assigs a descriptor of up to 12 characters for each output
6 Lighting 1 = Control (0=OFF, 1=T oggle, 2=Trigger)
2 = Show Status (0=OFF, 1=ON)
7 Output Groups Assign groups to the output
Note: Groups only appear if the Group option is enabled
(refer to option 63.1 = OPTIONS. Groups).

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-88Keypad Outputs
The keypad outputs are fully programmable. The address of the keypad output is the keypad address pre-
fixed with a star, for example the output for keypad 06 is 606. The function of keypad outputs default to
Entry/Exit Horn .
The valid addresses of the keypads on each of the panels and the respective output addresses are indicated in
the following table:
Table 6-29. Addresses of Valid Keypad Outputs
It is possible to add additional keypads at any unused comms module addresses (B, C, D and E) as detailed
in the following NOTE. These must be standard keypads. An engineer keypad can also be used at address F.
NOTE : On Line 1, keypad addresses B, C, D and E are not available if the Ethernet,
ISDN, RS232 or Telecom modules respectively are fitted.
Control Horn ( 6666699)
The control unit horn output – addressed as 799 – is fully programmable.
Attributes
The attributes can be stepped through by pressing the A or B keys or directly selected by pressing the at-
tribute number ( 1–4). Once the required attribute is on display, press the ent key to gain access for modifica-
tion.
Once the attribute has been assigned press the ent key to save the programming and return to the attribute
selection level. Pressing the esc key at any time when assigning attributes aborts the programming and returns
to the attribute selection level.
1 = Output Function
Entering the Output Function attribute displays the address and the current function of the selected output
along with the output function reference number. The output functions can be stepped through, forwards orbackwards, using the A and B keys. Alternatively, a function can be directly selected by entering the function
reference number, for example, entering 16 displays output function 16 = FIRE .
Once the required output function is displayed, it is assigned to the output by pressing the ent key.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Panel Line Address Output Addresses
GD-48 1 0 – 2, B, C, D, E & F (NOTE) 10-12, 15-19
GD-96 1 0 – 2, B, C, D, E & F (NOTE) 10-12, 15-19GD-264 1 0 – 2, B, C, D, E & F (NOTE) 10-12, 15-19
2 0 – 6 & F 20-26, 29
GD-520 1 0 – 2, B, C, D, E & F (NOTE) 10-12, 15-19
2 0 – 6 & F 20-26, 29
3 0 – 6 & F 30-36, 39
4 0 – 6 & F 40-46, 49

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-892 = Output Mode
Each output function defaults to a specific, logical output mode. However, the output mode of each function
can be modified to meet special requirements: when reprogrammed, the new mode applies to all outputsassigned to that function. The output modes are:
1 = Latch: the output remains active until a valid code is entered.
2 = Reflex: the output follows the activity of the triggering event, for example, the Set output follows the
setting and unsetting of the group.
3 = Pulse: the output remains active for the programmed pulse time 1-3000 seconds (50 mins).
Programming the Output ModeSelect the required mode using the A or B keys or by selecting the number 1 – 3. Once the required mode is
on selected, press the ent key to accept the programming. If assigning the Pulse output mode, enter the pulse
time (001 – 3000 seconds) and press the ent key.
3 = Output Polarity
The Output Polarity determines the normal operational state of the output. All outputs are referred to having
positive ( 0 = POS ) or negative ( 1 = NEG ) polarity. An output programmed as positive polarity is 12 V in the
normal condition and goes to 0 V when activated. A negative polarity output goes from the normal conditionof 0 V to 12 V in the active state. All outputs except SET (09) default to positive output mode.
NOTE: The Switch DC output is a positive polarity output, however, the normal condition is 0 V , going to
12 V when activated. The output mode is normally Pulse .
4 = Diag Recording
When this attribute is enabled, the selected output will be switched on during the diagnostic test (see Option
61.2.3=Diagnostics.Historical.Record ).
This test can also be carried out remotely.
5 = Descriptor
This attribute assigns a descriptor of up to 12 characters for each output.
6 = Lighting
This attribute allows the state of certain panel outputs to be controlled by the user from the Touch Center.
There are two options:
1 = Control
Each lighting output can be controlled by setting to 0=OFF , 1=Toggle or 2=Trigger.
If the Control is set to Toggle or Trigger for an output, it will be controllable via the Touch Center whose
group map contains the output’s group. If the Control is set to OFF it cannot be controlled or viewed by the
Touch Center.
2 = Show Status
The status can be either 0=OFF or 1=ON . When set to ON the light shows the state of the output.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-90Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next
block of eight groups is selected; press keys 1–8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current block
to the output; press the ent key to accept the selection.
Group Status
This group attribute offers an additional feature that makes the operation of the output conditional on the set
status of each of the system groups. An output assigned Group Status only activates if the set conditions of
the programming are met, for example, an Intruder output used to trigger a communicator can be pro-
grammed to activate only if groups 2 and 4 are set and group 3 is unset.
To assign the Group Status conditions, press the 7 key when selecting the groups: an arrow ( >) is displayed
on the bottom line as well as the current Status . Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the
groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set — group must be set to allow output to activate;
U = Unset — group must be unset to allow output to activate;
– = Set or unset — output activation is independent of the group status.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Groups 12345678Groups 12345678Groups 12345678Groups 12345678Groups 12345678
STATUS >-SUS–-STATUS >-SUS–-STATUS >-SUS–-STATUS >-SUS–-STATUS >-SUS–-kcolBpuorGs puorGlacisyhP
8-1A8 -1
8-1B6 1-9
8-1C4 2-71
8-1D2 3-52
Table 6-20. Output GroupsMulti-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:7 = Output Groups
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63
= OPTIONS ).
The Group attribute allows the output to be assigned to the groups on the system; an output can be assigned
to more than one group. All outputs default to all groups on the system.
On selecting the Output Groups attribute, the groups that the output is currently assigned to are displayed.
Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the group and press the ent key; if the group number is
displayed on the top line, then the group is assigned to the output; if a dash (–) appears in place of the groupnumber, the group has been removed from the output.
The output will activate if triggered by an event in any of the groups assigned to that output, unless output
group status has been programmed.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-91Output Functions
The following table shows all the outputs and the zone functions and conditions that result in their activation.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Key:
S = Activates when system is set ? = Activation dependant on system programming
P = Activates when system is Part Set X= Activates during Exit Time
U = Unset E= Activates during Entry Time
A = Activated in any condition L= Switches output off if linked to destination output
– = No effect T= Activates if zone resistance is less than value for tamper s/c
O= Activates when zone is omitted or greater than value for tamper o/c
Table 6-21A. Output Activations per ZoneOutput Functions Bells Strobe PA Intruder Tamper 24
HrsReset Switch
DCSet Engineer Spare Ready Security AC
Fail
Zone Function 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
01 Final SS – S T– X – –– –A – –
02 Exit SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
03 Intruder SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
04 24 Hours SS – S TA – – –– –A – –
05 Security SS – S T– – – –– –A A –
06 Dual SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
07 Entry SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
08 Push Set –– – – T – X – –– –– – –
09 Keyswitch –– – – T – XX S – –– – –
10 Secure Final SS – S T– X – –– –A U–
11 Part Final SS – S T– X – –– –A – –
12 Part Entry SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
13 PA AA A – T– – – –– –A – –
14 PA Silent –– A – T – – – –– –A – –
15 PA Delay AA A – T– – – –– –A – –
16 PA Delay Silent –– A – T – – – –– –A – –
17 Link ?? ? ? ? T ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ?
18 Spare –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
19 Fire AA – – T– – – –– –– – –
20 Tamper SS – S A – – – –– –A – –
21 Bell Tamper AS – S A – – – –– –A – –
22 Beam Pair SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
23 Battery Low –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
24 Line Fail –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
25 AC Fail –– – – T – – – –– –– – A
26 Log –– – – T – – – –– –A – –
27 Remote Access –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
28 Video SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
29 Video Exit SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
30 Intruder Delay SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
31 Log Delay –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
32 Set Log –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
33 Custom-A ?? ? ? ? T ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ?
34 Custom-B ?? ? ? ? T ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ?
35 Exitguard LL L L L T L L L LL LL L L
36 Mask SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
37 Urgent AA – A T– – – –– –A – –
38 PA Unset –– U – T – – – –– –U – –
39 Keyswitch Reset –– – – T – X – –– –– – –
40 Bell fail –– – – – – – – –– –– – –
41 Intr Low SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
42 Intr High SS – S T– – – –– –A – –
43 PSU Fault –– – – T – – – –– –– – –
44–46 Not Used –– – – – – – – –– –– – –
47 Vibration AA – A T– – – –– –A – –
48 ATM-1 AA – A T– – – –– –A – –
49 ATM-2 AA – A T– – – –– –A – –
50 ATM-3 AA – A T– – – –– –A – –
51 ATM-4 AA – A T– – – –– –A –
52 Alarm Extend AA – A T– – – –– –A – –

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9253 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Key:
S = Activates when system is set ? = Activation dependant on system programming
P = Activates when system is Part Set X= Activates during Exit Time
U = Unset E= Activates during Entry Time
A = Activated in any condition L= Switches output off if linked to destination output
– = No effect T= Activates if zone resistance is less than value for tamper s/c
O= Activates when zone is omitted or greater than value for tamper o/c
Table 6-21B. Output Activations per ZoneOutput Functions Batt
LowFire Horn E/E Horn Part
SetConfirm Line
FailVideo Comm
FailBatt
TestWrong
CDAlert DLYD
FireNo
Re-armTimer-A
Zone Function 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
01 Final ––S S X E – – –S–– – – –S –
02 Exit ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
03 Intruder ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
04 24 Hours ––S A – – –S–– – – –S –
05 Security ––S A – – –S–– – – –S –
06 Dual ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
07 Entry ––S S X E – – –S–– – – –S –
08 Push Set ––– X – – –– –– – – –– –
09 Keyswitch ––– – X – –– –– – – –– –
10 Secure Final ––A A X S –S–– – – –S –
11 Part Final ––A S X E X S –S–– – – –S –
12 Part Entry ––A X E– S –S–– – – –S –
13 PA ––A – – – –– –– – – –A –
14 PA Silent ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
15 PA Delay ––A A – – –– –– – – –A –
16 PA Delay Silent ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
17 Link ??? ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ? ?? ?
18 Spare ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
19 Fire –A A A – – –V–– – – AA –
20 Tamper ––A A – – –S–– – – –S –
21 Bell Tamper ––A A – – –S–– – – –S –
22 Beam Pair ––S S X E – – –S–– – – –S –
23 Battery Low U–– – – – –– –– – – – – –
24 Line Fail ––– U – – A – –– – – –– –
25 AC Fail ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
26 Log ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
27 Remote Access ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
28 Video ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
29 Video Exit ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
30 Intruder Delay ––S S X E – – –S–– – – –S –
31 Log Delay ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
32 Set Log ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
33 Custom-A ??? ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ? ?? ?
34 Custom-B ??? ? ? ? ?? ?? ? ? ?? ?
35 Exitguard LLL L L L LL LL L L LL L
36 Mask ––S S X E – – –S–– – – –S –
37 Urgent ––A A – – –– –– – – –A –
38 PA Unset ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
39 Keyswitch Reset ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
40 Bell fail ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
41 Intr Low ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
42 Intr High ––S S X E – S –S–– – – –S –
43 PSU Fault ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
44–46 Not Used ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
47 Vibration ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
48 ATM-1 ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
49 ATM-2 ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
50 ATM-3 ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
51 ATM-4 ––– – – – –– –– – – –– –
52 Alarm Extend AA– A T – –– –– – – A– –

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9353 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Key:
S = Activates when system is set ? = Activation dependant on system programming
P = Activates when system is Part Set X= Activates during Exit Time
U = Unset E= Activates during Entry Time
A = Activated in any condition L= Switches output off if linked to destination output
– = No effect T= Activates if zone resistance is less than value for tamper s/c
O= Activates when zone is omitted or greater than value for tamper o/c
Table 6-21C. Output Activations per ZoneOutput Functions Timer-B Walk
TestZone
OmitWarning Custom
ACustom
BTest Reset
RQDMask Valid
cdFail
SetDuress Illegal
CodeMax
TampAbort Unset
Zone Function 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
01 Final – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
02 Exit – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
03 Intruder – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
04 24 Hours – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
05 Security – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
06 Dual – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
07 Entry – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
08 Push Set – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
09 Keyswitch – U O A – –– – – – U X ––––U
10 Secure Final – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
11 Part Final – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
12 Part Entry – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
13 PA – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
14 PA Silent – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
15 PA Delay – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
16 PA Delay Silent – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
17 Link ?U ? O ?? ? ? ??? ? ? ? ? – ? ?
18 Spare –– –A – – – – – – – – – ? – –
19 Fire – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
20 Tamper – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
21 Bell Tamper – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
22 Beam Pair – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
23 Battery Low – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
24 Line Fail – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
25 AC Fail – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
26 Log – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
27 Remote Access – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
28 Video – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
29 Video Exit – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
30 Intruder Delay – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
31 Log Delay – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
32 Set Log – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
33 Custom-A ?? O ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? – ? ?
34 Custom-B ? ? O ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?????
35 Exitguard L L L O L L LL L L L L LL?LL
36 Mask – – – – – – – – SPE – – – – L ? –
37 Urgent – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
38 PA Unset – U O A – – –U ?– –– – – – – –
39 Keyswitch Reset – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
40 Bell Fail – – – A – –– – – – – –––––
41 Intr Low – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
42 Intr High – U O A – – –S ?– –– – – – – –
43 PSU Fault – U O A – –– – – – – –––––
44–46 Not Used – – – – – –– – – – – –––––
47 Vibration – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
48 ATM-1 – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
49 ATM-2 – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
50 ATM-3 – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
51 ATM-4 – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –
52 Alarm Extend – U O A – – –A ?– –– – – – – –

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9453 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Key:
S = Activates when system is set ? = Activation dependant on system programming
P = Activates when system is Part Set X= Activates during Exit Time
U = Unset E= Activates during Entry Time
A = Activated in any condition L= Switches output off if linked to destination output
– = No effect T= Activates if zone resistance is less than value for tamper s/c
O= Activates when zone is omitted or greater than value for tamper o/c
Table 6-21D. Output Activations per ZoneOutput Functions Set Late U/S
EarlyPre- Warn Autoset DR
MaskedLink A-O RF
JamRF
SuperBell
FailLow
VoltsLockout Vib
TestAtm 1-4 Fault Bell Test Comms
Test
Zone Function 46 47 48 49 50 51-65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72-75 76 77 78
01 Final – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
02 Exit – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
03 Intruder – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
04 24 Hours – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
05 Security – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
06 Dual – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
07 Entry – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
08 Push Set U ? S ? – – – ? –––– – – – – – –
09 Keyswitch – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
10 Secure Final – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
11 Part Final – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
12 Part Entry – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
13 PA – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
14 PA Silent – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
15 PA Delay – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
16 PA Delay Silent – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
17 Link ?? ? ?? ? ? ? ? – ? ? ?–––
18 Spare – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
19 Fire – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
20 Tamper – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
21 Bell Tamper – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
22 Beam Pair – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
23 Battery Low – – ? – – ? –––– – – – A – –
24 Line Fail – – ? – – ? –––– – – – A – –
25 AC Fail – – ? – – ? –––– – – – A – –
26 Log – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
27 Remote Access – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
28 Video – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
29 Video Exit – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
30 Intruder Delay – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
31 Log Delay – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
32 Set Log – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
33 Custom-A ?? ? ?? ? ? ? ? – ? ? ?–––
34 Custom-B ?? ? ?? ? ? ? ? – ? ? ?–––
35 Exitguard LL L LL L L L L – L L L–––
36 Mask – – ? – – ? –––– – – – A – –
37 Urgent – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
38 PA Unset – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
39 Keyswitch Reset – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
40 Bell Fail –– – –– – – – A – – – –A ––
41 Intr Low – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
42 Intr High – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
43 PSU Fault – – ? – – ? –––– – – – A – –
44–46 Not Used – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –
47 Vibration – – ? – – ? –––– – A – – – –
48 ATM-1 – – ? – – ? –––– – – O – – –
49 ATM-2 – – ? – – ? –––– – – O – – –
50 ATM-3 – – ? – – ? –––– – – O – – –
51 ATM-4 – – ? – – ? –––– – – O – – –
52 Alarm Extent – – ? – – ? –––– – – – – – –

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-95Key:
S = Activates when system is set ? = Activation dependant on system programming
P = Activates when system is Part Set X= Activates during Exit Time
U = Unset E= Activates during Entry Time
A = Activated in any condition L= Switches output off if linked to destination output
– = No effect T= Activates if zone resistance is less than value for tamper s/c
O= Activates when zone is omitted or greater than value for tamper o/c
Table 6-21E. Output Activations per Zone53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Output Functions Door
PropDoor
ForcedListen-in
Zone Function 79 80 81
01 Final –? –
02 Exit –? –
03 Intruder –? ?
04 24 Hours –? –
05 Security –? –
06 Dual –? –
07 Entry –? –
08 Push Set S? – –
09 Keyswitch –? –
10 Secure Final –? –
11 Part Final –? –
12 Part Entry –? –
13 PA –? ?
14 PA Silent –? ?
15 PA Delay –? ?
16 PA Delay Silent –? ?
17 Link ?? –
18 Spare –? –
19 Fire –? ?
20 Tamper –? –
21 Bell Tamper –? –
22 Beam Pair –? –
23 Battery Low –? –
24 Line Fail –? –
25 AC Fail –? –
26 Log –? –
27 Remote Access –? –
28 Video –? –
29 Video Exit –? –
30 Intruder Delay –? ?
31 Log Delay –? –
32 Set Log –? –
33 Custom-A ?? –
34 Custom-B ?? –
35 Exitguard LL –
36 Mask –? –
37 Urgent –? –
38 PA Unset –? ?
39 Keyswitch Reset –? –
40 Bell Fail –– –
41 Intr Low –? ?
42 Intr High –? ?
43 PSU Fault –? –
44–46 Not Used –? –
47 Vibration –? –
48 ATM-1 –? –
49 ATM-2 –? –
50 ATM-3 –? –
51 ATM-4 –? –
52 Alarm Extent –? –

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9601 Bells (Latch)
The Bells output is activated on a full alarm event when the system is set. This output is subject to the Bell
Time, Bell Delay and No. Rearm parameters.
02 Strobe (Latch)
The Strobe output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state. This output is subject to the Bell
Delay . The Strobe output follows the Bell Time , but latches on after the last rearm.
03 PA (Latch)
The PA output is activated whenever any of the PA zone types activate. The output is not subject to the
Rearm parameter; it latches on remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate PA Reset level, is
entered.
04 Intruder (Latch)
The Intruder output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state. Dependent upon the programming
of parameter 51.56 Force Restore the intruder output restore is either subject to the Confirm Time Window
+ unset or entry of a valid code with the appropriate system reset level.. Refer to the 51.56 Force Restore
description for further details.
05 Tamper (Latch)
The Tamper output is activated whenever a circuit tamper or lid tamper occurs. The output is not subject to
the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate Tamper Reset
level, is entered.
The output is also activated on the first entry of the engineer code when accessing engineer mode.
NOTE: The Tamper output is not activated on the Galaxy 512 when engineer access is authorized by the
user.
06 24 Hours
The 24 Hours output is activated whenever a 24 Hour zone is activated. The output is not subject to the
Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate System Reset
level, is entered.
07 Reset (Latch)
The Reset output type is used as a control line output to latch, freeze and reset movement detector LEDs.
08 Switch DC (Pulse)
This Switch DC output is used to power detectors that require a momentary power interruption to reset them,
for example, break glass or vibration detectors. This output reverses its polarity (changes from 0V to 12V) forthe period of the Pulse output mode when the setting procedure has been initiated.
NOTE: When installing detectors that require to be powered from a Switch DC output, connect the positive
lead of the detector to the 12V terminal of a power supply and the negative lead to Switch DC
output terminal. Do not change the Output Polarity to 1=Neg : it must remain as positive polarity.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9709 Set (Reflex)
The Set output is activated when the assigned groups on the system are set. This output is a Reflex output
and follows the set and unset status of the groups.
10 Engineer (Reflex)
The Engineer output is activated while the engineer mode is being accessed.
11 Spare (Latch)
The Spare output has function: it is used to designate outputs that are not being used on the system.
12 Ready (Reflex)
The Ready output is active when all zones in the system (group) are closed. This output activates in both the
unset and set conditions.
13 Security (Latch)
The Security output is activated whenever a Security zone is activated. The output is not subject the Rearm
parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (type 2 or above) is entered.
14 AC Fail (Reflex)
The AC Fail output indicates the status of the a.c. (mains) power supply. The output activates when the a.c.
supply fails or an AC Fail zone is activated. The output is reset when the a.c. supply is restored or the AC
Fail zone is closed. The activation is delayed subject to the time entered in the 20=Power Delay parameter.
15 Battery Low (Reflex)
The Battery Low output activates whenever the control unit stand-by battery falls below 10.5V or a Battery
Low zone is activated. The output is restored when the voltage rises above 10.5V or the Battery Low zone
is closed.
16 Fire (Latch)
The Fire output is activated whenever a Fire zone is activated. The output is not subject to the Rearm
parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (type 2 or above) is entered.
17 Horn (Latch)
The Horn output is a general alarm output and is activated by most zone types in both the local and full alarm
modes. For example, a Fire zone activation causes the Horn output to pulse on and off – on for 0.5 seconds,
off for 0.1 seconds. The Horn output is subject to the Bell Time, Bell Delay and No. Rearm parameters.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9818 E/E Horn (Latch)
The Entry/Exit Horn output has a dual function:
• in an alarm condition its function is identical to that of the Horn output;
• during the unsetting and setting of the system it is used to provide an indication on the
status of the system. The indication states are as follows:
• General Alarm – ON 500 msecs. OFF 500 msecs.
• Clear to Exit – Continuous
• Exit interrupted – ON 100 msecs. OFF 100 msecs.
• 75% Exit Time – ON 200 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
• Set – ON 600 msecs. OFF 600 msecs (twice)• Normal Entry – ON 800 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
• 75% Entry Time – ON 200 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
• Fire – ON 500 msecs. OFF 100 msecs.
• Chime – ON 500 msecs. OFF 400 msecs (twice)
19 Part Set (Reflex)
The Part Set output is activated when the assigned groups on the system are part set. This output is a Reflex
output and follows the part set and unset status of the groups.
20 Confirm (Latch)
The Confirm output is activated when there have been activations on two separate zones: the second activa-
tion must occur within the Confirm Time Window. The zones do not have to be in the same group, however,both groups must be assigned to the Confirm output to allow activation. Cross-group confirmation is control-
led by the Communications programming in menu 56.1, Int Telecoms or 56.5, Ext Telecoms. If signalling
is by DTMF format, cross-group confirmation will occur on groups that share the same confirm channel. In allother signalling formats, cross-group confirmation will occur on groups that share the same account number.
NOTE: The Confirm output is used to give positive identification that a genuine intruder alarm condition has
occurred and to minimise the possibility of false alarm activations.
21 Line Fail (Reflex)
The Line Fail output is activated whenever a Line Fail zone is active or the telecom module detects and
sustains a line failure for more than 30 seconds.
22 Video (Pulse)
The Video output is activated by the Video zone when the system is set. This output can be used to activate
video recorder or video transmission systems.
23 Comm Fail (Latch)
The Comm Fail output is activated whenever there is a communication failure on the telecoms module tel-
ephone line. A fail to communicate event overrides the remaining Bell Delay period.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-9924 Batt Test
This output is activated when a battery load test is in progress. Refer to option
61.1.4 = Diagnostics.Latest.PSU Comms.
25 Wrong CD
This output is activated whenever a wrong code alarm occurs. That is, when six wrong codes in succession
are entered at the keypad. The output, by default pulses on for 90 seconds.
26 Alert (Latch)
The Alert output is activated when the control panel loses communication with one of the remote modules or
keypads.
27 Fire Delay (Latch)
The Fire Delay output is activated whenever a Fire zone is activated. The activation of the output is delayed
subject to the period determined by the 03=Abort Time parameter. The Fire Delay output is not subject to
the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (type 2 or above) is entered.
28 No Re-Arm (Latch)
The No Rearm output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state: it is subject to the Bell Delay
parameter. The No Rearm output is similar to the strobe output, but it stays on at the end of the bell time,
until unset.
29 Timer A (Reflex)
The Timer-A output is controlled by the Timer-A option (refer to option 65=Timers A/B ) and activates in
accordance with the programmed on and off times assigned to the function.
30 Timer B (Reflex)
The Timer-B output is controlled by the Timer-B option (refer to option 65=Timers A/B ) and activates in
accordance with the programmed on and off times assigned to the function.
NOTE: If the TIMER A or B outputs are programmed as LATCH mode, then they can only be reset by a
user code with access to all of the groups assigned to the relevant timer.
31 Walk Test (Reflex)
The Walk Test output is activated when a zone included in the walk test is tested (refer to option 31=Walk
Test).
32 Zone Omit (Reflex)
The Zone Omit ouput is activated as soon as a zone is omitted from the system by option 11=OMIT
ZONES or by option 54=LINKS . If the Output Mode attribute is assigned as:
•Reflex (default) the output remains active until the zone is reinstated;
•Latch the output is reset on entry of a valid code.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10033 Warning (Latch)
The Warning output is activated by the first occurrence of a high (1200-1300 Ω) and low (800-900 Ω)
resistance reading on each of the system zones in a single 24 hour period: the activating zone is recorded in thelog.
NOTE: The time period finishes at midnight, not 24 hours from first activation.
Subsequent high and low resistance readings from the same zone on the same day do not activate the output if
it has been reset by a valid user code.
NOTE: If a low resistance reading is followed by a high resistance reading, the Warning output activates on
the first occurrence of both activations.
34 Custom A (Latch)
The Custom-A output is activated whenever a Custom-A zone is activated.
35 Custom B (Latch)
The Custom –B output is activated whenever a Custom-B zone is activated.
36 Test (Pulse)
The Test output is activated at 12:00 hours each day for two seconds – the period of the Pulse can be
altered. This output can be used to perform a daily test on a digicom connected to the system.
37 Reset RQD (Latch)
The Reset RQD output is activated when a system, tamper or PA alarm has occurred that requires to be
reset by the engineer (type 3.7) code. Refer to option 51=PARAMETERS for details modifying the code
types assigned to the 06=System Reset, 07=Tamper Reset and 22=PA Reset parameters.
38 Mask (Latch)
The Mask output is activated whenever the zone resistance values returned by the RIO to the panel fall within
the range of the masked state (see Parameter 51.46, Zone Resistance). The output is not subject to theRearm parameter: It latches on and remains active until a valid group code (type 2 or above) is entered.
39 Valid Code (Reflex)
The Valid Code output is activated by the entry of any valid code. If the Output Mode assigned is Reflex ,
the output remains active while the user is accessing the menu and setting and unsetting the system. Once themenu is exited or the system sets or unsets, the output is restored.
40 Fail Set (Latch)
The Fail Set is activated if the system (or assigned groups) fails to set within the time assigned in parameter
35=Fail to Set – refer to option 51=PARAMETERS .
41 Duress (Latch)
The Duress function is activated on entry of a Duress Code (any valid code followed by two #’s, or a code
assigned as a Duress Code using menu option 42 – Codes ). The output is not subject to the Rearm param-
eter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (type 2 or above) is entered.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10142 Illegal Code (Latch)
The Illegal Code is activated 60 seconds after an entry of a single Dual Code or a code which is entered
outwith the Timer A and/or Timer B times assigned to it in menu option 42.1.4=CODES.User
Codes.Schedule.
43 Max Tamp (Latch)
The MAX TAMP output is activated when a MAX, MicroMAX or MAX3 tamper is activated.
44 Abort (Latch)
The ABORT output is activated when a valid code is entered during the Abort period on system entry.
45 Unset
The Unset output is activated each time the system (or group) is unset. The default output mode attribute is
programmed as pulse, for two seconds. This can be used to activate a buzzer to notify a user that the systemhas been unset, when using an RF fob.
46 Set Late (Latch)
The Set Late output is activated if the system has not been set by the programmed Monitor time – refer to
option 65.3.1=TIMERS.Autoset.Status .
47 U/S Early (Latch)
The Unset Early output is activated if the system has been unset before the programmed Monitor time –
refer to option 65.3.1=TIMERS.Autoset.Status.
48 Prewarn (Reflex)
The Prewarn output is active during the programmed prewarning period of the autoset function. The mode is
Reflex . The Prewarn emits a constant tone if the autosetting of the system can be extended. If an extension
is not possible, the Prewarn output pulses.
49 Autoset (Reflex)
The Autoset output is activated when the system has been set by the autoset function – refer to option
65.3=TIMERS.Autoset . The default Output Mode attribute is programmed as Reflex, therefore the output
remains active until the system unsets.
NOTE: The Set is also activated when the system autosets.
50 DR. Masked
The DR. (detector) Masked output is activated when zones, programmed for zone activity checks, are not
activated in the unset state within the time period or set/unset cycles programmed in Parameter 51.61 . The
zones are programmed for activity in menu 52.8.
51 – 65 Link A – O (Reflex)
Link output types have no inherent function: they are designed for use with option 54 = LINKS to provide the
engineer with a means of activating a specific output address.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10253 – Program Outputs (cont’d)
Link outputs can be activated by any of the link option sources. The operation of the Link output is depend-
ent on the Output Mode and Groups assigned to the output. The Groups assigned to the Link must have at
least one group common to the link output, if that output is to be activated. This feature can be used to multi-ply the number of different link outputs available on the system.
NOTE: When a zone function is the source of a Link output type, then a point to point link is available and
is as effective as direct wiring.
66 RF Jam (Latch)
The RF Jam output is activated whenever any of the RF RIO’s configured onto the system detect a significant
level of interference to cause radio jamming.
67 RF Super (Latch)
The RF Supervision output is activated whenever there is a supervision failure from any one of the super-
vised RF detectors configured onto the system. That is, when the system has received no signals (includingperiodic check-in signals) whatsoever, from a particular detector within the programmed supervision period.
68 Bell Fail
The Bell Fail output activates whenever a zone causes a fault condition.
69 Low Volts
The Low Volts output activates when the voltage of the AUX outputs drops below 10V .
70 Lockout (Reflex)
The Lockout output is active between the ON and OFF times assigned to the Lockout Status (option
65.3.6=TIMERS.Autoset.Lockout Status ). The Lockout output mode is Reflex, therefore it remains
active until the lockout switches OFF.
71 Vibration Test (Pulse)
The Vibration Test function is used to test zones programmed as Vibration. This output is used in conjunc-
tion with Precheck (menu option 66 – Pre-Check: – Mode: 4 – Forced Check ). The Vibration Test output
sends a five second positive removed pulse to the vault sensors. Any sensor not activated by the test is re-ported by the pre-check function and prevents the system from setting.
72 – 75 ATM-1, ATM-2, ATM-3, ATM-4 (Reflex)
The relevant ATM output is activated when the respective ATM zone type is omitted. This output is a Reflex
output and follows the omit status of the ATM zone types.
76 Fault (Latch)
This output will activate any time there is a fault condition present on the panel and will clear when all the fault
conditions have cleared.
The following fault types will activate the fault output:Line fail (any module), ARC comms fail (any module), RF jam, RF low battery, RF supervision failure, Bell fail
(from a bell fail zone), AC fail (panel, AC zone or power supply), Battery fail (panel, battery zone or powersupply), Mask.
SMS signalling faults will not activate the fault outputs.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10377 Bell Test
This output activates when Bell Test is selected via menu 32. This causes the bell and strobe output to
activate. This output is normally used to activate a relay to cut power to the bell.
78 Comms Test (Pulse)
This output is used for remote routine inspection, via the downloader software. When a remote inspection is
carried out, this output will activate for 10 seconds in order to trigger the test input of an external commsdevice.
79 Door Prop
This output activates when a door is held open for longer than the programmed time and an Open Timeout
occurs (Option 69).
80 Door Force
This output activates when a door is forced open without authorization and an alarm occurs.
81 Listen-in
This output activates after an alarm activation and an audio transmission is in progress.53 – Program Outputs (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-104Option 54 – Links
The Links option offers a powerful method of interconnecting zones, output functions, codes, keypads, and
MAX modules. The links table is constructed by creating a link between one of the source types and a validdestination type. Activating the source of a link activates the destination – this can be used to switch outputson and off to omit zones, codes, keypads and MAX modules from the system.
The links function allows MAX destinations to be assigned a ( 7) star function. If the destination is pro-
grammed as MAX and the ( 7) star is allocated, the assigned MAX door relay will open for the duration the
link is active. During this period no MAX alarms are generated if the door contact timeout is exceeded. Theon-board horns are deactivated and the green open LED will be illuminated throughout.
When the link is deactivated the MAX horn sounds and the door relay remains open for the programmed
relay duration period. – simulates an egress button activation.
If a max is disabled as the destination of a link, a card swiped at the max will still cancel an alarm or unset the
system. However it will not activate the relay or do a max function.
The number of links that can be assigned on each of the Galaxy systems is:
•Galaxy 48 = 64
•Galaxy 96 = 128
•Galaxy 264 = 256
•Galaxy 520 = 256
Programming Links
On selecting the Links option, the details of Link 01 are displayed. If no link has been assigned the screen
displays 01 NOT USED.
The details of each link can be displayed using the A and B keys, or a specific link can be selected by entering
the required link number, for example 05, 29 . When the required link is displayed, press, the ent key to begin
the programming procedure. The system prompts for the Link Source to be assigned. If groups are set then
some sources and destinations will not be available for programming:
1.Press the # key to select the required link source from the available types (refer to Table 23. Link
Source ).
2.Press the A or B keys to select the actual link source (for example, the zone address or the user code
number).
3.If the source is required to toggle the destination on and off, press the 7 key. The source is prefixed by a
7 on the display.
NOTES:1.The link destination is activated by the first operation of the source and then deactivated by the second
operation.
4.Press the ent key; the source of the link is assigned and the keypad prompts for the link destination to be
allocated.
5.Press the # key to select the required link destination from the available types (refer to Table 24. Link
Destination ).
6.Press the A or B keys to select the actual link destination (for example, the zone address or the output
type). To cancel a link program the source as not used.
7.Press the ent key.54 – Links

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1058.If the link destination is d). Output Type and Groups have been enabled (refer to option 63=OP-
TIONS ) then each link must be allocated to at least one group (use the A or B key to move between the
group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block) and press the ent key.
NOTE: The groups determine which of the assigned output type destinations the link activates.
9.The details of the assigned link are displayed.
NOTE: If the link is currently active, the source is separated from the destination by a + (plus) symbol. If the
link is not active a – (negative) symbol is displayed.
10.Press the A or B key to move to the next link to be assigned and repeat steps 1 –9 or press the ent key
to escape from the LINKS menu option.
Table 6-22. Link Source54 – Links (cont’d)
Source Type * ModifierExample
DisplayNotes
a) Not Used – This link is not operational
b) Zone Address Off *1014When the zone is opened the link is active.
When the zone is closed the link is inactive.
On *1014When the zone opens first time, the link is activated. When the zone
opens a second time, the link is deactivated.
c) User Code Off *001When the code is entered, the link is activated momentarily only. This
option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for example, an
output pulse.
On **001When the code is entered first time, the link is activated.
When the code is entered the second the link is deactivated.
d) Output Address Off #1014When the output is on, the link is active.
When the output is off, the link is inactive.
On *#1014When the output turns on first time, the link is activated.
When the output turns on second time, the link deactivates.
e) MAX Address Off 01When the MAX is swiped with a card the link activates momentarily
only. This option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for
example, an output pulse.
On *01When the MAX is swiped with a card, the link is activated.
When the MAX is swiped a second time, the link deactivates.
f) Link Timer Off LT01When the Link timer times out, the link activates momentarily only. This
option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for example, an
output pulse.
On *LT01When the Link timer times out, the link is activated.
When the Link timer times out a second time, the link is deactivated.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-10654 – Links (cont’d)
Table 6-23. Link destination
NOTE: ¹¹There are 16 Link timers in the system. These Link timers are triggered by the Latch and Reflex
timer destinations. Both the Latch and Reflex options operate the same set of Link timers. They juststart the timers in different ways. A Latch timer can restart the Link timer while it is running. A Reflextimer cannot.Destination Type * Modifier Notes
a) Not used – The link is not operational.
b) Zone Address -When the link is active, the zone is omitted from
the system
c) User Code -When the link is active, the user's PIN and MAX
card are not operational.
d) Output Type -When the link is active, all outputs programmed
with the selected function are activated.
e) Output Address -When the link is active, the specific output
address is switched on. Please note that when
using the output address as the destination, the
deactivation of the link will switch the output off
immediately, overriding any pulse time or latchmode of the output programming.
f) Keypad Address -When the link is active, the buttons on the keypad
will not operate.
g) MAX Address OffWhen the link is active, the MAX reader will not
read cards.
OnWhen the link is active, the door lock relay for the
reader will constantly be in the unlocked state.
The door contact input will also be bypassed so
that no alarm will occur.
h) Latch Timer** -When the link is deactivated, the Link Timer
starts to count down from the Latch timer value.Each subsequent activation of the link will restart
the timer count down to this value. When the
timer reaches zero the Link timer activates and it
can trigger another link. If the link is continuously
activated within the timer period, the counter will
never reach zero and the Link timer will be held
off. The application for this would be a link that
didn't activate so long as another event continues
to happen with the time period.
i) Reflex Timer** -The Reflex timers operate identically to the Latch
timer except that the timer cannot be restartedwhile it is running. A Reflex timer destination will
still start a Link Timer running in the same way as
a Latch timer destination.
An application for this would be a delayed action
link.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-107Option 55 – Soak
The Soak option allows selected zones to be put onto test for a period ranging from 1 – 14 days (refer to
option 51.16=PARAMETERS.Soak Time ). Activations from a zone on the soak test do not cause alarms
but are recorded in the event log and are reported to type 2 (and above) users on unsetting of the system.The zone remains on soak test until the selected number of days has passed without any alarm activation, thezones then resume normal operation – that it, activations result in alarms being generated.
The Soak Time is reset to the full number of days if there is an alarm activation on any of the selected zones.
NOTE: The Soak Time starts when the first zone is put onto soak test; subsequent additions are only tested
for the period remaining in the Soak Time . Parameter 51.16, Soak Time must be programmed
before activating any zones in to the soak test. The period remaining decreases by one day each dayat 0900 hours.
Activation of an Exit or Video Exit zone during the Entry time does not reset the soak test and period.
Programming Soak Zones
On selecting the Soak option, the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move to
the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. To place the zone on the soak
test press the # key; the keypad indicates that the zone is now ON TEST . Select other zones to be put on
soak test in the same way. Once all the zones have been selected, press the esc key; the keypad briefly
displays the number of days remaining in the Soak Time parameter before escaping from the Soak operation.55 – Soak

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-108Option 56 – Communications
The Communications option is used to program the Galaxy Communication peripherals. This option has 7
sub menus, one for each of the communication peripherals. Each of these has its own set of sub menus asdetailed in the following pages.
1 = Int Telecoms (Comm 1)
This section supports programming of the on-board Telecom module, for alarm signalling and remote servicingover PSTN.
2 = Ext RS232 (Comm 2)
This section supports programming of the RS232 module to allow direct wire communication to a serial commport on a PC, or over PSTN using a third party modem connection.
3 = ISDN (Comm 3)
This section supports programming of the ISDN module, for alarm signalling and remote servicing over ISDNB and D channels.
4 = Ethernet (Comm 4)
This section supports programming of the Ethernet module for alarm signalling and remote servicing over anEthernet LAN/WAN using both TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
5 = Ext Telecoms (Comm 5)
This section supports programming of the remote Telecom module, for alarm signalling and remote servicingover PSTN.
6 = Int RS232 (Comm 6)
This section supports programming of the onboard RS232 port.
7 = 2-Way Audio (Comm 7)
This section supports programming of the 2-way audio system.56 – Communications

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1091 = Internal Telecoms56 – Communications (cont’d)
Figure 6-6. Telecom Module Programming Structure1 = Int Telecoms
01 = Format 1 = DTMF 1 = Channels 1-16 1 = Output Function
2 = Output Mode
3 = Output Polarity
4 = Diag Recording (not available)
5 = Descriptor (not available)6 = Lighting (not available)7 = Output Functions
2 = Acct/Channel
4 = Contact ID2 = SIA
0 (0-4) 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Group Settings 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.
3 = Microtech 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Group Settings 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.
1 = Trigger events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Ack Timeout 1 = 30 seconds
2 = 60 seconds
3 = Group Settings 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.1 = Latch
2 = Reflex3 = Pulse
02 = Telephone No. 1
03 = Account No. 6 digits Max.
04 = Receiver 1 = Single
2 = Dual
3 = Alternate
05 = Telephone No. 2 22 digits Max22 digits Max
06 = Dial Type 1 = Tone
2 = Pulse
07 = Autotest 1 = Start Time
2 = Intervals
3 = Int. Test0 – 99 hours
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
08 = Engineer Test
09 = No. of Rings 10 (1-20)
10 = Line Fail 1 = Line Volts 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2 = Dial Tone 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
3 = Incoming Call 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
11 = Fail to Comm
12 = Remote Access 1 = Access Period 1 = Off
2 = All Unset
3 = Any Set
4 = Any Time
2 = Mode 1 = Direct Access
2 = Manager Authorize
3 = Call Back
13 = Call Home Not Available
14 = Alarm Monitoring 1 = Trigger (1-20)
2 = Telephone No.
3 = Account No.
15 = Backup module
16 = Forced V.21 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
17 = SMS Paging 1 = Mobile No.
2 = Centre No.
3 = Format 1 = TAP
2 = UCP (SMS)
3 = UCP (Minicall)
4 = UCP (Numeric)1 = Status
2 = Groups
4 = Site ID
5 = Password4 = Group Condition
1 = Off
2 = Ext. Telecoms3 = Ext. RS2324 = ISDN5 = Ethernet6 = Int RS232 1
1 = Status2 = Groups
1 = Status2 = Groups
1 = Status2 = Groups

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-110The on-board Telecom module allows two-way communication via the telephone network. This can be used:
• to transmit alarm and event signals to ARCs, (Alarm Receiving Centres), supporting a number of signalling
formats.
• to remotely service the Galaxy control panel via a PC with Remote Servicing Software installed.
NOTE: When using the Telecom module as a digital communicator to signal alarms and events to ARCs or
to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software installed, the Format , Telephone Number 1 and Account
Number required to be programmed. Programming of the remaining options is either optional or not
required.
56.1.01 Format
The Telecom module provides 4 signalling formats:
• DTMF
• SIA• Microtech• Contact ID
Once the format has been selected, the alarm and event triggers that the panel will transmit to the ARCs may
be programmed.
1 = DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency)
When DTMF format is selected, the operation of the Telecom module is similar to that of a hardwired 8 or 16
channel communicator. The Telecom module transmits as an eight channel communicator if channels 9 – 16 areprogrammed as Spare .
NOTES:
1.DTMF is fast format
2.A battery low condition occurring on the Galaxy panel is always sent to the ARC as a code 8 in the
status channel. This may cause problems for some ARCs. If a channel is assigned as Battery Low , then
both the channel and the code 8 in channel 9 is transmitted.
PolarityChannel Output Function Mode Status
Mode
Groups assignedChannel CH03 INTRUDER *LCH03 INTRUDER *LCH03 INTRUDER *LCH03 INTRUDER *LCH03 INTRUDER *L
POS A12345678POS A12345678POS A12345678POS A12345678POS A12345678Programming Channels
On selecting DTMF , the keypad displays 1 = Channels 1 – 16 . All 16 channels can be individually pro-
grammed. To access the Channels option press the ent key; the programming details of the first channel are
displayed. Select the required channel using the A and B keys or by entering the channel number directly and
press the ent key.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11156 – Communications (cont’d)
Channels 1-16
Each channel can be programmed with the following attributes:
1 = Output function2 = Output mode3 = Output Polarity4 = Diag Recording5 = Descriptor6 = Lighting7 = Output Groups
1 = Output Function
Any of the system output functions (see option 53 = Program Outputs ) can be assigned to each of the
channels 1 – 16. Channel 3 defaults to output function 04 = INTRUDER . All other channels default to
11=SPARE . Select the required output function using the A and B keys or by entering the function
number directly. Once the required function is displayed, press the ent key to assign the function to the
selected channel. For example, a PA function programmed on channel 2 results in a PA code to be trans-
mitted on channel 2 to the ARC when there is a PA alarm activation.
Confirmed alarm conditions will now work across multiple groups. Previously, a confirmed condition
would only be created if both zones activated were in the same group. Confirmed outputs (and channelsin DTMF format, option 56.1.1.1 ) will activate for alarms across groups as long as both groups
concerned have been assigned to that output or channel.
2 = Output Mode
Each output function defaults to a specific, logical output mode. However, the output mode of each func-tion can be modified to meet special requirements: when reprogrammed, the new mode applies to alloutputs assigned to that function. The output modes are:
1 = Latch: the output remains active until a valid code is entered,
2 = Reflex: the output follows the activity of the triggering event, for example, the Set output follows the
setting and unsetting of the group.
3 = Pulse: the output remains active for the programmed pulse time (1-3000 seconds).
Programming the Output Mode
Select the required mode using the A or B keys or by selecting the number 1 – 3. Once the required mode
is selected, press the ent key to accept the programming. If assigning the Pulse output mode, enter the
pulse time (001 – 300 seconds) and press the ent key.
NOTE: The Output Mode status determines the operation of the channel restore. The status is modified
by pressing the 7 key when the channel details display on the keypad. The status options are:
77777 = Restore – channel sends restore code when reset
+ = Open/close – channel reports setting/unsetting
blank = Alarm only – channel signals alarm only (no restore signal transmitted)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1123 = Output Polarity
The Output Polarity determines the normal operational state of the output.
0 = POS – channel activates when the output is triggered.
1 = NEG – channel activates when the output is reset.
4 = Diag Recording
Option not available
5 = Descriptor
Option not available
6 = Lighting
Option not available
7 = Output Groups
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option
63 = OPTIONS )
The Group attribute allows the channel to be assigned to the groups on the system; a channel can be
assigned to more than one group. The channel will only trigger when an event occurs on one of the groupsassigned to the channel. All channels default to all groups on the system.
On selecting the Output Groups attribute, the groups that the channel is currently assigned to are dis-
played. Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the group and press the ent key: if the group
number is displayed on the top line, then the group is assigned to the channel; if a dash (–) appears in placeof the group number, the group has been removed from the channel.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups,sub-divided into A, B, C and D:
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next
block of eight groups is selected, press keys 1-8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current
block to the channel; press the ent key to accept the selection.
Group Status
This group attribute offers an additional feature that makes the operation of the channel conditional on the
set status of each of the system groups. A channel assigned Group Status only activates if the set condi-
tions of the programming are met, for example, an Intruder channel can be programmed to activate only if
groups 2 and 4 are set and group 3 is unset.
To assign the Group Status conditions, press the 7 key when selecting the groups: an arrow ( >) is dis-
played on the bottom line as well as the current Status . Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status
of the groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S= Set – group must be set to allow channel to activate;
U= Unset – group must be unset to allow channel to activate;
–= Set or unset – channel activation is independent of the group status.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11356 – Communications (cont’d)
Programming Individual Channel Account Numbers
When the account number is programmed using option 56.1.2 = COMMUNICATIONS.Telecoms.
Account No. , then all 16 channels are automatically programmed with the same number. The Account/
Channel menu option allows each channel to be programmed with a separate account number if required.
The account number can be up to a maximum of six digits, however a four digit account number is thestandard.
NOTE: Changing the main account number overwrites all separate account numbers previously pro-
grammed for channels 1 – 16.
On selecting DTMF , the keypad displays 1 = Channels 1 – 16 . Press the A key; the 2 = Acct/Channel
option is displayed. All 16 channels can be individually programmed. To access the Acct/Channel option
press the ent key; the first channel is displayed. Select the required channel using the A and B keys or by
entering the channel number directly and press the ent key; the account number currently assigned to the
channel is displayed. Press the B key to delete each of the digits and then enter the new account number.
2 = SIA (Security Industries Association)
The SIA format provides a highly detailed protocol that transmits detailed information including zone descrip-
tions to a PC loaded with suitable software or to a SIA compatible receiver. The SIA format is capable oftransmitting over 330 different Galaxy events (refer to Appendix C for further details).
On selecting the SIA format, the keypad prompts for the required SIA level to be entered, there are five SIA
levels available:
• 0 (default) – Basic event information with 4 digit account number.
• 1 – as level 0 plus 6 digit accounts
• 2 – as level 1 but with event modifiers• 3 – as level 2 but with text descriptions• 4 – as level 3 but allows control commands to be received by the Galaxy control panel.
Trigger Events
When the SIA level has been selected press the ent key, the keypad displays the first trigger event and its
On/Off status (see table 6-25 for a list of available triggers). These are the events and alarms that are
transmitted to the ARC or PC. If the trigger status is set to On, an activation of an event controlled by the
trigger results in the transmission to the receiver of the event details. Step through the trigger events usingthe A and B keys.
The table below shows the list of signalling triggers that are available to the Telecom module, the RS232
module, the ISDN module and the Ethernet module.
Table 6-24. Trigger EventsoNt nevEreggirTo Nt nevEreggirT
1s seruD/AP1 1l ecnaC/teseR
2r edurtnI2 1s mmoC/seludoM
3s ruoH423 1s utatScelE
4y tiruceS4 1s seccAuneM
5s enoZmotsuC5 1e lbuorT
6e riF6 1e noZgoL
7t luaFteS7 1g aTxaM
8t imO8 1l arotseRenoZ
9r epmaT9 1n oisivrepuSFR
01g nitteS0 2t luaF

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1141 = Status
To modify the trigger select the required trigger type using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1 = Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified, press the ent key. To program
the status to On press 1, to set it to Off press 0. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to
the previous menu level.
2 = GroupsIf groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), then groups can be assigned
to the events. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. Pressthe A key, the keypad displays 2 = Group Settings and then press the ent key; the status of the groups
assigned to the trigger is displayed. If the group has Y below it, then this event occurring in this group is
signalled. If N is displayed, then the event is not signalled for that group. To toggle the status of a group,
enter the group number. When all the groups have been assigned press the ent key to save the program-
ming and return to the previous menu level.
Cross Group Confirmation
Confirmed outputs (and channels in DTMF format, option 56.1.1.1 ) will activate for alarms across groups
as long as both groups concerned have been assigned to that output or channel. In the point ID signallingformats (SIA, Microtech and Contact ID), confirmed signals will be transmitted across groups that share thesame account number. For example, in option 56.1.1.2 (SIA), it is possible to select a different account
number for each group on the system. Group 1 and group 2 can both be programmed with the same accountnumber. If there is a single activation in group 1 then a single intruder activation in group 2, within the con-firmed time window, a confirmed alarm signal will be transmitted for group 2.
Multi-group systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups,sub-divided into A, B, C and D:
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached the next
block of eight groups is selected, press keys 1–8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current
block; press the ent key to accept the selection.56 – Communications (cont’d)
1 = Status
To modify the trigger, select the required trigger type using the A and B keys and press the ent key. To
program the status to On press 1, to set it to Off press 0. Press the ent key to save the programming and
return to the previous menu level.
Programming the SIA Format with Groups Enabled
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), then the SIA format menu alters
slightly; an additional level is added.
1 = Trigger Events
On selecting the SIA level the keypad displays 1 = Trigger Events ; press the ent key to display the first
trigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the groups assigned.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11556 – Communications (cont’d)
2 = Group Settings
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The event triggers are signalled to the telephone number, with the account number, programmed in the
menu options 56.1.2 = Telephone Number 1 and 56.1.3 = Account Number. However, each group can
be programmed to transmit event details to a unique telephone number and assigned a separate accountnumber. On selecting the Group Settings option the first system group is displayed. Select the required
group using the A or B keys and press the ent key, 1 = Telephone Number is displayed.
1 = Telephone Number
To assign a telephone number to the group press the ent key and enter the required number. The telephone
number can be a maximum of 22 digits (including dial pause 7 and dial tone detect # characters); press the
ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
2 = Account NumberTo assign an account number to the group press the ent key and enter the required number. The account
number can be a maximum of six digits; press the ent key to save the programming and return to the
previous menu level.
Account GroupsIt is possible to have a number of groups bound by the same Account Number (an Account Group).This
means that one CL signal is not sent until all the groups within the Account Group are set. Individual groupswithin the Account Group will not send a CL signal. The groups within the Account Group are identified bya starred ( 7) Account Number, for example,
7 2112.
When the Account Group is fully set, the identifier of the CL message is 999 to identify it as an Account
Group that has set.
For unset, each group that is part of the Account Group can report individually that it is open.
NOTE: Account Groups only operate for SIA signalling.
3 = Microtech
Microtech format is a protocol that transmits detailed point identification information to a Personal Computer
(PC) which has the Galaxy Alarm Monitoring software installed.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format. Refer to 2 = SIA for
programming details.
4 = Contact ID
Contact ID format is a protocol which transmits point identification information to an Alarm Receiving Centre
that is capable of receiving the Galaxy variant of contact ID.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format except for the addition of
the 2 = Ack timeout programming option. This option selects how long the telecom module waits for the
handshake tone from the receiver and can be set to 1 (30 seconds) or 2 (60 seconds).

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11656.1.02 Telephone No. 1
Telephone number 1 must be entered. This is the main telephone number that the alarms are signalled to. Up
to 22 digits may be entered, including control modifiers. The control modifiers are entered using the 7 and #
keys:
7 Pause (for two seconds before dialling the next digit). Multiple entries can be made, for example,
entering 777 gives a six second pause.
# Dial tone detect (wait for new dial tone). Each dial tone detect lasts for 15 seconds. Multiple entries can
be made, for example, entering ## gives a 30 second dial tone detect. If a new dial tone is not detected in thistime, then the dialling attempt is aborted. This is counted as a fail to communicate.
The B key is used to erase an existing telephone number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
56.1.03 Account No.
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits
although four digits is the standard.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
NOTE: Entering the account number into this menu option automatically copies the number to all channel or
group triggers in the selected format. Any individual account numbers that have been programmedare overwritten.
56.1.04 Receiver
The transmission destination can be set to one of three modes:
1 = Single
Reports to the telephone number programmed in Telephone Number 1.
2 = Dual
Reports to both numbers programmed in Telephone Number 1 and Telephone Number 2 . The alarm must
be transmitted to both numbers.
3 = Alternate
Reports to Telephone Number 1 OR Telephone Number 2 . Each number is tried in sequence until the
alarm is successfully transmitted. The alarm is only transmitted to one number. Telephone number 1 is alwaysthe first number attempted.
56.1.05 Telephone No. 2
A second telephone number is available to support Dual and Alternate dialling to a second destination
receiver. The programming is identical to Telephone Number 1 .
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11756 – Communications (cont’d)
56.1.06 Dial Type
The transmission mode can be selected from two types:
1. Tone (also known as “DTMF Dial”) this is much quicker at dialling than the Pulse option.
2. Pulse (also known as “Rotary” or “Loop Disconnect”) is universal, however, an increasing number of
exchanges now provide the Tone (DTMF Dial) option.
NOTE: If unsure of the type of exchange that the panel is connected to, leave as Pulse dialling.
56.1.07 Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the Monitoring Station at programmed intervals, in order
to indicate alarm transmission path integrity.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer
test transmissions are offset by the value assigned in the Test Interval option.
2 = Intervals
This option determines the period between engineer test transmissions following the Start Time , the program-
mable range is 0 – 99 hours.
NOTES:
1.If the Test Interval is 0 (default) the Autotest is disabled — even if a Start Time has been assigned.
2.To disable Autotest enter 00:00 (default); no transmissions of test signals can be sent at midnight.
3 = Intelligent Test
This option stops the transmission of an automatic engineer test if an alarm signal has already been sent during
the autotest interval.
4 = Group Condition
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The Group Condition determines the status that each group must satisfy before the Autotest is transmitted.
This can be used to prevent an Autotest from being signalled when groups are set on the system. On selecting
this option press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept
the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S= Set – group must be set to allow autotest transmission;
U= Unset – group must be unset to allow autotest transmission;
–= Set or unset – autotest transmission is independent of the group status.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11856.1.08 Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent to the alarm destination once the Account Number and the Telephone Number
1 have been entered, to ensure that the station is receiving transmissions sent from the Telecom module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad, WARNING!!! ENT = SEND
MESSAGE. Press the ent key to send the engineer test.
The test attempts to transmit once for each selection of the option. If the test is not successfully transmitted,
the communicator does not attempt to resend. An unsuccessful transmission is not counted as a FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE .
NOTE: Activation of an engineer test will send a test signal via all Galaxy communication modules.
56.1.09 No. of Rings
This option determines the number of rings before the Telecom module answers an incoming call; the pro-
grammable range is 1 – 20, the default is 10.
56.1.10 Line Fail
The Telecom module continually monitors the telephone line that it is connected to. This option determines theline monitoring conditions that result in a LINE FAIL event being reported and recorded in the log. The three
line monitoring capabilities are:
1 = Line Volts (default Enabled ): A line fail occurs if the voltage on the telephone line falls below
three volts, or the line is cut.
2 = Dial Tone (default Disabled ): A line fail occurs if the Telecom module cannot detect a dial tone
on the telephone line, when a dial attempt is made. In this case the Telecom module records the linefail, but will continue the call attempt even if no dial tone is detected.
3 = Incoming Call (default Disabled ): A line fail occurs if the Telecom module attempts to transmit
an alarm while there is an incoming call.
NOTE: Any combination of the above options may be enabled or disabled at any time.
When one of these conditions is detected, a LINE FAIL message is sent to the Galaxy and is stored in the
event log, with the exception of line volts which is monitored for a further period determined by the valueprogrammed in parameter 51.68. If sufficient line voltage is restored within this period, no event will be stored.If an attempt is made to set the system or part of the system within this period, the message ALERT – LINE
FAIL 1 ent = CONTINUE SET will be displayed. If ent is pressed the set will continue; if esc is pressed a
line fail will immediately be logged. If the system is unset, the COMM LINE FAIL message appears on the
keypad display and a local alarm is sounded – the keypad buzzers and on-board horn (if connected) areactivated. If the system is set when a line fail condition occurs, the message COMM LINE FAIL will be
displayed when the system is unset. This will be accompanied by a local alarm.
The local alarm is only activated for the first line condition of each unset period. Subsequent line fails are
displayed as COMM LINE FAIL messages on the keypad for the duration of the condition and are re-
corded in the event log.
If an alarm occurs during a line fail condition, then the programmed bell delay for each of the groups is over-
ridden (refer to option 51.02 = PARAMETERS.Bell Delay ).56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-11956.1.11 Fail to Communicate
This option determines how long the on-board telecom module will attempt to gain a connection before the
COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log.
When an alarm condition or event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the Telecom module snatches
the telephone line and dials the programmed telephone numbers. After a successful communication the LEDlights for three seconds, the module then releases the telephone line and reconnects any serially connectedequipment. This procedure is repeated for the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been
programmed as Dual .
NOTE: The Telecom module communicator snatches and holds the line until a successful attempt has been
made to the required telephone numbers or all the repeat attempts have been tried.
If the communication attempt is unsuccessful, the LED flashes rapidly for three seconds. The communicator
then waits for a short period before redialling the number (or the second telephone number if the Receiver
option has been programmed as Dual or Alternate ). When the Fail To Communicate option is left at the
default setting of 120 seconds, a communication Fail will be recognised if there has not been a successful
kiss-off, irrespective of the number of failed attempts. Bell Delay (parameter 51.2) is overridden when this
condition occurs.
The FAIL TO COMM parameter has 5 time values:
1 = 60 seconds; 2 = 120 seconds; 3 = 180 seconds; 4 = 240 seconds; 5 = 300 seconds.
NOTE: If the Receiver option is programmed as Dual then successful transmission must be made to both
telephone numbers.
56.1.12 Remote Access
This option defines when and how Remote Servicing will operate. The options are described as follows.
1 = Access Period
This option determines under what conditions the remote site can be accessed by the Remote operator. There
are four modes:
1 = Off
Remote Servicing access to the Galaxy panel is disabled
2 = All Unset
Access only when all the groups are unset. If groups are not enabled access is available at any time.
3 = Any Set
No access if any of the groups are set. The system must be fully unset, whether groups are enabled or not.
4 = Any Time (default)
Access available at any time56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12056 – Communications (cont’d)
2 = Mode
1 = Direct Access
This permits access at anytime. Once access is authorized, uploading, downloading and remote servicing can
begin.
2 = Manager Authorize
There are two methods that an authorized user can use to enable access to the Galaxy via Remote Servicing:
• Timed Access: Remote Servicing must access the Galaxy within 40 minutes of this option being
enabled by the manager. Once connected, there is no time limit on the access period. On terminating theconnection, Remote Servicing can reaccess the system within a 15 minute period of the termination.
• Call Back: the manager instructs the Galaxy to initiate a connection to a PC (with Remote Servicing
software loaded) by dialling one of the numbers programmed in the Call Back option.
3 = Call Back
Up to five telephone numbers can be programmed into this option. Remote Servicing requests the Galaxy to
call back to one of the numbers.
NOTES:
1.If Manager Authorize is selected as the Remote Access Mode , then the telecoms module can only
make outgoing calls – it is disabled from answering all incoming calls. This allows another telephone, fax oranswering machine to be connected to the line without interference from the telecom module when calling intothe premises.
2. If Call Back is selected, then access to the Galaxy is denied unless the call back option in Remote
Servicing is used to initiate the connection.
56.1.13 Call Home
Not used
56.1.14 Alarm Monitoring
This option is used to allow events to be dialled to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software loaded.
The Alarm Monitoring option transmits alarm events information only when all of the alarms have been sent
to the ARC (or all five of the communication attempts have been unsuccessfully made). If a new alarm eventoccurs while the system is transmitting in the Alarm Monitoring mode, the transmission is terminated and the
alarms are sent to the ARC using the primary format selected.
The menu structure and programming of the Alarm Monitoring options are identical to the SIA format.
Refer to option 2 = SIA for programming details.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12156 – Communications (cont’d)
56.1.15 Backup Module
This option allows another module to become the primary communication module if a line fail is detected on
the on-board telecom. There are 6 options:1 = Off; 2 = Ext Telecoms; 3 = Ext RS232; 4 = ISDN; 5 = Ethernet; 6 = Int RS232 1.
56.1.16 Force V.21
Option not available
56.1.17 SMS
The SMS option is available on Galaxy panels with V4.00 and above software and Telecom modules withV5.xx and above software. This option generates and transmitts SMS text messages, for events generated bythe Galaxy panel.
1=Mobile No.
This is a 22 digit telephone number and is the mobile phone number of the recipient of the message.
2=Centre No.
This is a 22 digit telephone number and is the phone number of the SMS centre. The default is different for
each operator.
3=Format
The options for this menu are:
1=TAP
For mobile phones (UK)
2=UCP (SMS)
For mobile phones (outside UK)
3=UCP (Minicall)
For alpha pagers
4=UCP (Numeric)
For numeric pagers
4=Site ID
This is a 16 character alphanumeric string and is used to identify the panel/site sending the message. If the
format is UCP (Numeric), then the site ID is numeric only, and only the first four characters are sent out.
5=Password
This is a 16 character string and is an optional field required by some paging centres.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1222 = External RS232 Interface Module56 – Communications (cont’d)
The Galaxy RS232 Interface module is a multipurpose communication peripheral. This module can be used to:
• signal alarms and events to a single local PC with Galaxy Alarm Monitoring and third party monitoring
software installed.
• remotely service the Galaxy control panel via a PC with Remote Servicing software installed,• act as an interface to third party products using Galaxy SIA control porotocol.• operate as a printer interface unit.
For information on the installation and operation of the RS232 Interface module refer to Section 3 – Periph-
erals and the RS232 Module Operating Instructions (part number IO1-0054).
56.2.1 Mode
The Mode option allows selection of the method of connection to the PC:
1 = Direct
This mode is selected if the Galaxy panel and PC are located in close proximity to one another and can inter-
face via an RS232 cable.
2 = Modem
This mode is selected if the RS232 is communicating, via a modem and telephone line, with a remote PC. The
telephone number of the remote PC must be entered in option 1 = Telephone Number and the type of
telephone exchange ( Pulse or Tone ) must be assigned in option 2 = Dial Type .Figure 6-7. RS232 Programming Structure2 = RS232
1 = Mode 1 = Direct
2 = Modem 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Dial Type 1 = Tone
2 = Pulse
3 = X25 Not Available
4 = Paging Not Available
2 = Format 1 = SIA 0 (0-3) 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Microtech 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
3 = Account No. 6 digit Max.
4 = Copy/Overwrite 1 = Copy Site 1 = Start
2 = Abort
2 = Overwrite Site 1 = Start
2 = Abort
3 = Copy Stored
5 = Comms Setup Not Available

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12356.2.2 Format
This option allows selection of the alarm signalling format. There are two formats available for the RS232
module:
1 = SIA
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.2) for programming details.
2 = Microtech
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.3) for programming details.
NOTE: The SIA and Microtech formats for the RS232 module are identical in structure and programming to
the Telecom menu. The only difference is that when groups have been enabled there is no Group
Settings option.
56.2.3 Account No.
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
56.2.4 Copy/Overwrite
This RS232 feature is not compatible with Galaxy Version 5 and Version 6 software.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1243 = ISDN Module
Figure 6-8. ISDN Programming Structure56 – Communications (cont’d)
3 = ISDN
01 = Primary 1 = Default Tel No
2 = Default Acc No
3 = Dial Type1 = Analogue
2 = Digital
3 = X.25 1 = TEI
2 = LCGN
3 = LCN
4 = Polling Rate 1 = None
2 = 90 secs
3 = 15 mins
4 = 60 mins
5 = Programmable
4 = RAM Option not available
4 = Format
02 = Secondary 1 = Default Tel No
2 = Default Acc No
3 = Dial Type
4 = Format
5 = Copy Primary
6 = Alternate1 = Disable
2 = Enable
03 = ISDN Type 1 = Point to Multipoint
2 = Point to Point
04 = ISDN Snatch 1 = Hardware
2 = Software1 = Always Snatch
2 = Never Snatch
3 = Snatch if Line Fail
1 = Disabled
2 = Enabled
05 = Autotest5 = CUG Index
1 = DTMF
2 = SIA
3 = Microtech
4 = Contact ID
6 = X.25 Protocol 1
7 = X.25 Protocol 25 = Robofon
06 = Engineer Test
07 = Line Fail
2 = Line Volts Only
3 = Layer 1 Only4 = Volts and Layer 1
5 = Volts or Layer 1
08 = Fail to Comm
09 = Remote Access
10 = Alarm Monitoring1 = None
1 = Access Time1 = Off
2 = All Unset3 = Any Set4 = Any Time
2 = Mode
1 = Direct Access
2 = Manager Authorize3 = Call Back1 = Start Time2 = Intervals3 = Int. Test4 = Group condition
1 = Trigger2 = Phone Number3 = Account Number
11 = Backup Module
1 = Off
2 = Ext. Telecoms3 = Ext. RS2324 = Ethernet5 = Int. Telecom6 = Int. RS232 1

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-125The Galaxy ISDN Module supports alarm signalling and remote servicing over ISDN B and D channels.
56.3.01 Primary
1 =Default Telephone Number
Telephone number 1 must be entered. This is the main telephone number that the alarms are signalled to. Up
to 22 digits may be entered, including control modifiers. The control modifiers are entered using the 7 and #
keys:
7 Pause (for two seconds before dialling the next digit). Multiple entries can be made, for example,
entering 777 gives a six second pause.
# Dial tone detect (wait for new dial tone). Each dial tone detect lasts for 15 seconds. Multiple entries can
be made, for example, entering ## gives a 30 second dial tone detect. If a new dial tone is not detected in thistime, then the dialling attempt is aborted. This is counted as a fail to communicate.
The B key is used to erase an existing telephone number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
2 = Default Account Number
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits
although 4 digits is the standard.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
NOTE: Entering the account number into this menu option automatically copies the number to all triggers in
the selected format (DTMF, SIA, Microtech, Contact ID, X.25 Protocol 1 and X.25 Protocol 2).Any individual account numbers that have been programmed are overwritten.
3 = Dial Type
This option allows selection of the type of ISDN transmission.
NOTE: The available signalling formats are only compatible with certain dial types. If a dial type is selected
which does not match the currently programmed format a warning will be displayed momentarily toindicate the mismatch.
1 = Analogue
This selection uses voice mode to transmit data to ISDN or PSTN networks. Default selection for ISDNB-channel communications.
2 = Digital
The ISDN line is capable of transmitting alarm data in a digital format with a speed of 64K bit persecond.(This option is not yet available)56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1263 = X.25
The X.25 dialling type allows transmission of data via an X.25 network to compatible X.25 receivers. The
ISDN Module uses the D-channel of the ISDN line to set up the connection. After set-up the connection willremain activated. On selection of the X.25 dial type a number of configuration options will be made available.
1 = TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier)
Since it is possible to connect several devices to one ISDN line, like X.25 ISDN Module but also X.25pay systems for an ATM card, the local telecom provider uses the TEI to identify the devices. The localtelecom provider issues the TEI number. The value can vary from 00 to 63.
2 = LCGN (Logical Channel Group Number)/ 3 = LCN (Logical Channel Number)
The X.25 data network uses the LCGN and LCN to identify the users that are connected. Normally theusers are connected directly to the X.25 network. To allow a high number of users the LCN can vary from000 to 255. The LCGN can multiply this number of users with 15. The LCGN can vary from 00 to 15.When using X.25 over ISDN the LCGN is set to 00 and the LCN is set to 001.
4 = Polling Rate
The polling rate is used to monitor the X.25 connection end to end. A poll is sent from the ISDN Moduleto the X.25 receiver. The receiver also monitors if the poll is received within the specified limit. The intervalbetween the polls can be programmed using this parameter.
5 = CUG (Closed User Group)
Depending on the country of use and the local telecom provider the CUG index is used. The telecomprovider can issue a closed number group to a certain monitoring station. The extra subscription for X.25use over the ISDN line is often available in several packages depending on the use of the X.25 facility. Thevalue can vary from 0 to 9.
4 = RAM
Option not used
4 = Format
The ISDN module provides seven signalling formats:
1 = DTMF
2 = SIA3 = Microtech4 = Contact ID5 = Robofon6 = X.25 Protocol 1 (SIA based format compatible with the OA BX X.25 receiver)7 = X.25 Protocol 2 (SIA based format compatible with the Alphatronics RC 4000 receiver)
NOTE: The DTMF, SIA, Microtech and Contact ID formats are identical in structure and programming to
the Telecom Module menu.
NOTE: X.25 Protocol 1 and Protocol 2 are similar in programming structure to the SIA protocol.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12756 – Communications (cont’d)
56.3.02 Secondary
The secondary option is available to support Dual and Alternate dialling to a second destination receiver. If
using alternate mode both the dial type and format must be identical to the values programmed for the primarynumber.
1 = Default Telephone Number
The programming is identical to Telephone Number 1 .
2 = Default Account Number
Refer to Primary format
3 = Dial Type
Refer to Primary Dial Type (except X.25 should be option not available).
4 = Format
Refer to Primary Format. It is possible to assign different formats to both the Primary and Secondary num-
bers, however, when using the alternative signalling option the format must be identical.
5 = Copy Primary (1 to 2)
Copies Primary Program to Secondary Program, for ease of programming.
6 = Alternate
If enabled, signalling is attempted alternately to primary and secondary numbers until successful transmission to
either is achieved. If enabled, the user will be requested to copy the primary programming to the secondaryprogramming to ensure both paths are configured identically.
56.3.03 ISDN Type
Two types of ISDN lines are available on the EURO ISDN network; Point to Multipoint and Point to Point.This option allows selection of the type to be used.
1 = Point to Multipoint (default)
This configuration is used when more than one ISDN system is connected to the ISDN bus. To ensure that the
ISDN module responds to incoming calls from Remote Servicing only a specific MSN (Multiple SubscriberNumber) should be entered. The MSN number should be provided by the Telecom provider.
NOTE: All devices not programmed with an MSN number will also respond to incoming calls.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12856 – Communications (cont’d)
2 = Point to Point
Only one device is allowed on the ISDN bus. In this configuration a TEI number must be programmed. The
default is 0. Since only one device is allowed the ISDN module will act differently when programmed to Pointto Point. The hardware ISDN snatch relay is always activated before the module starts a dialling sequence.After all the alarms are transmitted the relay will be deactivated and the customer PABX, if connected, will beconnected to the ISDN network again. During the dialling sequence it is not possible to use the PABX for anoutside call. Upon an incoming call for the module, the relay will be activated directly switching the PABX offthe ISDN line, after which the ISDN module will seize the line. To ensure correct functionality of the PABXand the ISDN module always connect the PABX to the ISDN out ports. The phone numbers that are avail-able on a Point-to-Point line often only vary in the last 2 digits e.g.123401 ~ 123409. To handle incomingcalls from Remote Servicing one phone number need to programmed into the ISDN module. This specificphone number cannot be used by the PABX because the ISDN module will seize the incoming call directly.
NOTE: X.25 in combination with a Point-to-Point ISDN line is not possible.
56.3.04 ISDN Snatch
In order to ensure maximum security the ISDN Module must be able to make a call in every circumstance.
The ISDN Module offers both hardware and software line seizure options.
1 = Hardware
The hardware snatch is performed using a relay. This relay can switch the other devices off when the ISDN
Module needs to communicate. In order to switch the other devices off it is important that these other devices
are connected to the ISDN out connection of the module. Some ISDN devices are not willing to release a B-
channel even when the network indicates that the B-channel must be released. When this is detected or atamper causes interference on the ISDN bus communication the relay will be activated.
A number of configurations are available for the hardware snatch function.
1 = Always Snatch
A hardware snatch is always attempted irrespective of the software snatch programming.
2 = Never Snatch
A hardware snatch is never attempted.
3 = Snatch if Fail
A hardware snatch is attempted if the software snatch fails or the software snatch is disabled.
2 = Software
The software in the ISDN module monitors every communication on the ISDN bus including those of other
devices. The software snatch enables the possibility to clear a B-channel when both are occupied at that time.When both B-channels are occupied the ISDN module always clears the call that started first.
Certain ISDN devices will not release the B-channel when a software snatch is attempted. In this case, de-
pending on the programming of option 56.3.4.1 = Hardware , a hardware snatch can be attempted to ensure
a channel is made available to the ISDN Module. Software snatch can be enabled or disabled.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-12956 – Communications (cont’d)
56.3.05 Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the Monitoring Station at programmed intervals.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer
test transmissions are offset by the value assigned in the Intervals option.
2 = Intervals
This option determines the period between engineer test transmissions following the Start Time , the program-
mable range is 0 – 99 hours.
NOTES:
1.If the Test Interval is 0 (default) the Autotest is disabled — even if a Start Time has been assigned.
2.To disable Autotest enter 00:00 (default); no transmissions of test signals can be sent at midnight.
3 = Interval Test
This option can either be disabled or enabled to allow an engineer test to be carried out.
4 = Group Condition
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The Group Condition determines the status that each group must satisfy before the Autotest is transmitted.
This can be used to prevent an Autotest from being signalled when groups are set on the system. On selecting
this option press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept
the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set – group must be set to allow autotest transmission;U = Unset – group must be unset to allow autotest transmission;– = Set or unset – autotest transmission is independent of the group status.
56.3.06 Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent to the Monitoring Station once the Account Number and the Telephone
Number 1 have been entered, to ensure that the station is receiving transmissions sent from the ISDN
module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad. Press the ent key to send the engineer
test.
The test attempts to transmit once for each selection of the option. If the test is not successfully transmitted,
the communicator does not attempt to resend. An unsuccessful transmission is not counted as a FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE .
56.03.07 Line Fail
The ISDN module continually monitors the ISDN line that it is connected to. In addition to the DC volts
monitoring of the ISDN line, the ISDN Module can be programmed to use layer 1 check monitoring. Thelayer 1 option will activate the ISDN line every 40 seconds and monitor the activation response from the

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-130ISDN network. This activation will remain for about 20 seconds. When X.25 is used the layer 1 check is not
performed because the ISDN line is already activated continuously.
The ISDN module can be configured to report a line fail when either one or a combination of the volts and
layer 1 checks fail. The options are:
1 = None
No line monitoring
2 = Line Volts
DC volts monitored only
3 = Layer 1
Layer 1 monitored only
4 = Volts and Layer 1
V olts and layer 1 both monitored. Line Fail activated if both fail.
5 = Volts or Layer 1
V olts and Layer 1 both monitored. Line Fail activated if either fail.
56.3.08 Fail to Comm
This option determines the number of unsuccessful communication attempts before the COMM FAIL mes-
sage is recorded in the event log.
When an alarm condition or event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the ISDN module snatches the
telephone line and dials the programmed telephone numbers. This procedure is repeated for the secondtelephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual .
NOTE: The ISDN module communicator snatches and holds the line until a successful attempt has been
made to the required telephone numbers or all the repeat attempts have been tried.
If the communication attempt is unsuccessful, the communicator waits for a short period before redialling the
number (or the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual or Alter-
nate). When the Fail To Communicate option is left at the default setting of 3, if the first three dialling at-
tempts are unsuccessful, the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log and the alarms to be trans-
mitted are erased from the buffer.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-13156 – Communications (cont’d)
56.3.09 Remote Access
This option defines when and how Remote Servicing will operate. The options are described as follows.
1 = Access Time
This option determines the type of access that is available to the Remote Servicing operator. There are four
modes:
1 = Off:
Galaxy Gold access to the Galaxy panel is disabled
2 = All Unset:
Access only when all the groups are unset. If groups are not enabled access is available at any time.
3 = Any Set:
No access if any of the groups are set. The system must be fully unset, whether groups are enabled or not.
4 = Any Time (default):
Access available at any time
2 = Mode
1 = Direct
This permits access to be initiated from Remote Servicing.
2 = Manager Authorize
If this option is selected here are two methods that an authorized user can use to enable access to the Galaxy
via Remote Servicing:
Timed Access:
Remote Servicing must access the Galaxy within 40 minutes of this option being enabled by the manager.
Once connected, there is no time limit on the access period. On terminating the connection, Remote Serv-icing can re-access the system within a 15 minute period of the termination.
Call Back:
The manager instructs the Galaxy to initiate a connection to a PC (with Remote Servicing software loaded)by dialling one of the numbers programmed in the Call Back option.
Refer to option 47 = Remote Access for details of how to initiate the Manager authorized connection.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1323 = Call Back
Up to five telephone numbers can be programmed into this option. Remote Servicing requests the Galaxy
to call back to one of the numbers.
NOTES:
1.If Manager Authorize is selected as the Remote Access Mode , then the ISDN module can only
make outgoing calls – it is disabled from answering all incoming calls.
2.If Call Back is selected, then access to the Galaxy is denied unless the call back option in Remote
Servicing is used to initiate the connection.
56.3.10 Alarm Monitoring
This is identical to the Microtech format communications ( 56.1.3 ). This option is used to allow alarms to be
dialled to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software loaded as well as to an ARC using the Primary and/or Sec-ondary formats.
56.3.11 Backup Module
This option allows another module to become the primary communication module if a line fail is detected onthe ISDN module. There are 6 options:
1 = Off; 2 = Ext Telecoms; 3 = Ext RS232; 4 = Ethernet; 5 = Int Telecom; 6 = Int RS232 1.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-13356 – Communications (cont’d)
4 = Ethernet Module
Figure 6-9. Ethernet Module Programming Structure4 = Ethernet
01= Module
Config1 = IP Address2 = Site Name3 = Gateway IP4 = Network Mask
02 = Alarm Reporting 1 = Format 1 = SIA (0-4) 1 = Trigger 1 = Status2 = Groups
2 = Groups Setting
1 = Account No.
2 = IP Address3 = Port No.
2 = Microtech (Same as SIA format)
2 = Primary IP 1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
3 = Secondary IP 1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
4 = Account No.
5 = Receiver 1 = Single
2 = Dual
6 = Alarm Mon. 1 = Trigger 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Account No.
3 = IP Address4 = Port No.
7 = Heartbeat
1 = Interval
8 = Protocol 0 = UDP
1 = TCP
03 = Remote Access 1 = Access Period 1 = Off2 = All unset3 = Any Set4 = Any Time
2 = Mode
1 = Direct access
2 = Mgr Authorize 1 = Call Back IP1 1 = IP Address2 = Port No.
3 = Call Back IP3
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
4 = Call Back IP4 1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
5 = Call Back IP5 1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.2 = Call Back IP2 1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.04 = Autotest 1 = Start Time2 = Interval
05 = Engineer Test
06 = Fail to Comm
07 = Line Fail 1 = Network 0 = Off1 = Available
2 = Signal Path
1 = Primary
2 = Secondary3 = Alarm Mon.4 = Any5 = All
8 = SIA Control 1 = IP Address
9 = Encrypt 1 = Alarm Report 0 = Off1 = On
2 = Remote Access
0 = Off
1 = On
3 = SIA Control 0 = Off
1 = On
4 = Alarm Mon. 0 = Off
1 = On
10 = Backup module 1 = Off2 = Ext. Tel Mod3 = Ext. RS2324 = ISDN5 = Int. Telecoms6 = Int. RS232 1

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-13456 – Communications (cont’d)
The Ethernet module allows the Galaxy control panel to communicate over Ethernet local and wide area
networks, using both UDP and TCP Ethernet protocols. The Ethernet module supports both alarm signallingand remote servicing. Features included in the Ethernet module communications are data encryption and pathsupervision between the Ethernet module and alarm receiving applications.
56.4.01 Module Config
Each Ethernet module is pre-programmed with a unique MAC address, which identifies the module on thenetwork. However in order for the module to communicate with other applications an IP address should beassigned to the unit. The information programmed in this section is required for other applications on thenetwork to recognise the Ethernet module.
1 = IP Address
This is the IP address of the Ethernet module. This must be a unique, static IP address. The address will be in
the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of threenumbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key.
An example of a valid IP address is 192.0.1.152.This address should be provided by your IT administrator
2 = Site Name
This option is not used at this time
3 = Gateway IP
When using the Ethernet module over a wide area network the IP address of the gateway router connected to
the Ethernet local area network must be entered in this field. The format of this address is identical to the IPaddress of the Ethernet module.
This information should be supplied by the IT administrator
4 = Network Mask
The network mask identifies the class of network being used. This field masks off the parts of the gateway IP
address which, are common and not required for specific identification of the Ethernet module.
This information should be supplied by the IT administrator.
56.4.02 = Alarm Reporting
This option allows selection of the alarm signalling format used to transmit the events. This option also controls
the types of events, which are sent and the destination/identification for each independent group.
1 = Format
This is the signalling format of the receiver and has the following two formats:
1 = SIA (0-4) Security Industries Association
The SIA format can be programmed between levels 0 and 4 and provides a protocol that transmits detailed
information including textual descriptors, to a SIA compatible receiver or PC loaded with suitable receiversoftware.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-13556 – Communications (cont’d)
The SIA format is capable of transmitting the Galaxy events indicated in Appendix D of this manual.
Refer to Appendix C of this manual for the detailed breakdown of the SIA event structure for each level.
On selecting the SIA format, the keypad prompts for the required SIA level to be entered, there are five SIA
levels available:
• Level 0 (default) – basic event information with 4 digit account numbers
• 1 – as level 0 plus 6 digit account numbers• 2 – as level 1 but with event modifiers• 3 – as level 2 but with text descriptors• 4 – as level 3 but also enables the SIA control command feature (refer option 08 SIA control)
1 = Trigger Events
When the SIA level has been selected press the ent key. The keypad displays the first trigger event and it’s
On/Off status (see table 25 for the list of available triggers, and Appendix B for the events which are
controlled by each trigger). The triggers control the events, which are transmitted. If the trigger is set to On,any events logged, which are controlled by the trigger will be transmitted. If the trigger is set to Off, theevents controlled by the trigger will not be transmitted. Step through the trigger events using the A and Bkeys.
1 = Status
To modify the trigger on/off status select the trigger to be modified using the A and B keys and press the
ent key. To program the status to On press 1, to set it to Off press 0. Alternatively use the A/B keys to
toggle between On and Off. To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return
the display to the previous menu level.
Programming the SIA format with groups enabled
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63.1), then the SIA format menu alters slightly tosupport the independent event trigger programming for each group.
1 = Trigger Events
On selecting the SIA level the menu enters the Trigger Events option. Press the ent key to display the firsttrigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the groups assigned.
To modify the trigger event select the required event using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1=Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified press the ent key.
1 = Status
To program the status to On press 1, to set it to Off press 0. Alternatively use the A/B keys to toggle
between On and Off. To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return the
display to the previous menu level.
2 = Groups
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer option 63.1), then the groups can be assigned to eachevent trigger. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. Tomodify the groups assigned to a specific trigger press the ent key from the 2=Groups menu option. Thedisplay will show the groups and indicate whether it is assigned (Y) or not assigned (N) to the group. Toassign or unassign a group from a specific trigger press the number key corresponding to the group

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-136number. The display will show the new status. To accept the new status, press the ent key and return to
the previous menu level. If the Galaxy panel supports more than 8 groups use the A and B keys to
scroll through all available groups.
Groups Setting
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer option 63.1)
Each of the events are signalled to Primary IP/Port Numbers programmed in menu option 56.4.2.2 and the
account number programmed in 56.4.2.4. However, each group can be programmed to transmit eventdetails to a unique IP address and port number, with a unique account number. On selecting the 2=GroupSettings option the first group is displayed. Select the required group to be modified using the A/B keys
and press ent. 1=Account No. is displayed
1 = Account No.
By default the account number programmed in option 56.4.2.4 will be entered in this field. To assign a
unique account number to the group selected use the B key to erase any existing numbers and enter the
new number. The account number should be between four and six digits long. Press the ent key to save
the programming and return to the previous menu level.
To modify the IP address which events from a specific group will be signalled to press the A or 2 keys,
then press ent.
2 = IP Address
By default the IP address programmed in option 56.4.2.2 will be displayed. To programme a new IP
address use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new IP address to which the
events are to be sent. Press ent to save the new address and return to the previous menu level.
To modify the Port No. which events from a specific group will be sent press either the A or 3 keys,
then press ent.
3 = Port No.
By default the Port No. programmed in option 56.4.2.2 will be displayed. To programme a new port
number use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new port number. Press the ent
key to save the new address and return to the previous menu.
2 = Microtech
Microtech format is a protocol that transmits detailed point id information to a PC, which has the GalaxyAlarm Monitoring application installed and running.
The level of information supplied is similar to SIA level 3.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format. Refer 1=SIA for pro-
gramming details.
2 = Primary IP
The Primary IP defines the receiver destination details for the primary alarm transmission path. The destination
is made up of an IP address and a port number. To programme the IP address press ent. If groups are ena-
bled the information programmed for the primary IP and port numbers is automatically copied to all groups.
1 = IP Address
Enter the IP address of the primary receiver. The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dotseparator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-137pressing the * key. To save the address and return to the previous menu level press ent. To programme the
port number of the primary destination receiver press either 2 or A, then press ent.
Note: This number must be programmed, even if groups have been enabled and all groups have a pro-
grammed IP address. This is the IP address used for all system wide events.
2 = Port No.
To erase any previously programmed numbers press the B key. Enter the port number of the primary destina-
tion receiver. The default value is 10002. Press ent to save the programmed number.
3 = Secondary IP
The Ethernet module supports signalling to more than one receiver destination. The Secondary IP defines the
receiver destination details for the secondary alarm transmission path. The destination is made up of an IPaddress and a port number. To programme the IP address press ent.
1 = IP Addresss
Enter the IP address of the secondary receiver. The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The
dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added bypressing the * key. To save the address and return to the previous menu level press ent. To programme the
port number of the secondary destination receiver press either 2 or A, then press ent.
2 = Port No.
To erase any previously programmed numbers press the B key. Enter the port number of the secondary
destination receiver. The default value is 10002. Press ent to save the programmed number.
4 = Account No.
The account number identifies the Galaxy system to the receiver when signals are transmitted. Every signal
transmitted contains the account number. The account number should be between 4 and 6 digits long. Afterentering the account number press ent to save and return to the previous menu level.
If groups are enabled the account number entered in this field is automatically copied to all groups.
5 = Receiver
This option determines the paths, which will be used for alarm signalling.
1 = Single
If selected the Primary IP destination and/or specific group IP programming is used to signal alarms. If 1=Sin-
gle is selected and a Secondary IP is programmed the Secondary IP destination will be used in the event of afailure to the Primary IP. A Fail to Comm will be logged against the Primary alarm transmission path.
2 = Dual
If selected and if a secondary IP is programmed events are sent to both the primary and secondary IP destina-tions.
6 = Alarm Monitoring
This option provides a further alarm transmission path specifically for events being sent to the Galaxy Alarm
Monitoring application.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-138The keypad displays the first trigger event and it’s On/Off status (see table 25 for the list of available triggers,
and Appendix B for the events which are controlled by each trigger). The triggers control the events, which
are transmitted. If the trigger is set to On, any events logged, which are controlled by the trigger will be trans-
mitted. If the trigger is set to Off, the events controlled by the trigger will not be transmitted. Step through the
trigger events using the A and B keys.
1 = Trigger
Press the ent key to display the first trigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the
groups assigned.
To modify the trigger event select the required event using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1=Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified press the ent key.
1 = Status
To program the status to On press 1, to set it to Off press 0. Alternatively use the A/B keys to toggle
between On and Off. To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return the display
to the previous menu level.
2 = Groups
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer option 63.1), then the groups can be assigned to eachevent trigger. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. Tomodify the groups assigned to a specific trigger press the ent key from the 2=Groups menu option. Thedisplay will show the groups and indicate whether it is assigned (Y) or not assigned (N) to the group. Toassign or unassign a group from a specific trigger press the number key corresponding to the groupnumber. The display will show the new status. To accept the new status, press the ent key and return to theprevious menu level. If the Galaxy panel supports more than 8 groups use the A and B keys to scroll
through all available groups.
2 = Account No.
This option is required to assign a unique account number to the events signalled to Alarm Monitoring. Thisdata must be entered before any events are sent to Alarm Monitoring via this option. The account number canbe a maximum of 6 digits. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
3 = IP Address
To programme a new or modify the Alarm Monitoring IP address use the B key to erase any existing pro-
gramming and enter the new IP address to which the events are to be sent. Press ent to save the new address
and return to the previous menu level.
4 = Port No.
To programme a new port number use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new port
number. Press the ent key to save the new address and return to the previous menu.
7 = Heartbeat
The Ethernet module supports path supervision to ensure the alarm transmission paths are available to transmit
event when required. This option, if programmed determines the frequency, which the alarm transmission pathsare checked.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1391 = Interval
Enter the interval within which a path supervision signal (heartbeat) must be received from each alarm trans-
mission path (refer option 56.4.7.2 Line Fail – Signalling Path). If a heartbeat is not received within the pro-grammed interval a line fail condition will be activated in the panel. The Line Fail event will indicate which pathhas failed (Primary, Secondary or Alarm Monitoring).
The default period is 30 minutes.
8 = Protocol
The Ethernet module is capable if signalling using either TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) or UDP (Uni-
versal Datagram Protocol). Earlier versions of Ethernet module, Alarm Monitoring and Remote Servicing onlysupported the TCP protocol.
NOTE: If communicating with V3.26 Alarm Monitoring or V6.26 Remote Servicing the TCP option should
be selected.
If encryption is required for alarm signalling the UDP protocol should be selected.
Irrespective of the programming in this option Remote Servicing and SIA control command protocol will
always use the TCP protocol.
0 = UDP
When this option is selected all alarm signalling from the Ethernet module will use the UDP format.
1 = TCP
When this option is selected all alarm signalling from the Ethernet module will use the TCP format.
56.4.03 = Remote Access
The Ethernet module supports remote servicing of the Galaxy alarm panel. The programming options in thissection control when remote access can be granted and whether access is initiated from the panel or theRemote Servicing PC.
1 = Access Period
This option determines when the Galaxy panel can be accessed remotely.
1 = Off
Remote Servicing access to the Galaxy panel is disabled.
2 = All Unset
Remote Servicing access is only granted when all groups or the complete system are unset.
3 = Any Set
Remote Servicing access will only be granted if any of the groups or the complete system are set.
4 = Any Time (default)
Access available at any time.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1402 = Mode
This option controls access authorization and whether the remote session is initiated from (Panel or PC).
1 = Direct Access
This permits access at any time (in conjunction with Access period). Access is initiated from Remote Servic-
ing. Once access is authorized/initiated, uploading, downloading and remote servicing can begin.
2 = Manager Authorize
This option requires authorization from the site manager in order to gain remote access to the Galaxy panel.
There are two methods that the manager can use to enable access to the Galaxy via Remote servicing.Timed Access – Remote Servicing must access the Galaxy panel within 40 minutes of this option being ena-
bled by the manager (Option 47.1.2.0). Once connected there is no time limit on the access period. Onterminating the connection, Remote Servicing can reaccess the system within a 15 minute period of the termi-nation.
Call Back – the manager instructs the Galaxy panel to initiate a connection to the Remote Servicing PC (Use
option 47.1.2.1) by selecting one of the Call back IP addresses programmed into the system
1 = Call Back IP 1-5
There are 5 possible IP address/Port number destinations, which can be programmed for Remote Servic-ing access. This allows communication with up to five different Remote Servicing locations.
1 = IP Address
Enter the IP address of the PC running the Remote Servicing application
2 = Port No.
Enter the Port Number allocated to Remote Servicing on the PC (Default is 10001)
56.4.04 = Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the receiving station at programmed intervals.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer
test transmissions are sent periodically. The frequency of each test is controlled by the 2=Interval option.
2 = Interval
This option determines the period between automatic engineer test transmissions following the Start Time. The
programmable range is 0-99 hours.
56.4.05 = Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent on each of the transmission paths once the appropriate IP address/port no, andaccount numbers have been programmed into the system. This allows the installation engineer to ensure that56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-141the receiving station is correctly receiving the events from the Ethernet module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad, WARNING!!! ENT=SEND MES-
SAGE . Press the ent key to send the engineer test.
56.4.06 = Fail to Comm
This option determines the number of unsuccessful communication attempts before the COMM FAIL mes-
sage is recorded in the event log.
When an event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the Ethernet module attempts to initiate a session
with the destination receiver for each programmed transmission path. If the programmed number of attempts isreached a Fail to Comm message will be logged. The logged event will include which path has failed.
Note: if the receiver option is programmed as Dual then a successful transmission must be made to both
primary and secondary to be considered a successful transmission.
56.4.07 = Line Fail
The line fail option controls which Ethernet connections are monitored. The Ethernet module can be pro-grammed to monitor both the network availability and the programmed transmission paths between theEthernet module and receiver applications.
Line fail events (whether network or transmission path) must be present for the time programmed in parameter
51.68 before the event is activated. If a line fail is present and an attempt is made to set the system withinparameter 51.68 delay period, the line fail will immediately be logged and indicated.
1 = Network
This option monitors the connection between the Ethernet module and the local network.
0 = Off
If programmed to off, the connection between the Ethernet module and local network will not be monitored. If
the local network is not available or the Ethernet module is disconnected, no line fail will be indicated.
1 = Available
If programmed as available then the connection between the Ethernet module and the local Ethernet networkis monitored. If the Ethernet module is disconnected from the network or the local network is not available aLine Fail event will be activated at the panel. The Line Fail event logged will indicate that the Line Fail was asa result of a network failure.
2 = Signal Path
This option determines which signalling paths, will be monitored by the Ethernet module. Monitoring is
achieved by transmission of a path supervision signal (heartbeat) between the receiver application and theEthernet module. The Ethernet module must receive a path supervision signal at least as often as the frequencyprogrammed in option 56.4.2.7 (Alarm Reporting Heartbeat). If the signal is not received a line fail conditionwill become present. The line fail event will indicate the path which failed and the destination IP address of thatpath.
NOTE: If groups are enabled a failure on the primary path will not provide specific IP information.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-142Options are available to select specific paths or all paths.
1 = Primary
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the primary transmission path. All other transmission
paths will not be monitored.
2 = Secondary
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the secondary transmission path. All other transmissionpaths will not be monitored.
3 = Alarm Mon.
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the Alarm Mon. transmission path. All other transmissionpaths will not be monitored.
4 = Any
When selected the Ethernet module monitors all transmission paths. If a supervision failure is detected in anyof the paths a line fail condition will be activated.
5 = All
When selected the Ethernet module monitors all transmission paths. If a supervision failure is detected in all ofthe paths a line fail condition will be activated.
56.4.08 = SIA Control
When using the SIA control command protocol for integration purposes the IP address of the computersending the SIA control commands should be entered in this field to ensure that only commands from a com-puter with the programmed IP address will be recognised by the Ethernet module.
1 = IP Address
The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after
each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key.
56.4.09 = Encrypt
The Ethernet module supports a high level 128bit encryption algorithm for all communication options. This
option allows encryption to be enabled/disabled for each of the communication options.
1 = Alarm Report
This option controls encryption for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths.
1 = On56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-143If selected encryption is enabled for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths. In order for data to
be received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
2 = Remote Access
This option controls encryption for the Remote Servicing sessions. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Remote Servicing sessions.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for the Remote Servicing sessions. In order for data to be received when this
option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
3 = SIA Control
0 = Off
This option controls encryption for communications between the Ethernet module and remote PC using the
SIA control command protocol. Default is disabled.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for communications between the Ethernet module and remote PC using theSIA control command protocol. In order for data to be received when this option is selected the receiver mustsupport decryption.
4 = Alarm Mon.
This option controls encryption for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths. In order for data to be
received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
56.4.10 Backup Module
This option allows another module to become the primary communication module if a line fail is detected onthe Ethernet module. There are 6 options:
1 = Off; 2 = Ext Telecoms; 3 = Ext RS232; 4 = ISDN; 5 = Int Telecoms; 6 = Int RS232 1.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1445 = Ext Telecoms
The external telecom module has the same menu structure and function as the internal telecoms with the
following exceptions:
11 Fail to Comm
This is controlled by the number of attempts and not time.
15 Backup Module
This option allows another module to become the primary communication module if a line fail is detected on
the external telecoms module. There are 6 options:
1 = Off; 2 = Ext RS232; 3 = ISDN; 4 = Ethernet; 5 = Int Telecoms; 6 = Int RS232 1.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1456 = Int RS232 Port56 – Communications (cont’d)
Figure 6-10. Internal RS232 Programming structure
The Galaxy Dimension supports an on-board RS232 serial port. This ports is:
• Programmable independently from the panel.• Speed configurable from 300 to 56K bps (or highest practical speed).
• Able to configure data length, parity and stop bits.
• Supervised (optional via programming).The RS232 port is configurable to support:• Connection to a PC.• Connection to a serial modem.• Connection to 3
rd party communication modules.
• Connection to serial printers.
• Connection to serial wireless transmitters.6 = Int RS232 Port
1 = Mode1 = Printer
2 = Direct3 = Modem 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Dial Type 1 = Tone
2 = Pulse
2 = Format 1 = SIA 0 (0-3) 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
2 = Microtech 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
3 = Account No. 6 digit Max.
4 = Comms Setup3 = Init String
1 = Baud Rate
2 = Data Bits3 = Stop Bits4 = Parity
1 = No Parity2 = Odd Parity3 = Even Parity4 = Storage Mode

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-14656.6.1 Mode
The Mode option allows selection of the method of connection to the PC:
1 = Printer
This option is selected if the Galaxy is communicating with a serial printer.
2 = Direct
This mode is selected if the Galaxy panel and PC are located in close proximity to one another and can inter-
face via an RS232 cable.
3 = Modem
This mode is selected if the RS232 is communicating, via a modem and telephone line, with a remote PC.
1 = Telephone No.
The telephone number of the remote PC must be entered here.
2 = Dial Type
The type of telephone exchange ( Pulse or Tone ) must be assigned here.
3 = Init String
The initialisation string is an alpha-numeric string which is used to initialise the modem connected to the internal
RS232 port.
4 = Storage Mode
This mode allows the panel to emulate the behaviour of an external RS232 module which can then be attached
to another Galaxy panel to copy programming data. Refer to Appendix E for a full description of this function.
56.6.2 Format
This option allows selection of the alarm signalling format. There are two formats available for the RS232module:
1 = SIA
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.2) for programming details.
2 = Microtech
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.3) for programming details.
NOTE: The SIA and Microtech formats for the RS232 module are identical in structure and programming to
the Telecom menu.56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-14756.6.3 Account No.
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
56.6.4 Comms Setup
Serial communication between the on-board R232 port and a remote PC require the following 4 elements.
1 = Baud Rate
This is the number of bits that occur each second (bps). This can be set as follows:
1=300; 2=600; 3=1200; 4=2400; 5=4800; 6=9600 (default); 7=19200; 8=38400; 9=57600 .
2 = Data bits
This can be sets follows:
1=5; 2=6; 3=7; 4=8 (default)
3 = Stop Bits
This can be set as follows:
1=1 (default); 2=2.
4 = Parity
This can be set with one of three options:
1 = No Parity (default)
2 = Odd Parity
3 = Even Parity56 – Communications (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-14856 – Communications (cont’d)
7 = Audio
This section controls the configuration of Audio Transmission in order to allow audio verification of an alarm.
Each system group can be assigned one audio channel, each with a maximum of three microphones. followingan alarm transmission over PSTN, the panel can be programmed to route recorded audio from the time of thealarm activation, and live audio, direct to the Alarm Receiving Centre. The following menu options areavailable:
Figure 6-11. Audio Programming structure
56.7.1 Listen-In
This option allows audio verification on site over PSTN for an operator, after the panel sends an alarm signal
to the ARC. The type of alarm and the groups which will activate the listen-in function are programmed here.
NOTE: If the engineer wants to program the audio Listen-in to occur on 1 = Intruder , then the
2 = Confirm option must be set to NO (disabled). If the engineer wants to program the audio
Listen-in to occur on 2 = Confirm , then the 1 = Intruder option must be set to NO (disabled).
1 = Intruder
When set to Y (Yes) for a particular group, this option enables listen-in after the panel sends an intruder alarm
signal or entry timeout transmission to the ARC. The function is inactive when the system is unset.
NOTE: Group mode (63.1.1) must be enabled to allow the group to function.
2 = Confirm
When set to Y (Yes) for a particular group, this option enables listen-in after a confirm transmission.7 = Audio
1 = Listen In 1 = Intruder
STATUS A12345678
Groups YYNNYYNY
3 = PA's
4 = OthersToggle number
to select groupY = YESN = NO0 = NO1 = YES
2 = Confirm
STATUS A12345678
Groups YYNNYYNY 0 = NO1 = YES
0 = NO1 = YES
STATUS A12345678
Groups YYNNYYNY
STATUS A12345678
Groups YYNNYYNY
2 = AlarmMonitoring
3 = Dial In
4 = Audio Module 1 = Path (PSTN)0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2 = Audio Channels
5 = Pre-alarm Pre Listen Time
00 (0 -10) secs0 = NO1 = YESNote: Group mode (option 63.1.1) must be
enabled to allow groups to function
Channel No 0 = Disabled1 = EnabledNot Used
Not Used

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-14956 – Communications (cont’d)
3 = PA’s
When set to Y (Yes) for a particular group, this option enables listen-in after a PA audible or PA Silent trans-
mission.
4 = Others
When set to Y (Yes) for a particular group, this option enables listen-in after a Fire transmission.
56.7.2 Alarm Monitoring
Not Used
56.7.3 Dial In
Not Used
56.7.4 Audio Module
This option enables the Audio Interface Module and configures the audio channels that will be used to record
sound in the event of an alarm.
1 = Path (PSTN)
This option selects PSTN as the communication line between the panel and ARC when set to 1 = Enabled.
2 = Audio Channels
This option controls the audio channels and enables group attachment to a particular channel.
This option selects the channel through which communication to the ARC will function for each group. The
channel is in a four-digit format. For example: Channel 9024.
9 = Line number (fixed)0 = Audio Interface number (fixed)2 = Mux Module number4 = Audio channel.Pressing ent gives the status of the current audio channel, for example:
Pressing ent again disables the audio channel and the group association disappears:
The A and B keys scrolls through the available channels.ENABLED 9024A1ENABLED 9024A1ENABLED 9024A1ENABLED 9024A1ENABLED 9024A1
0=DISABLED0=DISABLED0=DISABLED0=DISABLED0=DISABLED
Channel 9024Channel 9024Channel 9024Channel 9024Channel 9024
[ent]to select[ent]to select[ent]to select[ent]to select[ent]to selectGroup number

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-15056 – Communications (cont’d)
56.7.5 Pre Alarm
This option sets the alarm delay recording time. The audio channel will continuously record a rolling 10 sec-
onds of audio. Upon an alarm activation, the system will stop recording and store 10 seconds of audio. Theamount of alarm delay in the recorded audio can be so configured using the pre-listen time parameter.
Pre Listen Time
The alarm delay listen time can be set from 00-10 seconds. Setting the time to 5 seconds (default) means that
there is 5 seconds of pre-alarm and 5 seconds of post alarm audio saved.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-151Option 57 – System Print
The System Print option allows the details of the system programming to be printed. There are 2 options for
the printer output:
1 = Printer Module
2 = Int RS232 1
From either option, the specific details of one or all of the menu options in the following table can be selected:57 – System Print
noitpOuneM. oNuneM
10a taDmetsyS3 2
20s edoC2 4
30s retemaraP1 5
40s enoZ2 5
50s tuptuO3 5
60s kniL4 5
70n oitacinummoC6 5
80N DSI3 .65
90s puorG3 6
01s dapyeK8 5
11s remiT5 6
21g oLtnevE2 2
31) 11-1smeti(llA
Selecting a Print Option
The required print option is selected by entering the option number 01 – 12 or by using the A and B keys and
then pressing ent. When printing option 11 = EVENT LOG , the system prompts for Groups to be selected;
the print shows only those events logged for the groups selected. The print can be aborted at any time bypressing the esc key.
NOTE: A serial printer on line must be connected to communication line 1 of the Galaxy before the print
option is selected. If the printer is off-line or is not connected, the PRINTER off-line / ESC to
abort message is displayed. Press the ESC key and correct the problem.
Printing Timers
Printing 10 = Timers gives details of all the times that have been assigned in option 65 = TIMERS ; this
includes the autoset time, the pre-warning period and lockout times.Table 6-25. System Print Options

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-152Option 58 – Keypad
The keypads connected to the Galaxy control panel can be assigned individual attributes allowing each
keypad to respond in a particular way.
On selecting the Keypad option the details of the first keypad connected to the system are displayed.
The required keypad is selected by entering the keypad address or by using the A and B keys and then
pressing ent; the keypad displays 1=A-key . Press the A and B keys to select the required option and press
the ent key.
NOTE: When the address of the keypad currently being used is displayed, a black square flashes on and off
over the first digit of the keypad address.
1 = A-key
Code Status
This option assigns a menu function to the A key. On selecting the option the keypad displays 1 = Code
Status , this determines the method of operation of the A key:
0 = OFF [ ] – A key disabled
1 = WITH CODE [+] – A key requires code to be entered prior to operation
2 = NO CODE [–]— A key is a single touch operation no code is required
Select the required Code Status and press the ent key.
NOTE: The Code Status assigned to the key is displayed when selecting the keypad address, for example
A[12]– indicates that the A key does not require a user code.
Menu Option
To assign one of the menu options to the A key, press the A key to move to the 2 = Menu option and press
the ent key. The keypad displays the currently assigned menu option.
To assign a new menu function, enter the full menu option number 11 – 71 or press the A and B keys until the
required menu option is displayed; press the ent key to accept the selection and return to the previous menu
level.58 – Keypad
Keypad Address
Flashing cursor if
keypad viewed isthis keypadOption 1 Option 2
Option 3 Option 410 A[12]+ B[13]-10 A[12]+ B[13]-10 A[12]+ B[13]-10 A[12]+ B[13]-10 A[12]+ B[13]-
Mimic=1 Light=1Mimic=1 Light=1Mimic=1 Light=1Mimic=1 Light=1Mimic=1 Light=1
10 A-key Option10 A-key Option10 A-key Option10 A-key Option10 A-key Option
12=Timed Set12=Timed Set12=Timed Set12=Timed Set12=Timed Set

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1532 = B-key
The programming of the B key is identical to that of the A key.
3 = Buzzer Mimic
This option determines whether the keypad buzzer mimics the function of the programmed keypad output
(refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUTS ). The default function of the keypad output is Entry/Exit
Horn and the default Mimic defaults to On, therefore the keypad buzzer operates as an Entry/Exit Horn at
factory setting.
To disable the keypad buzzer from mimicking the output select 0 = Off .
4 = Backlighting
This option determines when the keypad backlighting switches on and off.
0 = always off,
1 = always on (default),
2 = on when the system is unset;
off when the system is set;switches on when the keys are pressed,
3 = on during setting and unsetting;
switches on when keys are pressed;switches off after keypad timeout and when menu is exited,
4 = switches on when keys are pressed;
switches off after keypad timeout and when menu is exited.
5 = Keypad Mute
This option allows the bleep which normally accompanies a valid keypress to be disabled. This features
improves security and reduces tampering with the keypad when it is located in a public place.
When the Mute option is set to 1 = On , whenever the keypad banner is displayed the keypresses are silent,
there are no 7s displayed as each key is pressed and the keypad backlighting remains off. As soon as a valid
code is entered the keypad returns to normal operation – the keys are accompanied by bleeps and thebacklighting switched on. The Mute option defaults to disabled ( 0 = Off ).
Keypad Disable
A keypad may be disabled by programming the address of the keypad as a link destination (refer to menu
option 54 – Links ). When the source of the link is activated the keypad does not respond to any keypress,
however, the LCD, keypad buzzer and any keypad output device acts as normal.58 – Keypad (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1546 = Show Status
This option allows the keypad to display the set status of the groups. When Show Status is enabled, pressing
the 7 and # keys simultaneously when the normal banner is displayed indicates the group set status.
NOTE: The Show Status indicates the set conditions of groups when the system is set (keypad blank) or
unset (normal banner). Show Status does not operate while engineer mode is accessed.
Pressing the 7 and # keys again toggles the display to show the status of the groups individually. To move
between each groups, press the 7 and A or the 7 and B keys simultaneously.
Pressing the 7 and # keys again returns the keypad to the banner display.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D. Press the A or B key to display each of the group blocks.
7 = Keypad Groups
Each keypad can be assigned to selected groups; the keypad then responds only to user codes that have a
group common to it and only displays alarm information on the groups assigned.
Entering a user code which is assigned to all groups, on a keypad which is only assigned to a single group,
allows access to all of the user’s groups. The user is not restricted by the groups that are assigned to thekeypad as long as there is one group common to both. This means that a keypad assigned only to group 1, forexample, can be used to set groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 by a code with all of these groups allocated.
Keypad Group Restriction
To restrict access only to groups that are common to both the user and the keypad, press the 7 key when
assigning groups to the keypad. This means that when a user with access to groups 1, 2 and 3 sets the systemon a keypad assigned to groups 2, 3 and 4, only the common groups (groups 2 and 3) are set.
Assigning Keypad Groups
On selecting the Keypad Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the keypad are displayed (the default
is all groups assigned). Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the keypad.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-divided
into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the
relevant groups in each block to the user.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and
return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Also see menu 53, to control the buzzer operation on each keypad. This is independent of the
keypad group parameter.58 – Keypad (cont’d)
F = Fault
R = Ready
S = Set
P = Part Set
L = Locked Out
– = Group not assigned to KeypadGroup blockSTATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678STATUS 12345678
Groups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFPGroups RRSRLPFP

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-15559 – Quick Menu
Option 59 – Quick Menu
The Galaxy quick menu consists of up to 10 menu options that are accessed by all type 2.3 (and above) user
codes that do not have a 7 assigned to their code type. This option allows the quick menu to be repro-
grammed to any selection of the menu options. The Quick Menu defaults to a factory selection as shown in
the following table:
Table 6-26. Quick Menu Options
Modifying the Quick Menu
On selecting the Quick Menu option, the details of the first option assigned to the quick menu are displayed;
this includes the quick menu location, the menu option assigned, the full menu option number and the currentuser type assigned to the option.
Select the quick menu number to be modified by entering the option number 0 – 9 or by using the A and B
keys and then pressing ent. The display indicates the quick menu location and the full menu option number
currently assigned.
To modify the quick menu, enter the full menu option number 11 – 71 or press the A and B keys until the
required menu option is displayed; press the ent key to accept the selection and return to the previous menu
type. To delete a quick menu option, press the 7 key instead of a menu option number; 77=NOT USED is
displayed.
The system arranges the quick menu in order of lowest user type access required, therefore if quick menu
number 0 is assigned a menu option which is of a higher access type than options 2, 3 and 4, the menu is
rearranged and the display indicates that the option is now number 4.
NOTE: Assigning duplicate quick menu options is denied. The message DUPLICATE ENTRY is displayed
and the system prompts for a new option to be assigned.Menu Options Quick Menu location
Full Menu option numberUser level 0=OMIT ZONES0=OMIT ZONES0=OMIT ZONES0=OMIT ZONES0=OMIT ZONES
Option=[11] L=3Option=[11] L=3Option=[11] L=3Option=[11] L=3Option=[11] L=3Menu OptionUser
Type
0O m i t Z o n e s 1 1 2 . 3
1F o r c e d S e t 1 4 2 . 3
2 Chime 15 2.33 Display Zones 21 2.4
4 Display Log 22 2.4
5 Print 24 2.46 Walk T est 31 2.57 Time/Date 41 3.6
8 Codes 42 2.1
9S u m m e r 4 3 3 . 6

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-15661 – Diagnostics
Engineer 2
Option 61 – Diagnostics
This option allows several diagnostic tests to be run on the system, providing valuable information on the
operational status of the Galaxy and connected modules.
The Galaxy diagnostic option performs a number of checks including:
the communication integrity between the Galaxy panel and modules on the system.
• voltage measurements.• current measurements.• resistance measurements• module version checks• panel memory checks
• fuse checks
This option is split into two sections: Latest and Historical .
Latest gives real time diagnostic information for the Galaxy system.
Historical allows a snapshot of the Galaxy system diagnostic status to be generated and saved.
1 Latest
The Diagnostic options are:
1. MEMORY TEST – This option forces a check of the panel memory.
2. KEYPAD COMMS – the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the keypads.
3. RIO COMMS – the voltage and version at each RIO as well as the communication level between the
Galaxy panel and the RIO.
4. PSU COMMS – the voltage at each Galaxy Dimension Power Supply Unit and the communication level
between the Galaxy panel and the SPSUs. It is identical to the RIO COMMS diagnostic with the
exception that it also indicates the current output from the SPSU, fuse status and battery status.
A number to the right of the current indicates a blown fuse:2 = Battery fuse (F1)3 = +12V Auxilliary 1 fuse (F4)4 = +12V Auxilliary 2 fuse (F3).5 = Not Used6 = On-board Bell Fuse (F2)A 7 indication means low battery or a missing battery.
95% 72 13.6V 1.9A .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-157Pressing the # key gives 7 different displays in the following order:
1. The system status in volts and current draw are displayed.2. The battery standby time and the battery charge time are displayed. The standby time is the estimated
time that the battery can power the panel or smart PSU if the AC power should fail. It is based on theactual current draw and the battery size (parameter 51.36). An exclamation mark is displayed afterstandby time if the battery cannot support the panel or smart PSU for the time specified in param-
eter 51.37 = Standby Time .
3. The status of the AC power and battery are displayed. Also, if available, the lowest voltage during the
last battery load test.
4. This displays the battery charging voltage and current information. The panel and Galaxy Dimension
PSU will also display the current charging state after Battery . This is either Charging or Charged .
5. This displays the battery load test. It is only available for the on-board PSU.
Pressing the ent key again initiates a system wide battery load test. This test is only available for RIO
100 and 101.
6. This displays the AUX1 volts and current draw.7. This displays the AUX2 volts and current draw.
NOTE: The current reading for the auxilliary supply is the total current of AUX1 and AUX2. The
current display on the keypad for AUX1 or AUX2 is the combined reading of both.
5. MAX COMMS – the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the MAX/DCM readers.
6.COMM MODULES – the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the Int Telecoms , the
Int RS232, the Audio Module and Mux Modules .
To access the MUX module diagnostics press the asterisk key when the keypad display shows the diagnostics
for the audio interface. Then use the arrow key to scroll between each MUX module. To exit the menu, toreturn to the other comms modules diagnostics, press the escape key once.
7. ZONES – the status of each zone can be viewed.
8. DCM ZONES – the status of each DCM zone can be viewed.61 – Diagnostics (cont’d)
Standby Time 8hStandby Time 8hStandby Time 8hStandby Time 8hStandby Time 8h
Charge Time 4hCharge Time 4hCharge Time 4hCharge Time 4hCharge Time 4h
Audio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio Module
100% CM08100% CM08100% CM08100% CM08100% CM08 V1.0V1.0V1.0V1.0V1.0Audio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio ModuleAudio Module
100% CM08 13.72V100% CM08 13.72V100% CM08 13.72V100% CM08 13.72V100% CM08 13.72VPress #

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-15861 – Diagnostics (cont’d)
3 = Record
This option initiates a baseline check of areas 1 to 7 in the table above. The dispay prompts the user to press
the * key to continue with the diagnostic check.
4 = Checks
This option allows each of the areas 1 to 9 listed in the table above to be included or excluded from the
baseline recording. All areas are included by default.
5 = Print
This option allows the stored baseline data to be printed using either the printer module or the on-board
RS232 port.Table 6-27. Historical TimelineAERAD EREHTAGATAD
eziSttaB=1h AniezisyrettaB
FRttaB=2 swohS.secivedFRllafosutatsyrettabehT
.kotonfiWOL
stloVUSP=3e htnos'USPtramSllafolevelegatlovehT
s'USPdraob-nognidulcnimetsys
stloVOIR=4e htnos'USPtramSllafolevelegatlovehT
sOIRdraob-noehtgnidulcnimetsys
smhOenoZ=5n osenozllassorcaecnatsisertnerrucehT
htgnertslangis-senozFRroF.metsyseht
noisivrepusecnisemitdna
noitacinummoC=6 htiwlevel%ehtdna,sserdda,ecivedfoepyT
metsysehtnoslarehpireplla
yromemlenaP=7y romemlenapehtfokcehcA
spmalatoT=8 nos'USPtramSllarofwardtnerruclatoteht
.USPdraob-noehtgnidulcni,metsyseht
tnerrucyrettabdnatnerrucxuadedulcnisihT
stloVttaB=9 ehtotdetcennocyrettabehtfolevelegatloV
lenaplortnoc2 = Timeline
This option shows the time and date when the last check was carried out for each of the areas listed in the
following table:2 Historical
This option allows a full diagnostic baseline to be performed on the complete Galaxy system, including powersupplies and peripherals. There are 5 selectable options:
1 = View
This option allows any stored baseline data to be viewed from option 61.2.3 = Record .
1. MEMORY TEST – As latest.
2. KEYPAD COMMS – Snapshot value from last test.
3. RIO COMMS – Snapshot value from last test.
4. PSU COMMS – Snapshot value from last test.
5. MAX COMMS – Snapshot value from last test.
6. COMM MODULES – Snapshot value from last test.
7. ZONES – Snapshot value from last test. The * key allows printing of results.
8. DCM ZONES – snapshot value from last test.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-159Option 62 – Full Test
The Full Test option allows two zones to be selected and tested under full set conditions. Activating the
selected zone results in a full alarm condition, including remote signalling. Constantly active zones ( Security,
24 Hours , PA, Fire) remain active throughout the Full Test ; an activation generates the appropriate local or
full alarm depending on the zone.
On selecting the Full Test option, the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move
to the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. Press the ent key. An
option is then given to choose a second confirm zone. If you press the A (YES) key, select a second required
zone by pressing the ent key. If you press the B (NO) key, the system begins the full setting procedure.
Activating the zone results in a full alarm condition. To end the full test unset the system.62 – Full Test

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-160Option 63 – Options
The Options function allows the Galaxy to be divided into group subsystems.63 – Options
Figure 6-12. OptionsOptions
1 = Groups 1 = Group Mode 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2 = Setting LogicA/B to move to group and ent to select.
Number keys to toggle:- = status of group unimportant
S = Group must be set to allow group to set.
3 = Group Name
A/B to move to group and ent to select.
# = toggle upper case, lower case or library text.* = delete last character.A/B = move to character/word.ent = assign character/word.esc = save programming.
63.1=Groups
On selecting Options , the keypad displays 1 = Groups ; press the ent key to select this function.
1 = Group Mode
This option is used to enable the Groups function (default is 0 = Disabled ). When enabled, the system
options that are eligible for group programming are then made available throughout the menu, otherwise theydo not appear.
Enabling Groups
On selecting 1 = Enabled , press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu
type.
NOTE: You must return to the Engineer Mode banner for groups to be fully enabled.
Disabling Groups
The Group Disabled feature operates as follows:-
When disable groups is selected in menu option 63.1.1 two option are given:-
1. Reset Groups
2. DisabledIf option 1 – Reset Groups is selected the engineer is prompted to confirm the selection. If confirmed, by
pressing the enter key, all group programming, for all the panel features, are reset to A1. When engineeringmode is exited a warning message is displayed (ATT!!! GRPS OFF, SYS. OP. IMPACT) alerting the
engineer that groups have been reset and there will be an impact on the operation of all functions not pro-grammed as group A1. This warning message will be displayed until the ESC key is pressed by the engineer,acknowledging the warning.
NOTE: When group programming is re-enabled all previous group programming will not be restored.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1612 = Setting Logic
The Setting Logic option restricts a group from setting by determining which other groups must be set before
it can set. For example, group 1 may be prohibited for setting unless groups 3, 7 are already set. The Set-
ting Logic is individually defined for each group.
Programming Setting Logic
On selecting the Setting Logic option, group 1 is displayed. Use the A or B keys to move to the required
group or directly select it by pressing the required group number; press the ent key to access the group. On
selecting the group, the current Setting Logic details are displayed:
• S below a group means that it must be set to allow the selected group to set
• a dash ( –) below the group indicates that the set status of this group is not important.
Toggle the status between S and – by pressing the number key. When the required setting logic pattern has
been defined press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu type.
Multi-group Systems
The larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-
divided into A, B, C and D:
Table 6-28. Groups
Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to toggle the Setting Logic for the
relevant groups in each block.kcolBpuorGs puorGlacisyhP
8-1A8 -1
8-1B6 1-9
8-1C4 2-71
8-1D2 3-5263 – Options (cont’d)
If option 2 – Disabled is selected the engineer is prompted to confirm the selection. If confirmed, by pressing
the enter key, all group programming, other than A1 will be disabled (zones, outputs, links, users). Whenengineering mode is exited a warning message is displayed (ATT!!! GRPS OFF, SYS. OP. IMPACT)
alerting the engineer that groups have been disabled and there will be an impact on the operation of all areasnot programmed as group A1. This warning message is displayed until the ESC key is pressed by the engi-neer, acknowledging the warning.
NOTE: If this option is selected, when group mode is re-enabled all previous group programming will be
restored. However, while group mode is disabled, a zone not programmed to group A1 will notoperate normally on the system. It is
strongly recommended that, whenever possible, groups are
always reset to A1 when disabling groups.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-162This message does not appear if at least one group sets.63 – Options (cont’d)
2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set2 Groups not set
[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to view[<],[>] to viewSetting Logic Operation
If Setting Logic has been assigned to a group, the set status of the groups must satisfy the conditions defined
in the option to permit the group to set. If the Setting Logic conditions are not satisfied, then the group
cannot set. If multiple groups are being set simultaneously, but one group is restricted due to the programmedSetting Logic , the remainder of the groups set. The restricted group does not set; there is no warning or
indication given.
If the programmed Setting Logic results in none of the selected groups being allowed to set, a warning
message is displayed on the keypad.
3 = Group Name
This option is used to assign a name of up to 12 characters to each of the groups. This name is assembled
from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Group Name option, the name currently
assigned to group 1 is displayed. All group names default to Group X (where X is the group number). Use
the A or B keys to move to the required group or directly select it by pressing the required group number;
press the ent key to access the group. On selecting the group, the following details are displayed:
The currently assigned name is displayed on the top line – an underscore shows where the next character will
be positioned, and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line – the cursor flashes on the letter L.
Press the 7 key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned
underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the char-
acter to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Group Name .
Text Case & Library
On entering the Group Name option the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing
the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number – refer to
Appendix A – Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the name.
NOTE: Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.Current Group name
Upper case text.
# to toggle upper case/lower case/libraryA2 Group NameA2 Group NameA2 Group NameA2 Group NameA2 Group Name
EFG HIJKLMNÖØOPEFG HIJKLMNÖØOPEFG HIJKLMNÖØOPEFG HIJKLMNÖØOPEFG HIJKLMNÖØOP

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-163Group Name Display
When viewing the groups assigned to an option, for example user code or outputs, simultaneously pressing the
# and 7 keys displays the groups individually. The keypad displays the group number, name and the status of
the particular option being displayed. Press the # key to toggle the status of the group. To move to anothergroup press the A or B keys or enter the number of the group directly.
Notes on Groups
1. All zones default to group 1.
2. All keypads, user codes and outputs default to all system groups assigned.3. Remove unused groups from user codes, otherwise the unused groups will set and unset even though
they are not programmed.
4. Final, Keyswitch and Exit can be programmed to function in regard to other groups during the
setting and unsetting procedures (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ).
5. Outputs can be assigned to any selection of groups. Output activation can be made dependent on the
set or unset status of the assigned groups (refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUTS ).
6
.After programming zones, codes, keypads and outputs into their various groups they remain pro-
grammed if the Group Mode function is disabled. Only Group 1 remains active.
7. The Galaxy control panels have multi-user software that allow several users to operate the system
simultaneously.Current group name
Status of group
# key to toggle statusSelected group
A or B key to move
to other groupA2 Sales Dept SA2 Sales Dept SA2 Sales Dept SA2 Sales Dept SA2 Sales Dept S
[<],[>],#=CHANGE[<],[>],#=CHANGE[<],[>],#=CHANGE[<],[>],#=CHANGE[<],[>],#=CHANGE63 – Options (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-164Option 64 – Assemble Zone
The Assemble Zones option allows 2 zone functions to be customised to the user’s requirements; these are
the 1 Custom-A and 2 Custom-B zones. Once a custom zone function has been assembled, it is assigned to
zones using option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES .
Programming a Custom Zone
The flexibility of this menu option allows for an extensive range of possibilities. It is therefore important that
the engineer is fully aware of the system and has a clear picture of what is required of the new zone function.
The procedure for assembling a custom zone has 4 stages:1.Outputs
2.Status
3.Setting
4.Log
Table 6-29. Programming a custom Zone64 – Assemble Zones
stuptuO=1: epyTtuptuOd elbasiD
teS
tesnU
tesnU/teSepyttuptuotceles–B/A
tesnU,teS,delbasiDneewtebelggot–#
tesnU/teS&
gnimmargorpevas–cse
sutatS=2t esnU=1d elbasiD
mralAmralAdnadelbasiDneewtebelggot–#
gnimmargorpevas–cse
tixE/yrtnE=2d elbasiD
mralA
teStraP=3d elbasiD
mralA
teSlluF=4d elbasiD
mralA
gnitteS=3t eSnigeB=1d elbasiD
delbanEdnadelbasiDneewtebelggot–#
delbanE
gnimmargorpevas–cse
yrtnEnigeB=2d elbasiD
delbanE
steS=3
metsySdelbasiD
delbanE
goL=4d elbasiD
tixEyrtnE
sruoH42
smralA,tixE/yrtnE,delbasiDneewtebelggot–#
evas–csesmralA&sruoH42
gnimmargorp

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1651 = Outputs
Any of the available output types can be assigned to the custom zone. On selecting this attribute the
01=BELLS output type is displayed along with it status; the default status is disabled. The status indicates the
conditions under which the custom zone activates the output. To assign the output type status press the # key,this toggles between each of the status settings:
1. Disabled the output is not activated by the custom zone,
2 Set the output is activated by the custom zone only when the system is set,
3 Unset the output is activated by the custom zone only when the system is unset,
4. Set/Unset the output is activated by the custom zone when the system is both set and unset.
Select the output types to be assigned by pressing the A and B keys or by entering the number of the required
output type and assign the required status. When all of the output types have been selected, press the esc key
to return the previous menu level.
For a full list of output types refer to option 53 = Program Outputs.
2 = Status
The Status attribute determines the system conditions that custom zone is operational in. The four Status
attributes are:
1. Unset activates an alarm when the system is unset,
2. Entry/Exit activates an alarm when the system is setting and unsetting,
3. Part Set activates an alarm when the system is part set ,
4. Full Set activates an alarm when the system is full set .
The default for each of the Status attributes is disabled. To enable the zone to activate an alarm, select the
required Status attribute using the A or B keys and press the # key; the display indicates that a custom zone
activation while the system is in the selected Status will create an Alarm condition and switch on the assigned
outputs.
NOTE: The custom zone can be operational in all four Status conditions if required.64 – Assemble Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1663 = Setting
The Setting attribute determines the function (if any) that the custom zone has in setting and unsetting the
system.
1. Begin Set if enabled, the custom zone starts the setting procedure,
2. Begin Entry if enabled, the custom zone starts the unsetting procedure,
3. Sets System if enabled, the custom terminates the setting procedure.
The default for each of the Setting attributes is disabled. To enable the options, select the required Setting
attribute using the A or B keys and press the # key; the display indicates that attribute is ENABLED for the
custom zone.
NOTE: The custom zone can be assigned all three Setting attributes if required, however, it is recommended
that either attribute 1 (Begin Set ) or 3 (Sets System ) is enabled, but not both.
4 = Log
This attribute determines which custom zone activations are logged. On selecting Log the current selection is
displayed. To change the selection press the # key, this toggles between the Log options;
Disabled the custom zone activations are not logged,
Entry/Exit the custom zone activations only log during the setting and unsetting procedure,
24 Hours all custom zone activations log (both in the set and unset states)
Alarms the custom zone only logs when an activation results in an alarm condition.
NOTE: The opening ( +) and closing ( –) of custom zones are recorded in the event log.64 – Assemble Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-167Assemble Zone Example:
Assemble a zone that:
• activates Bells outputs when the system is set,
• activates Link-A outputs when the system is unset,
• generates an alarm condition when the system is part and full set,• does not generate an alarm condition during the setting and unsetting procedure,• acts as a terminator when the system is setting,• logs all activation (in both set and unset states).
Programming:
(Assuming factory default settings)
1. Select option 64 = ASSEMBLE ZONES ; press the ent key,
2. Select custom zone ( 1 = Custom-A , 2 = Custom-B ); press the ent key,
3. Outputs is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
4. Bells is displayed. Press the # key. Set is displayed,
5. Enter 51. Link-A is displayed. Press the # key. Set is displayed,
6. Press the # key. Unset is displayed,
7. Press the esc key. Outputs is displayed,
8. Press the A key. Status is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
9. Unset Disabled is displayed,
10. Press the A key. Entry/ Exit Disabled is displayed,
11. Press the A key. Part Set Disabled is displayed,
12. Press the # key. Part Set Alarm is displayed,
13. Press the A key. Full Set Disabled is displayed,
14. Press the # key. Full Set Alarm is displayed,
15. Press the esc key. Status is displayed,
16. Press the A key. Setting is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
17. Begin Set Disabled is displayed,
18. Press the A key. Sets System Disabled is displayed,
19. Press the # key. Sets System Enabled is displayed,
20. Press the esc key. Setting is displayed,
21. Press the A key. Log is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
22. Log Disabled is displayed,
23. Press the # key. Log Entry/Exit is displayed,
24. Press the # key. Log 24 Hours is displayed,
25. Press the esc key three times to return to the 64 = ASSEMBLE ZONES display.64 – Assemble Zones (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-168Option 65 – Timers
The Timer s menu are as follows:65 – Timers
Figure 6-13. Timers65 = Timers
1 = Name (12 alpha-numeric)
2 = Status 0 = Off1 = On1 = Weekly
Schedule (01-67)
4 = Holiday
Period
5 = Holiday
Schedule
6 = Pattern day
1 = Mon
2 = Tue3 = Wed4 = Thu5 = Fri00-32 (00=None)Use A or B key to select timer
then press ent.
A(>), B(>) key to program day (Mon – Sun)
# to toggle ON/OFF status
0-9 keys to enter time
to delete programmingW01-67 :*** **** [>], [<], #, 0-9, *3 = Events
*
2 = Timer
Outputs
3 = Autoset (groups) Use A or B keys to
select group andpress ent.
1 = Status 0 = Off
1 = On2 = Monitor
2 = Prewarning30 (0-50) mins
3 = Extension 030 (0-400) mins
4 = Force Set 0 = Off
1 = On
5 = Weekly
Schedule
6 = Lockout
Status0 = Off1 = On
7 = Lockout
Schedule1 = Period
2 = Audible 0 = Off1 = On1 = Status
0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Weekly
Schedule1 = Timer A
1 = Status 0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Weekly
Schedule2 = Timer B01-67 schedules
01-67 schedules
01-67 schedules
01-67 schedules
01-67 schedules***

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-169The Galaxy Dimension control panel provides programming of timer schedules on a weekly basis. Each event
corresponds to an ON or an OFF time. The state of the schedule is ON or OFF depending on the last eventthat was reached.
Timers can be assigned to:
• Individual users to disable them
• Individual doors to lock them• Individual groups for autoset• Outputs for automatic activation.
NOTE: The ON period is the secure period for a particular schedule when users will be unable to gain access
to allocated areas and the Autoset and Lockout features for allocated groups are enabled.
The Timers menu Structure is as follows:
65.1 = Weekly Schedule
A weekly schedule consists of a selection of daily time programs for each day of the week. The state of the
weekly schedule is ON or OFF depending on the last event that was reached. Up to 67 weekly scheduleswith 28 time slots are available for programming depending on panel variant
The weekly schedules are used to control various panel features:• Auto setting• Lockout times• User access times• Timer Outputs
1 = Name
A maximum 12 character alpha-numeric name can be entered here for a weekly schedule.
2 = Status
The status of the each of the timers is shown here whether 0 = OFF or 1 = ON . To change the status press
the A or B key or press 1 to select ON or 2 to select OFF.
3 = Events
This option programs the weekly timer events with Day (Mon-Sun) and ON/OFF times.
NOTE: The number of weekly timer events is dependent on panel variant.
Programming Timer Events
1 Enter the Weekly Schedule menu. The first timer is displayed.
2 Go to 3 = Events and press enter. The programmed status (if any) of the first timer is displayed.
3 If the timer has not been programmed then the following window appears on the keypad:65 – Timers (cont’d)
W01*** *** **:**W01*** *** **:**W01*** *** **:**W01*** *** **:**W01*** *** **:** First timer

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17065 – Timers (cont’d)
W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30
4 = Holiday Period
This is the holiday period programmed in 45.2.1. Timer Control.Holidays.Modify Dates. Up to 32 holiday
periods can be viewed with this option.
5 = Holiday Schedule
This is an alternative schedule that is used if option 45.2. Timer Control.Holidays is activated. The system
defines a selection of holiday dates (65.1.4) and then a schedule of times can be used on those dates underthis option. Up to 67 holiday schedules can be selected.
6 = Pattern Day
The Pattern Day can only be allocated by the engineer. This option determines the programmed timers that
are effective when the Weekend Day option (45.6.1) is selected by the user; the timers of the selected
Pattern Day are adopted by the days selected for weekend work.
On selecting this option the programmed Pattern Day is displayed; the default is 1 = MON . Use the A or B
keys to select the required day or days and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the
previous menu level:
1 = MON
2 = TUE3 = WED4 = THU5 = FRI4 To enter a new timer program for W01 do the following:
• Press ent to select the timer.
• Press the A or B keys to select the day (MON to SUN).
• Press the # key to select the status ON or OFF.
• Press the number keys (0-9) to select the first time (4 digit 24 hour format) on the top row.• Press ent to accept the programming. The following typical window is displayed:
5 To program the OFF time on the bottom row repeat step 4. The following typical window is displayed:
W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30W01MON ON 08:30
MON OFF 17:00 MON OFF 17:00 MON OFF 17:00 MON OFF 17:00 MON OFF 17:00
6 Press the esc key three times to escape from the Timers option.
NOTE: The Timer Status can be switched On and Off by users via option 45 = TIMER CONTROL .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17165.2 = Timer Outputs
Once the times have been programmed and the Status is set to 1=On , the Timer-A or Timer-B outputs
53.29 and 53.30 are activated at the On times and deactivated at the Off times programmed in
65.1=Weekly Schedule . User codes that they have been attributed to a Time Zone A or B are invalid
between an On time and the next Off time for the appropriate timer.65 – Timers (cont’d)
65.3 = Autoset
Each group can be programmed with up to 67 (dependent on panel variant) Autoset times over a 7 day
period. These can be combined in any order of On and Off times as required.
When the system has been set by the Autoset function, outputs programmed as Autoset (refer to option 53 =
PROGRAM OUTPUTS ) are activated; the Set outputs are also activated.
Programming Autoset
If groups are enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ) the keypads prompts for the group that the autoset
time is to be allocated to. Press the A or B keys to step through the groups until the required number is dis-
played and press the ent key.
NOTE: The group can be directly selected by entering the group number. Larger Galaxy systems have 32
groups; these are displayed in blocks of eight groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D;
Table 6-30. Groups
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next
block of eight groups is displayed; use keys 1–8 to assign the relevant group in the current block to the zone;
press the ent key to accept the selection.kcolBpuorGs puorGlacisyhP
8-1A8 -1
8-1B6 1-9
8-1C4 2-71
8-1D2 3-52
Account Group Autosetting
The Galaxy Dimension allows Account Group autosetting. This means that several groups can be bound
together into one account group and, instead of a sending a normal CA event, the panel sends a CL event.
Refer to menu option 56.1.2.2.2 = Communications.Internal Telecoms.Format.SIA.Group
Settings.Account No.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-172There are five stages to programming the Autoset function:
1. Autoset Status
0 = Off (default)
1 = On2 = Monitor – if selected, the setting and unsetting of the group is monitored:
• if not set manually before the On time, then the Set Late output is activated
• if unset before the Off time, then the Unset Early output is activated.
2. Prewarning
1 = Period
0 – 50 minutes (default 30 minutes):
2 = Audible (this can be turned ON or OFF)
This option determines the warning period given to users prior to the system autosetting. Outputs programmed
as Prewarning activate during the prewarning period. The output normally emits a constant tone, however if
an extension is not possible, then a pulsed tone is emitted and prewarn activates at the Autoset time. At theend of the prewarning period, the system begins the timed setting procedure.
NOTE: Pressing the esc key at any time during the prewarning resets and restarts the prewarning count-
down. If more than one group is in the prewarning period, each group can be viewed by pressing *
and > or * and <.
3. Extension
0 – 400 minutes (default 30 minutes):
An autoset Extension can be assigned to each group on the system – programmed with different values per
group. Entering a user code during the Prewarning delays the autosetting by the period assigned to the
Extension .
NOTE: The Late Working option (refer to option 45 = TIMERS ) authorizes an Extension in advance of
the Prewarning period.
Late Set appears if the system is not set after prewarn time plus 300 seconds (longest possible exit delay)
An Extension cannot be granted once the timed setting procedure begins.
4. Force Set
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
As a factory preset, any zone that is open at the start of the setting procedure – except Final , Exit, Entry , or
Push Set , (or Secure Final or Part Final when acting as a Final ) – is omitted by the autoset routine whether
or not it is omittable. If one of the above listed zones is open and is non-omittable, on expiry of the timeprogrammed in the Fail-to-Set parameter the Fail-to-Set outputs are activated along with a full alarm.65 – Timers (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1735. Weekly Schedule
This option assigns a programmed weekly schedule for each group when the selected group is automatically
switched On (Autoset) and Off (Autounset).
When the keyswitch is activated twice during the exit time of an autoset, the autoset is temporarily cancelled
for a few seconds, then it restarts the exit time causing the panel to reset.
Operating a keyswitch zone type during the pre-warn period of an autoset will start a Force Set. If you then
activate the switch again (i.e. unset with keyswitch) before the panel sets, the pre-warn continues on theautoset.
NOTE: When the keyswitch is activated the second time to take panel back into pre-warn, it can be up to
10 seconds before the pre-warn tones at the keypad start up again.
Lockout
Each group can be allocated with up to 67 (dependent on panel variant) Lockout schedules over a seven day
period. These can be combined in any order of On and Off times as required.
If Lockout has been assigned to a group, the group is locked-out at the Lockout On time or when the group
sets – whichever occurs first. Outputs programmed as Lockout are active while the system is locked out – this
will not always correspond to the times assigned to the Lockout depending on whether the group sets prior to
Lockout On . When a group is locked-out the setting status indicates that it cannot be unset by displaying
an L.65 – Timers (cont’d)
GROUPSGROUPSGROUPSGROUPSGROUPS 1234567812345678123456781234567812345678
LLLUULLSLLLUULLSLLLUULLSLLLUULLSLLLUULLS

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-174During the Lockout period, the group can not be unset unless an alarm has been activated in the group. In the
event of an alarm occurring during the Lockout period, any valid type 2.3 (or above) code assigned to the
group in alarm may be used to unset and/or reset the group. If multiple locked-out groups are in an alarmcondition entry of a single valid code (type 2.3 or above with access to the relevant groups) cancels the alarmsand unsets the activated groups.
The group can only be manually unset once in each Lockout Off period. If no Lockout times are pro-
grammed, the group may be unset at any time.
Codes are not affected by Lockout , and can be used to gain access to the menus and to manually set the
group.
Programming Lockout
There are two stages to programming the Lockout function . These are options 6 = Lockout Status and
7 = Lockout Schedule of the Autoset programming menu:
6 = Lockout Status
The lockout status has to be set to On before the lockout schedule will function.
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
7 = Lockout Schedule
This option allocates the automatic lockout time schedule OFF (Unlock) and On (Lockout) for the selected
group. Up to 67 weekly schedules are available which are programmed in 65.1=Weekly Schedule.65 – Timers (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17566 – Pre-Check
The Entry/Exit Horns beep once when each zone is tested. As each zone is successfully tested, the keypad
indicates the number that remain to be tested. When the last zone is successfully tested the Entry/Exit Horn
sounds twice and the keypad displays 0 CHECK ZONES ; press the ent key to resume the system routine.
1 = Mode
The Mode determines the pre-check level that the selected zones are subjected to before the system can set.
The Mode is selected from one of the following:
1. Disabled (default) : the pre-check option is disabled; even if zones are selected, they are not checked.
2. Warning: when the setting routine is started the user is informed of the number of selected pre-check
zones that have not been activated since the system was unset; press the A or B keys to view the zones.
Press the ent key to continue the setting routine. The zone that have not been activated do not have to be
tested.
3. Autocheck: when the setting routine is started the user is informed of the number of selected pre-check
zones that have not been activated since the system was unset and a warning is sounded; press the A or B
keys to view the zones. These zones must be tested before setting can be resumed.
4. Forced Check: when the setting routine is started the keypad indicates the number of pre-check zones
that are on the system; to view the pre-check zone addresses press the A or B keys. All of the pre-
selected zones must be tested before setting can take place.Option 66 – Pre-checks
The Pre-Check option provides added system security by alerting the user to zones that may not be operating
correctly.
NOTE: Pre-check does not operate when the system is in the engineer mode.
Testing Zones
2 = Select Zones
On selecting 2 = Select Zones , the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move to
the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. To toggle the status of the pre-
check attribute of the zone press the # key; the keypad indicates that the zone is included in the pre-check by
displaying PRE-CHECK ZONE . Select other zones to be pre-checked in the same way. Once all of the
zones have been selected, press the esc key.16 CHECK ZONES
A=VIEW
0 CHECK ZONESENT=VIEW

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-176Option 67 – Remote Reset
The Remote Reset option allows a user to perform an engineer reset authorized by the Alarm Receiving
Centre (ARC). In the event of an alarm that requires an engineer reset, the keypad displays a number, which,when quoted to the ARC is decoded and exchanged for a new number. When this new number is entered itresets the Galaxy panel. Entering the engineer code also resets the Galaxy panel.
NOTE: The alarm conditions that require to be reset remotely must have the appropriate System Reset ,
Tamper Reset or PA Reset parameters programmed for engineer reset ( type 3.7 ).
Each alarm activation generates a random number, therefore, the number required to reset the panel changes
each activation. As ARCs have different decoding equipment, the appropriate reset system must be selectedfrom the following Remote Mode options:
0 = OFF (default).
1 = SMS – Southern Monitoring Service (4 digits).
2 = Technistore (5 digits) – requires a four digit local modifier (000 – 255) to be assigned.
3 = Microtech (6 digits) – requires a four digit local modifier (0000 – 9999) to be assigned.
NOTE : The local modifier for the Technistore or Microtech reset modes must be assigned after discussion
with the ARC.67 – Remote Reset

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-177Option 68 – Menu Access
The Menu Access option is used to assign access types to each of the menu options. This allows code types
2.3 – 3.6 to have access to menu options to which they would normally have insufficient access rights.
On selecting this option, 11 = OMIT ZONES is displayed along with the current code types assigned ( 3456
default).
Use the A or B key to select the required menu option or enter the option number directly and press the ent
key. The currently assigned types appear displayed on the top line of the display. The type maps default to thestandard access. To modify the types, press the required number keys; this toggles the access type numberson the bottom line of the display on and off.
Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level. If the level is assigned to the
option the number is displayed, if it has been removed a dash (–) is displayed.
For example, type 2.5 5 codes can be given access to menu 42 which would allow them to allocate codes.
Users can only allocate codes up to the type that they have been assigned. A type 2.4 user cannot assign a
user code as type 2.5.
NOTE: The following menu access types are fixed: option 48 = DATELOCK level 3.6, and option 68 =
MENU ACCESS engineer access (type 3.7 and 3.8).LevelsLevelsLevelsLevelsLevels ––-6––-6––-6––-6––-6
42=CODES42=CODES42=CODES42=CODES42=CODES68 – Menu Access
Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456
11=OMIT ZONES11=OMIT ZONES11=OMIT ZONES11=OMIT ZONES11=OMIT ZONES
Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456Levels 3456
>–-5- >–-5- >–-5- >–-5- >–-5-

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17869 – Access Control
Option 69 – Integrated Access Control
The Galaxy Dimension Access Control System is a complete security system. A choice can be made as to
which type of access control to use: either the MAX3 or the Door Control Module or both. The followingdiagrams shows the programming options for the MAX3 and the Door Control Module.
Figure 6-14. Access Control Programming Structure (sheet 1)69 = Access Control
2 = MAX0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1 = MAX AddressA/B to select line
ent to start MAX search.0 = On-line, ent then key 0 – 7 to readdress MAX.1 = Standalone
2 = MAX Parameters
MAX XXX (select)
A/B to move to required MAX address.# to display MAX address graphic.ent to select:1 = Descriptor # = toggle upper case, lower case or library text.
* = delete last characterA/B = move to character/wordent = assign character/wordesc = save programming
2 = Relay Duration
1 – 60 seconds (default = 05).
3 = Open Timeout 0 – 60 seconds (default = 10).
4 = Groups
5 = Emergencies Enable or disable option. If group mode is enabled,
a separate enable is available for each group.
6 = AntiPassBack
1 = Mode
3 = Forgive0 = Off No antipassback restriction.
1 = Soft Access is never denied but any violations
will be recorded in the event log.
No access will be granted for a second 2 = Hard
swipe within the antipassback period
following a valid swipe.
2 = Timeout (0 – 60 minutes). Specifies the time that the
antipassback restrictions last for.
Allows the engineer to remove all antipassback
restrictions for the selected MAX. Use the
A>B< keys to select the reader address then
press enter to forgive.1 = Mode
1 = Alarm Group
2 = Group Restrict3 = Exit group
7 = Security
1 = Nightlock 00-67 weekly schedules
2 = Unlock Time 00-67 weekly schedules
3 = Dual Mode 0 = Disabled
1 = Card and Card2 = Card and Pin
4 = Dual Time – Option not available
8 = Menu Recall
1 = Menu Function (** = not used)
2 = Menu Mode3 = Keypad
cont'd on next page1 = Card Held
** = Keypad
# = enable/disable

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-17969 – Access Control (cont’d)
Figure 6-15. Access Control Programming Structure (sheet 2)
69.1 = Access Mode
The Access Control function can either be set to 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled . The default is Enabled.
The following pages describe the MAX menu programming functions followed by the Door Control Module
programming functions.3 = DCM1 = DCM Parameters
DCM XXX (select)69 = Access Control (cont'd)
1 = Descriptor ABCDE_ (9 characters)
2 = Operation
3 = System Group
4 = Facility Code
5 = Reader (01 or 02)0 = Entry & Exit
1 = Entry & Entry2 = Single Entry
1 = Code 1
2 = Code 23 = Code 34 = Code 4
01 = Descriptor (ABCDE_ 9 characters)
02 = Relay Duration – 0-60 seconds (default = 05)03 = Open Timeout – 1-60 seconds (default = 10)
04 = Group
Config
1 = Alarm Group2 = Group Restrict
3 = Exit Group
05 = Emergencies
06 = AntiPassBack
1 = Mode 0 = Off1 = Soft2 = Hard
2 = Timeout 00 (0-60) minutes
3 = Forgive
07 = APB (by group)
08 = Security
1 = Nightlock 00-67 weekly schedules
2 = Unlock Time 00-67 weekly schedules
3 = Dual Mode 0 = Disabled
1 = Card and Card2 = Card and Pin
4 = Dual Time – Option not available
09 = Menu Recall
1 = Menu Function 11-71 (** = not used)
2 = Menu Mode0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
1 = Triple Repeat2 = Recall Button
3 = Keypad
– Keypad**
# = Enable
2 = Card Format
3 = Start Point
4 = User Field0 = 26bit1 = Crp 1K 35bit2 = 37bit no FC3 = Northern 34 bit4 = Custom
1 = Format Name2 = Card Length
1 = 26 Bit, 2 = 27 Bit, 3 = 32 Bit, 4 = 34 Bit5 = 35 Bit, 6 = 37 Bit, 7 = 40 Bit
13 (1-33)
1 = Field Position 00 (1-13)2 = Field Length 09 (1-13)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18069.2 = MAX
This option is used to program the Galaxy MAX access control readers. The MAX can be fully integrated
into the system, communicating on the AB lines and fully utilising the facilities of the Galaxy control panel. If theMAX is programmed as a standalone module, it is completely separate from the Galaxy; the panel does notmonitor the module or share any of the facilities or options with it.
When enabled, the options that are eligible for MAX programming are made available throughout the menu,
otherwise they do not appear or appear as Option not Available .
NOTE: If the MAX Mode is disabled following programming of MAX readers, the readers remain opera-
tional, however, no further programming, including assigning new MAX cards and fobs, is possibleuntil the mode is enabled.
69.2.1 = MAX Address
The address and the on-line or standalone status of the MAX Modules are assigned and modified using this
option. On selecting MAX Address the Galaxy searches for the MAX with the highest address. The Galaxy
3-48 prompt for the AB line (1-1); the Galaxy 3-96 and 3-264 prompt for the AB line (1-2); the Galaxy 3-520 prompts for the AB line (1-4) that is to be searched. Select the line and press the ent key. On locating
the MAX, the keypad prompts for the TYPE of MAX to be assigned:
0 = On-Line The MAX is fully integrated with the Galaxy system and communicates via the AB line,
sharing system resources and facilities
1 = Standalone The MAX operates as an entirely independent unit. The Galaxy does not monitor the MAX
for alarms, tampers or power failure.
The MAX can then be readdressed. The keypad displays the current address of the MAX and the range of
valid addresses. All MAX modules default to address 7, it is recommended that when adding MAX modules,
the first is redressed as 0, the second as 1 and so on.
Enter the new MAX address and press the ent key; the Galaxy then reprograms the address of the MAX.
The keypad indicates the old and new MAX addresses and the status of the reprogramming.
When the reprogramming is complete the MAX bleeps and the display returns to 2 = MAX Address .
69.2.2 = MAX Parameters
This option defines the individual operational features of each of the MAX
modules. On selecting this option
the address of the first MAX on the system is displayed along with the descriptor currently assigned to it.
While the MAX3 address is displayed on the keypad, the address pattern on the MAX module is indicated by
the LEDs switching on. Pressing the # key displays a graphic on the keypad which corresponds to the LEDpattern on the MAX module.
The following figure shows the graphic display for both a MAX and a MicroMAX address as 26.Old address
New addressStatus of
reprogramming 7 –> 0 [24]7 –> 0 [24]7 –> 0 [24]7 –> 0 [24]7 –> 0 [24]69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-181The line numbers are represented by the top row in MAX and blocks 2nd and 3rd from the top in the
MicroMAX and the address numbers are represented by the bottom row of blocks in the MAX and the fourbottom blocks in the MicroMAX. The top LED on the MicroMAX is always off in this mode.
The combinations are shown in the following Figure :-
Select the required MAX/MicroMAX address using the A and B keys or by entering the MAX/MicroMAX
address directly and pressing the ent key. The first MAX parameter, 1 = Description is displayed. Use the A
or B keys to move to the required parameter and press the ent key.
1 = Descriptor
This option is used to assign a name of up to 12 characters to each of the MAX modules. This name is assem-
bled from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor parameter the currently as-
signed name is displayed on the top line – an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned,and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line – the cursor flashes on the letter L.
Press the 7 key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned
underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the char-
acter to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Descriptor .
Text Case & Library
On entering the Descriptor parameter the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing
the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number – refer to
Appendix A – Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the name.
Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.69 – Access Control (cont’d)
Line No. Module Address
41
32
41
320
7652 6 M A X2 6 MicroMAX/MAX3 LEDs Displayed MAX LEDs Displayed
M A X
Top (unused)
Bottom

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1822 = Relay Duration
This is the period, following the user card swipe, that the MAX relay is activated allowing a door strike to be
unlocked and the door to be opened without creating an alarm. The MAX relay de-activates as soon as thedoor contact opens or the Open Timeout occurs.
On entering the Relay Duration parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within the
range 01 – 60 seconds, the default time is 5 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and return
to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in one
second decrements.
3 = Open Timeout
This is the period following the user card swipe that the door can remain open when gaining access. If thedoor remains open longer than the period assigned to the Open Timeout , then an alarm occurs.
NOTE: If the Open Timeout is programmed as 0 seconds, then the door can remain open indefinitely
without resulting in an alarm being activated.
On entering the Open Timeout parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within the
range 00 – 60 seconds, the default time is 10 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and return
to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in one
second decrements.
4 = Group Config
1=Alarm Group
On selecting the Alarm Group option, the group currently allocated to the MAX is displayed. Pressing
the group number toggles the group assigned to the MAX. The MAX does not allow access throughthe door when the group is set. A user must have this group assigned to them in order to gain access atthis door.
Multi-group Systems
The larger galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the MAX in block of 8 groups, sub-dividedinto A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the
relevant groups in each block to the MAX.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and
return to the previous menu level.69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1832=Group Restrict
Each MAX module can be assigned selected groups using the Group Restriction option. This group restric-
tion affects the operation of the MAX readers for card held functions. A card can only be used at a reader ifthere are common groups between them. By default each reader is assigned to all groups on the system.Groups can be removed as required to restrict the operation of the MAX reader.
NOTE: Each MAX card can be assigned a single menu function (refer to option 42 = CODES ). Activating
this function with a card that is assigned to all groups, on a MAX that is only assigned to a singlegroup, results in the function operating on all of the card’s groups. The MAX function is not re-stricted to the groups assigned to the MAX, it is restricted to the groups assigned to the card, aslong as there is one group common to both. This means that a MAX assigned only to group 1, forexample, can be used to activate the MAX function on groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 by a card with all ofthese groups allocated. The groups are assigned to the MAX card using option 42 = CODES .
In access mode access will be granted if there are common groups between the card and the MAX reader
and all the groups assigned to the card are unset. For the card held function, the groups affected by the func-tion will be all the groups assigned to the card, so long as there is at least one common group between thecard and the MAX.
Common Group Restriction
The group restrictions can be enhanced further by pressing the 7 key when assigning group in Group Restric-
tion. This limits the operation described in the paragraph above only to groups which are common to both theMAX and the card.
Refer to the following table for examples of how the readers respond to different situations with the Common
Group Restriction on and off. The card held function used in the example is “Timed Set”.
Table 6-31. Card Held Function Set up for SettingdlehdracnonoitcA
epiwsdracfoemittanoitautiSo N77777 77777 noitcirtseRpuorGnO
tesnuspuorgllAottratsdracnospuorgllA
tesottratsspuorgnommocllA
tes
tesspuorgllAt esnueradracnospuorgllAeraspuorgnommocllA
tesnu
roenodnatesnuspuorgnommoC
tesdracnospuorgeromtesnueradracnospuorGt eseraspuorgnommoC
,tesspuorgnommoceromroenO
tesnuspuorgrehtotesnueradracnospuorgllAeraspuorgnommocllA
tesnu69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-184Assigning Groups to Group Restriction
On selecting the Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the MAX are displayed. Pressing the group
number toggles the group assigned to the MAX.
Larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the MAX in blocks of eight groups, sub-divided
into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the
relevant groups in each block to the MAX.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and
return to the previous menu level.
5 = Emergencies
This option allows each individual MAX unit to be configured to respond to fire zones in a given set of groups.Upon the opening of a fire zone in one of the groups allocated to the MAX, the MAX will trigger the doorstrike and hold the door open until the system is reset. All the MAX LEDs will light and the buzzer will sound.Closing the fire zone will have no effect – the MAX units are treated as latched outputs and an appropriatelevel reset is required, at which point they are immediately reset.
A second group map is allocated to each MAX in order to facilitate this function. This permits the existing
door control features to be completely detached from the fire escape features.
The default setting for each MAX is all groups selected. Therefore, a system, which is unchanged from the
default will open all MAX doors in response to any fire zone activation.
On selecting the Emergencies option select the groups you want allocated to the MAX for escape purposes
and accept the programming by pressing the enter key. When a fire zone is activated in any of the groupsprogrammed, the door controlled by the MAX will be opened.
6 = AntiPassBack
This option, when enabled, will prevent more than one use of any particular card at a particular reader within agiven time period.
A forgiveness function is available to clear all or particular antipassback restrictions in force. A manager code
can authorize a forgive function on a particular user in option 42.1 = Codes.User Codes. An engineer code
can authorize a forgive function on a particular reader.
1 = Mode
This option has three settings:
0 = Off
No antipassback restriction
1 = Soft
Access is never denied but any violations will be recorded in the event log
2 = Hard
No access will be granted for a second swipe within the antipassback period, following a valid swipe.
2 = Timeout (0-60 minutes)
This option specifies the time that the anti passback restriction lasts for. The default is 0 minutes.
3 = Forgive
This option allows the engineer to remove all anti passback restrictions for the selected MAX. Use the A>B<
keys to select the reader address the press enter to forgive.69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18569 – Access Control (cont’d)
7 = Security
This option determines when and how a door can be locked and unlocked for access.
1 = Nightlock
This allows a time schedule to be allocated to determine when access to the door will be blocked. Up to
67 weekly time schedules can be programmed. Setting the schedule to 00 disables the function.
2 = Unlock Time
This allows a time schedule to be allocated to determine when the door will be unlocked to provide unre-stricted access. Up to 0-67 weekly time schedules can be programmed. Setting the schedule to 00 disa-bles the function.
Dual Mode
This defines if access at a door requires dual authority or not via the assigned keypad. The options are:
0 = Disabled
A card or a Pin is required to gain access.
1 = Card and Card
Two cards are required to gain access.
2 = Card and Pin
A card and a Pin from the same user are required to gain access.
8 = Menu Recall
This means that a card-held function can be assigned to the reader. A user is able to do a card-held function
even if they do not have card-held priviledges themselves.
1 = Menu Function
Depending on the level of access granted in Option 68, Menu Access , the user can hold their card at a
compatible reader for three seconds to activate a single menu function selected from the available list. Anew option is assigned by pressing the A or B keys until the required option is displayed or by entering the
option number directly and then pressing the ent key to accept the selection. Assigning a Double asterisk
(**) to the menu function makes it not used.
2 = Menu Mode
This determines whether a card held function can be used to access the reader. There is one option whichis 1 = Card Held.
2 = Keypad
This assigns a specific keypad address to work in conjunction with a MAX. This keypad is used to display
the menu action assigned in 1 = Menu Function .

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18669.3 = DCM
This option is used to program the Galaxy Door Control Module (DCM) access control readers. The DCM
can be fully integrated into the system, communicating on the AB lines and fully utilising the facilities of theGalaxy control panel. Each DCM can control up to two readers. The exit reader can be replaced with arequest to exit button.
When enabled, the options that are eligible for DCM programming are made available throughout the menu,
otherwise they do not appear, or appear as Option not Available .
Addressing the DCM
The DCM takes its address from a rotary hex switch on-board or by setting with DIP switches. Refer to
Section 5, Access Control, Door Control Module.
69.3.1 = DCM Parameters
This option defines the individual operational features of each of the Door Control Modules. On selecting this
option the address of the first DCM
on the system is displayed along with the descriptor currently assigned to
it. If there are no DCM’s on the system the message NO ENTRIES is displayed.
Select the required DCM address using the A and B keys pressing the ent key. The first parameter,
1 = Descriptor is displayed. Use the A or B keys to move to the required parameter and press the ent key.
1 = Descriptor
This option is used to assign a name of up to 9 characters to each of the DCM’s. This name is assembled from
the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor parameter the currently assigned name is
displayed on the top line – an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned, and a selection ofthe alphabet is shown on the bottom line – the cursor flashes on the letter L.
Press the 7 key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned
underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the char-
acter to the description in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Descriptor .
2 = Operation
This option determines how the DCM will operate. There are three choices;
0 = Entry and Exit
This option provides entry at one reader and exit at another reader.
1 = Entry and Entry
This option provides entry only at both readers
2 = Single entry
This option means that one reader is connected and its type is entry.
3 = System Group
This is the group that the DCM will report on for module tampers and diagnostics.69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18769 – Access Control (cont’d)
4 = Facility Code
This allows the cards to be programmed as a specific technology with a Facility code plus an ID.
1 = Code 12 = Code 23 = Code 34 = Code 4
5 = Reader (01 or 02)
This option allows the DCM readers to be set up with the 9 options that follow:
01 = Descriptor
This option is used to assign a name of up to 9 characters to each of the readers. This name is assembled
from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor parameter the currently assigned
name is displayed on the top line – an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned, and aselection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line – the cursor flashes on the letter L.
Press the * key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned
underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the
character to the description in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Descriptor .
02 = Relay Duration
This is the period, following the user card swipe, that the reader relay is activated allowing a door strike to
be unlocked and the door to be opened without creating an alarm. The reader relay de-activates as soonas the door contact opens or the Open Timeout occurs.
On entering the Relay Duration parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within
the range 0 – 60 seconds, the default time is 5 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and
return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in one
second decrements.
03 = Open Timeout
This is the period, following the user card swipe, that the door can remain open when gaining access. If thedoor remains open longer than the period assigned to the Open Timeout , then an alarm occurs.
NOTE: If the Open Timeout is programmed as 0 seconds, then the door can remain open indefinitely
without resulting in an alarm being activated.
On entering the Open Timeout parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within
the range 0 – 60 seconds, the default time is 10 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and
return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in
one second decrements.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18869 – Access Control (cont’d)
04 = Group Config
The groups option allows each DCM readers to be allocated to a particular group (s).
1 = Alarm Group
On selecting the Alarm Group option, the group currently allocated to the DCM reader is displayed.
Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the reader. The reader does not allow accessthrough the door when the group is set. a user must have this group assigned to them in order to gainaccess at this door.
Multi-group Systems
Larger Galaxy panels have 32 groups; these are displayed on the DCM reader in block of 8 groups,sub-divided into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1
– 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the DCM reader.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming
and return to the previous menu level.
2 = Group Restrict
Each DCM reader can be assigned selected groups using the Group Restriction option. This grouprestriction affects the operation of the DCM readers for both access and card held functions. A cardcan only be used at a reader if there are common groups between them. By default each reader isassigned to all groups on the system. Groups can be removed as required to restrict the operation of theDCM reader.
NOTE: Each DCM card can be assigned a single menu function (refer to option 42 = CODES ).
Activating this function with a card that is assigned to all groups, on a reader that is only assigned to asingle group, results in the function operating on all of the card’s groups. The DCM function is notrestricted to the groups assigned to the reader, it is restricted to the groups assigned to the card, as longas there is one group common to both. This means that a DCM reader assigned only to group 1, forexample, can be used to activate the DCM reader function on groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 by a card with all ofthese groups allocated. The groups are assigned to the DCM card using option 42 = CODES .
3 = Exit Group – Option not available
This allows the group outside of the protected area to be defined. This is only used in conjunction with
an exit reader, so that the current location of a specific user can be tracked.
05 = Emergencies
This option allows each individual DCM reader to be configured to respond to fire zones in a given set ofgroups. Upon the opening of a fire zone in one of the groups allocated to the reader, the reader will trigger thedoor strike and hold the door open until the system is reset. The DCM LED will light and the buzzer willsound. Closing the fire zone will have no effect – the DCM readers are treated as latched outputs and anappropriate level reset is required, at which point they are immediately reset.
A second group map is allocated to each DCM reader in order to facilitate this function. This permits the
existing door control features to be completely detached from the fire escape features.
The default setting for each DCM reader is all groups selected. Therefore, a system, which is unchanged from
the default will open all DCM doors in response to any fire zone activation.
Selecting the Emergencies option selects the groups you want allocated to the DCM readers for escape
purposes and accepts the programming by pressing the enter key. When a fire zone is activated in any of thegroups programmed, the door controlled by the DCM will be opened.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-18969 – Access Control (cont’d)
06 = AntiPassBack
This option, when enabled, will prevent more than one use of any particular card at a particular reader
within a given time period.
A forgiveness function is available to clear all or particular antipassback restrictions in force. A manager
code can authorize a forgive function on a particular user in option 42.1 = Codes.User Codes. An engi-
neer code can authorize a forgive function on a particular reader.
1 = Mode
This option has three settings
0 = Off
No antipassback restriction.
1 = Soft
Access is never denied but any violations will be recorded in the event log.
2 = Hard
No access will be granted for a second swipe within the antipassback period, following a valid
swipe.
2 = Timeout (0-60 minutes)
This option specifies the time that the antipassback restriction lasts for. The default is 0 minutes.
3 = Forgive
This option allows the engineer to remove all antipassback restrictions for the selected DCM. Use theA>B< keys to select the reader address the press enter to forgive.
07 = APB
Not used
08 = Security
This option determines when and how a door can be locked and unlocked for access.
1 = Nightlock
This allows a time schedule to be allocated to determine when access to the door will be blocked. Up
to 67 weekly time schedules can be programmed. Setting the schedule to 00 disables the function.
2 = Unlock Time
This allows a time schedule to be allocated to determine when the door will be unlocked to provideunrestricted access. Up to 67 weekly time schedules can be programmed. Setting the schedule to 00disables the function.
3 = Dual mode
This defines if access at a door requires dual authority or not via the assigned keypad. The options are:
0 = Disabled
A card or a Pin is required to gain access.
1 = Card and Card
Two cards are required to gain access.
2 = Card and Pin
A card and a Pin from the same user are required to gain access.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-1904 = Dual Time
Option not available
09 = Menu Recall
This determines whether the user is allowed to apply the menu recall function at any DCM reader. This is in
addition to any DCM function that may be assigned. There are two options:
1 = Menu Function
Depending on the level of access granted in Option 68, Menu Access , the user can hold their card at
a compatible reader for three seconds to activate a single menu function selected from the available list(11-71). A new option is assigned by pressing the A or B keys until the required option is displayed or
by entering the option number directly and then pressing the ent key to accept the selection. Assigning a
Double asterisk (**) to the menu function makes it not used.
2 = Menu Mode
This determines how the menu function will operate. There are two options:
1 = Triple Repeat
The card is presented to the reader three times to activate the menu.
2 = Recall Button
The recall button is pressed once to activate the menu.
2 = Keypad assignment
This assigns a specific keypad address to work in conjunction with a MAX. This keypad is used todisplay the menu action assigned in 1 = Menu Function.69 – Access Control (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-19169 – Access Control (cont’d)
69.3.2 = Card Format
This option selects what type of card is used with the DCM reader. There are five options:
0 = 26 bit
1 = Crp 1K 35 bit2 = 37 bit no FC3 = Northern 34 bit4 = Custom.
1 = Format Name
This option is only available when 4 = Custom is selected as the format. It gives a name to the custom format.
The maximum number of characters in the name is 12.
2 = Card Length
The bit size of the card can be 26, 27, 32, 34, 35, 37 or 40.
3 = Start Point
If the card structure is unknown then it can be decided where the card number starts from. This is a numericvalue that must be less than the maximum length of the card.
4 = User Field
This is where the facility code is specified. Two options can be selected:
1 = Field Position
This is the start bit for the facility code. It can be from 1 to the card number start point.
2 = Field Length
This is the length of the facility code. The maximum field length is from the field position to the start of thecard number.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-19271 – SPI Key
Engineer 3
Option 71 – SPI Key
The SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) key is an engineering peripheral used for copy/overwriting programming
data and carrying out software upgrades.
Using the SPI Key
If no key is fitted the display will briefly show:
SPI Keys can be supplied in one of two ways:
1. Programmed – the SPI Key will be pre-programmed with a specific application file.
2. Un-programmed – The SPI Key is blank and contains no application or configuration data.
If the SPI Key is fitted and the key is blank, then the only option presented to the user will be 1 = Format
Key.
1 = Format Key
This function formats the key ready for copy and overwriting of panel configuration data. On selecting this
option the user is presented with a display where the top line reads “Formatting”, with a progress bar shownon the bottom line.
Once the key has been formatted the user is presented with the following options:
1 = Show Key
This option is only shown when there is existing information stored on the SPI Key and then provides options
for downloading the saved information into the panel. The user can scroll through the available files on the SPIKey.
For each file the display toggles between the:Filename, creation time and date of the saved data and the,
Panel Type, Panel version and file type.
A further press of the ent key will provide the user with the following two options:
1 = Use File
Selecting this option will reprogram your control panel with the software application file or configuration file
stored on the SPI key. This will take approximately 2 minutes.
NOTE: If a new panel application file is being downloaded, the panel configuration stored in the
panel should firstly be saved from the panel to the SPI Key. The new panel application canthen copied from the SPI Key to the panel. Once the new application has beendownloaded the saved panel configuration can be copied back to the panel.SPI Key:SPI Key:SPI Key:SPI Key:SPI Key:
Device errorDevice errorDevice errorDevice errorDevice error

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-19371 – SPI Key (cont’d)
Once the process has started, the panel will validate the data, then begin reprogramming the control
panel. While reprogramming is taking place, the panel stops running. The keypads and other peripheralswill go off-line for a short period. Once the reprogramming is complete, the panel will automaticallyreboot. Once the panel has fully reconfigured, power may be removed or any previously savedconfiguration can be restored via option 1 = show key and selecting the appropriate file.
CAUTION: Do not remove power or unplug the SPI key until the panel has restarted.
2 = Delete File
When selected, the binary file stored on the SPI Key is deleted.
CAUTION: Do not use this command as the SPI key will have to be recalled to Honeywell
Security to be reprogrammed with the software.
2 = Save config
This option allows the panel configuration data to be saved to SPI Key. If selected the user is first prompted
for filename for the saved data. This can be up to 8 characters in length.
Once the filename has been entered the data save sequence is started. The keypad display gives an indication
of the progress until the configuration has been saved.
3 = Check space
If selected this option displays the available space left on the SPI Key. This will display the number of free
memory Kbytes left on the device, out of a maximum of 4096.
4 = Erase key
This option deletes all programming and returns the SPI key to the unformatted state. This option should not
be used.
NOTE: If replacing the software all users, other than the engineer at the keypad in use will be logged out of
the system. The keypad banner will display a warning of what is happening. The engineer will begiven a warning that the panel software is about to be replaced. It will take approximately 2 minutesto replace the software, during which time the keypads will go off line. Once reprogrammed thepanel will restart.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
6-194

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
A-100 0
01 102 203 304 405 506 607 708 809 910 space11 Å12 Ä13 A14 Æ15 B16 C17 D18 E19 F20 G21 space22 H23 I24 J25 K26 L27 M28 N29 Ø30 Ö31 O32 space33 P34 Q35 R36 S37 T38 U39 Ü40 V41 W42 X43 space44 Y45 Z46 .47 ,48 /49 -50 +51 &52 (53 )54 space001 ABOVE
002 ACCESS003 ACCOUNTANT004 ACCOUNTANTS005 ACCOUNTS006 ADMIN.007 ALARM008 ALERT009 ANIMAL010 ANNEXE011 ARCH012 AREA013 ARENA014 AROUND015 ART016 ASSEMBLY017 ASSISTANT018 AT019 ATTACK020 ATTIC021 AUTOMATIC022 AUXILIARY023 BACK024 BAGGAGE025 BAKERY026 BALCONY027 BALLROOM028 BANK029 BANKING030 BAR031 BARN032 BASEMENT033 BATH034 BATHROOM035 BAY036 BEAM037 BEDROOM038 BEHIND039 BELL040 BELOW041 BENCH042 BESIDE043 BIOLOGY044 BIRD045 BLOCK046 BLUE047 BOARD048 BODY049 BOILER050 BOOTH051 BOTTOM052 BOX053 BOYS054 BRANCH055 BROOM056 BROWN057 BUILDING058 BUNKER059 BY
060 CABINET061 CAFE062 CALL063 CANTEEN064 CAR065 CARGO066 CARPENTER067 CARPET068 CASH069 CASHIER070 CEILING071 CELL072 CELLAR073 CENTRAL074 CENTRE075 CHAIR076 CHANGING077 CHEMISTRY078 CHICKEN079 CHURCH080 CLASSROOM081 CLEANER082 CLEANERS083 CLEANING084 CLERK085 CLERKS086 COAL087 COAT088 COIN089 COLD090 COLLECTION091 COMMUNICATOR092 COMPUTER093 CONFERENCE094 CONTAINER095 CONTACT096 CONSERVATORY097 CORNER098 CORRIDOR099 COUNTER100 COURT101 COW102 CUPBOARD103 CURRENCY104 DAIRY105 DARK-ROOM106 DATA107 DAY108 DEPARTURE109 DEPUTY110 DEPT.111 DESIGN112 DESK113 DETECTOR114 DEVELOPMENT115 DEVICE116 DIARY117 DINING
118 DIRECTOR119 DIRECTORS120 DISPATCH121 DOG122 DOOR123 DOUBLE124 DOWNSTAIRS125 DRAMA126 DRAWER127 DRAWING128 DRINKS129 DRIVE130 DRUGS131 EAST132 ECONOMICS133 EDGE134 EIGHT135 EIGHTEEN136 EIGHTY137 ELECTRIC138 ELECTRICIAN139 ELECTRONICS140 EMERGENCY141 END142 ENGINE143 ENGINEER144 ENGINEERS145 ENGLISH146 ENTRANCE147 ENTRY148 EQUIPMENT149 ESCAPE150 ESCALATOR151 EXIT152 EXPORT153 EXTERNAL154 FACTORY155 FAILURE156 FAR157 FARM158 FAX159 FEED160 FEMALE161 FENCE162 FIELD163 FIFTEEN164 FIFTY165 FLING166 FIRE167 FIRST168 FIRST-AID169 FISH170 FIVE171 FLAT172 FLOOR173 FOR
Appendix A: LibraryLibrary

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
A-2174 FOREIGN
175 FORTY176 FOUNTAIN177 FOUR178 FREEZER179 FRENCH180 FRIDGE181 FROM182 FRONT183 GAMES184 GARAGE185 GARDEN186 GATE187 GENTS188 GEOGRAPHY189 GERMAN190 GIRLS191 GLASS192 GOLD193 GOODS194 GREAT195 GREEN196 GROCERY197 GROUND198 GROUNDS199 GROUNDSMAN200 GROUP201 GUARD202 GUN203 GYM204 HALL205 HAND206 HANGER207 HEAD208 HEAT209 HEATER210 HIGH211 HISTORY212 HOME213 HORSE214 HOT215 HOUSE216 ICE217 IN218 INDUSTRIAL219 INFANT220 INFANTS221 INFORMATION222 INFRARED223 INSIDE224 INSTRUCTORS225 INTERIOR226 INTO227 IRON228 ISOLATION229 IT230 ITALIAN231 JANITOR232 JANITORS233 JUDGE234 JUNIOR235 JUST
236 KEEP237 KEYPAD238 KITCHEN239 LAB240 LADIES241 LANDING242 LAST243 LATIN244 LAUNDRY245 LAVATORY246 LAWN247 LEAST248 LECTURE249 LEFT250 LEVEL251 L.H.S.252 LIBRARY253 LIFT254 LIGHT255 LINE256 LITTLE257 LOADING258 LOBBY259 LOCK260 LOFT261 LORRY262 LOUNGE263 LOW264 LUNCH265 MACHINE266 MAGNETIC267 MAIN268 MAJOR269 MALE270 MAN271 MANAGER272 MANAGERS273 MASTER274 MAT275 MATHS276 MEDICAL277 MEN278 MESS279 METAL280 METER281 MEZZANINE282 MICROWAVE283 MIDDLE284 MILK285 MINOR286 MOBILE287 MODEL288 MONITOR289 MOULDING290 MOVEMENT291 NEAR292 NEW293 NEXT294 NIGHT295 NINE296 NINETEEN
297 NINETY298 NODE299 NOISE300 NURSE301 NURSERY302 NORTH303 OF304 OFFICE305 OFFICER306 OFFICERS307 OFFICES308 OIL309 ON310 ONE311 OPEN312 ORANGE313 OUT314 OUTER315 OUTSIDE316 OVAL317 OVER318 P.A. BUTTON319 PACKING320 PAINT321 PANEL322 PANIC323 PANTRY324 PARCEL325 PARK326 PARTITION327 PASSIVE328 PATH329 PATIO330 PEN331 PENTHOUSE332 PERIMETER333 PERSONAL334 PERSONNEL335 PHONE336 PHYSICS337 PIG338 PIR339 PIR BY340 PIR IN341 PIR ON342 PLACE343 PLANT344 PLAY345 PLAZA346 PLUMBER347 PLUMBERS348 POINT349 POND350 POOL351 PORCH352 POST353 POWER354 PRESSURE355 PRIMARY356 PRIME
Library (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
A-3357 PRINT
358 PROCESSING359 PRODUCTION360 PUBLIC361 PURCHASING362 PURPLE363 QUALITY364 QUANTITY365 QUIET366 QUICK367 RANGE368 READING369 REAR370 RECEPTION371 RECORDS372 RECTOR373 RECTORS374 RED375 REED376 REFECTORY377 REMOTE378 REPAIR379 RESEARCH380 REST381 RESTAURANT382 REVOLVING383 RIGHT384 R.H.S.385 ROLLER386 ROOF387 ROOM388 ROUND389 RUN390 SAFE391 SALES392 SCAN393 SCANNER394 SCANNERS395 SCANNING396 SCREEN397 SEA398 SECOND399 SECURE400 SECRETARIES401 SECRETARY402 SECTION403 SECURITY404 SENSOR405 SEVEN406 SEVENTEEN407 SEVENTY408 SHACK409 SHAFT410 SHED411 SHEEP412 SHOP413 SHOWROOM414 SHORT415 SHOWER416 SHUTTER417 SIDE418 SILENT
419 SILVER420 SITE421 SITTING422 SIX423 SIXTEEN424 SIXTY425 SLIDING426 SMOKE427 SOFTWARE428 SOLITARY429 SOUND430 SOUTH431 SPANISH432 SPRAY433 SPRING434 SQUARE435 SQUASH436 STABLE437 STADIUM438 STAFF439 STAIRS440 STAIRWELL441 STALLS442 STAND443 START444 STATION445 STOP446 STORE447 STORES448 STROBE449 STRONG450 STUDY451 SUITE452 SUMMER453 SUNDAY454 SUPPLY455 SURGERY456 SWIMMING457 SWITCH458 SYSTEM459 TABLE460 TALL461 TAMPER462 TEA463 TEACHER464 TECHNICAL465 TECHNICIAN466 TELLER467 TEN468 TENNIS469 TEST470 THE471 THEATRE472 THEN473 THIRTEEN474 THIRTY475 THREE476 TICKET477 TILL478 TO479 TOILET
480 TOOL481 TOP482 TRACK483 TRACTOR484 TRADE485 TRAILER486 TRAIN487 TRAINING488 TRANSPORT489 TRAP490 T.V.491 TWELVE492 TWENTY493 TWIN494 TWO495 TYPE496 TYPING497 TYRE498 ULTRASONIC499 UNDER500 UNIT501 UP502 UPPER503 UPSTAIRS504 USER505 UTILITY506 VAN507 VARIABLE508 VAULT509 VENTILATOR510 VISUAL511 VOLTAGE512 WAITING513 WALK514 WALL515 WARD516 WAREHOUSE517 WASH518 WATER519 WAY520 W.C.521 WEAPON522 WEEKEND523 WEST524 WINDOW525 WINTER526 WITH527 WOOD528 WOODWORK529 WORK530 WORKS531 WORKSHOP532 X-RAY533 YARD534 YEAR535 YELLOW536 ZERO537 ZONE538 ZOO
Library (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
A-4

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-1Appendix B: SIA and Contact ID Event CodesEvent Codes
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
A – Alarm Cause
AC Alarm Cause ALM CAUSE User report alarm cause USER ALWAYS TR None
A – AC Power
AR AC Restoral AC FAIL- AC Fail zone restored ZONE 13.ELEC.ST 301
CU-AC- Control Unit AC restred ZONE 13.ELEC.ST 301
AC FAIL- Module AC fail restored MOD. 13.ELEC.ST 301
STAND LOW- St andby Battery Low MOD 13.ELEC.ST 301
CU FUSE- Control Unit fuse rest. MISC 9.T AMPER 300
13. ELEC.ST
AT AC Trouble AC FAIL+ AC Fail zone trouble ZONE 13.ELEC.ST 301
CU-AC+ Control Unit AC trouble ZONE 13.ELEC.ST 301
AC FAIL+ Module AC fail trouble MOD. 13.ELEC.ST 301
STAND LOW+ St andby Battery Low MOD 13.ELEC ST 301
CU FUSE+ Control Unit fuse trouble MISC 9. T AMPER 300
13.ELEC ST
FUSE AUX1 Aux1 fuse trouble MOD 9.T AMPER 300
13.ELEC ST
FUSE AUX2 Aux2 fuse trouble MOD 9.T AMPER 300
13.ELEC ST
FUSE BELL Bell fuse trouble MOD 9.T AMPER 300
13.ELEC ST
B – Burglary
BA Burglary Alarm ENTRY Entry zone alarm ZONE NONE 150
EXIT+ Exit zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
INTRUDER+ Intruder zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
24 HOURS+ 24 hour zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 135
SECURITY+ Security zone alarm ZONE 4.SECURITY 135
DUAL+ Dual zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
FINAL Final zone alarm ZONE NONE 150
SEC FINAL+ Secure final zone alarm ZONE 4.SECURITY 134
PRT FINAL+ Part final zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
PRT ENTRY+ Part entry zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
BEAM PAIR+ Beam pair zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
VIDEO+ Video zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
VIDEO EXT+ Video exit zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
CUSTOM A+ Custom A zone alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON 130
CUSTOM B+ Custom B zone alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON 130
MASK+ Mask zone alarm ZONE 4.SECURITY 135
INT DELAY Intruder Delay alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 150
URGENT+ Urgent zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 130
VIBRATION+ Vibration zone alarm ZONE 2.INTRUDE 133
ATM-1+ A TM-1 zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
ATM-2+ A TM-2 zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
ATM-3+ A TM-3 zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
ATM-4+ A TM-4 zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
ALARM EXT+ Extend zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 130
T/O BURGL+ Entry timeout with zone ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-2Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
BB Burg Bypass OMITTED Zone omitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
GRP OMIT+ Group omitted USER 8.OMIT 574
OMIT VIBS Omit Vibration zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM1+ Omit ATM-1 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM2+ Omit ATM-2 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM3+ Omit ATM-3 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM4+ Omit ATM-4 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
BC Burg Cancel KSW CANCL Keyswitch Cancel ZONE 11.RESET 406
CANCEL Cancel by user USER 1 1.RESET 406
BF Intruder High INTR HIGH Intruder zone alarm ZONE 2. INTRUDE 130
BJ Burg Troub rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
RF SUPER- RF Supervision Failure ZONE 15.TROUBL 381
BL Intruder Low INTR LOW Intruder zone alarm ZONE 2. INTRUDE 130
BR Burglary Rest EXIT- Exit zone type restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
18.ZN RESTO
INTRUDER- Intruder zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
24 HOURS- 24 hour zone restored ZONE 3.24 HOURS 135
18.ZN RESTO
SECURITY- Security zone restored ZONE 4.SECURITY 135
18.ZN RESTO
DUAL- Dual zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
SEC FINAL- Secure final zone rest. ZONE 4.SECURITY 134
18.ZN RESTO
PRT FINAL- Part final zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
18.ZN RESTO
PRT ENTRY- Part entry zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
18.ZN RESTO
BEAM PAIR- Beam pair zone rest. ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
VIDEO- Video zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
VIDEO EXT- Video exit zone rest. ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
CUSTOM A- Custom A zone rest. ZONE 5.CUS ZON 130
18.ZN RESTO
CUSTOM B- Custom B zone rest. ZONE 5.CUS ZON 130
18.ZN RESTO
MASK- Mask zone restored ZONE 4.SECURITY 135
18.ZN RESTO
INT ALARM- Intruder Delay restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 130
18.ZN RESTO
URGENT- Urgent zone restored ZONE 3.24 HOURS 130
18.ZN RESTO
VIBRATION- Vibration zone restored ZONE 2.INTRUDE 133
18.ZN RESTO

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-3Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
ATM-1- ATM-1 zone restored ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
ATM-2- ATM-2 zone restored ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
ATM-3- ATM-3 zone restored ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
ATM-4- ATM-4 zone alarm ZONE 3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
ALARM EXT- Alarm extend zone rest. ZONE 3.24 HOURS 130
18.ZN RESTO
T/0 BURGL- Entry timeout restore ZONE 2.INTRUDE 134
18.ZN RESTO
BT Burg. Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
RF SUPER+ RF Supervision Failure ZONE 15.TROUBL 381
MASKED Zone masked ZONE 15.TROUBLE 380
BU Burg Unbypass GRP OMIT- Group unomitted USER 8.OMIT 574
OMIT-ATM1- Unomit ATM-1 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM2- Unomit ATM-2 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM3- Unomit ATM-3 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
OMIT-ATM4- Unomit ATM-4 zone EVENT 8.OMIT 572
FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
BV Burg Confirm CONFIRM 2 independant alarms EVENT 2.INTRUDE None
BX EXIT Exit zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
INTRUDER Intruder zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
24 HOURS 24 hour zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
SECURITY Security zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
DUAL Dual zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ENTRY Entry zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PUSH SET Push set zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
KEYSWITCH Keyswitch zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
SEC FINAL Secure final zone test. ZONE NOT SENT 611
PRT FINAL Part final zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PRT ENTRY Part entry zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PA PA zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PA SILENT PA silent zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PA DELAY PA delay zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PA DEL/SL PA delay sil zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
LINK Link zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
SPARE Spare zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
TAMPER T amper zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
BELL TAMP Bell tamper zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
BEAM PAIR Beam pair zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
BATT LOW Battery Low zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
LINE FAIL Line fail zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
AC FAIL AC fail zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
LOG Log zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
RM ACCESS Rem acc zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-4Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy ContactEvent Codes (cont’d)
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
VIDEO Video zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
VIDEO EXT Video exit zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
INT DELAY Intrud delay zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
SEC DELAY Security del zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
SET LOG Set Log zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
CUSTOM A Custom A zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
CUSTOM B Custom B zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
EXITGUARD Exitguard zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
MASK Mask zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
URGENT Urgent zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
PA UNSET PA unset zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
KSW RESET Ksw. reset zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
VIBRATION Vibration zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ATM-1 ATM-1 zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ATM-2 ATM-2 zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ATM-3 ATM-3 zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ATM-4 ATM-4 zone tested ZONE NOT SENT 611
ALARM EXT Alarm extend zone test. ZONE NOT SENT 611
SOAK TEST Soak test zone act ZONE NOT SENT 611
C – Closing
CA Closing Report FULL SET Automatic Set EVENT 10.SETTING 401
C E Closing Extend EXTENSION Auto arm exten. delay USER 10.SETTING 464
PREWARN Auto arm prewarn delay MISC NEVER TR 464
CG Close Area PART SET Part set by user USER 10.SETTING 441
KSW P/SET Part set by user KSSET 10.SETTING 442
C I Fail to Set FAIL SET Fail to Set EVENT 7. SET FAULT 454
CJ Late to Set LATE SET Late to Set EVENT 10.SETTING 454
CL Closing Report FULL SET Full set USER 10.SETTING 401
FULL SET Set by keypad EVENT 10.SETTING 401
KSW SET Keyswitch set ZONE 10.SETTING 409
C P Auto. Closing REARM Rearm after alarm EVENT 10.SETTING 463
CR Recent Close RECEN.SET Previous alarm was within 5 mins of set EVENT 2.INTRUDER 459
CT Late to Open TIMEOUT Entry timeout EVENT 10.SETTING None
D – Access
DD Acces Denied Invalid Card MAX tag unknown MOD. 17.MAXTAG 421
DF Door Forced MAX ALARM Door contact broken MOD. 4.SECURITY 423
17.MAXTAG
DCM EVENT Door contact broken MOD. 4.SECURITY 423
DG Acces Granted LEGAL CD Legal code entered USER 16.LOG 462
LEGAL CD ATM code entered USER 16.LOG 462
Valid MAX tag accepted USER 17.MAXTAG 422
DK Acces Lockout ILL-CODE Illegal code entry USER 16.LOG 421
REJECT CARD Illegal MAX tag USER 17.MAXTAG 421
FOB REJECT Illegal Fob ZONE 10.SETTING 421

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-5Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
DK Access Lockout DCM EVENT Invalid Card Reader Lockout USER 16.LOG 421
10.SETTING17.MAXTAG
DT Door propped DOOR PROP MAX – Door left open MOD. 4.SECURITY 426
E – System T rouble
E R Mod Removed REMOVED Module Removed MOD T AMPER 532
ET RF NVM Fail RF MEM! RF NVM RAM Fail MOD T AMPER 333
F – Fire
FA Fire Alarm FIRE+ Fire zone alarm ZONE 6.FIRE 110
FB Fire Bypass OMITTED Fire zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FJ Fire Troub rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
FR Fire Restoral FIRE- Fire zone restored ZONE 6.FIRE 110
18.ZN RESTO
FT Fire Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
FU Fire Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FX Fire Test FIRE Fire zone tested ZONE NOT SENT None
SOAK TEST Soak test fire zone act ZONE NOT SENT None
G – Gas (Custom SIA – See Note 2)
GA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
GB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT Note 1
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT Note 1
GJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL Note 1
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL Note 1
GR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
GT Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL Note 1
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL Note 1
GU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT Note 1
H – Holdup
HA Holdup Alarm PA SILENT+ PA Silent zone alarm ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
PA DEL/SL+ PA Delay Sil.zone alarm ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
DURESS Duress with code USER 1.P A/DURE 121
PA UNSET+ PA Unset zone alarm ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
HB Holdup Bypass OMITTED Holdup zone omitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
HJ Hold Troub rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HR Hold Restoral PA SILENT- PA Silent zone restored ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
18.ZN RESTO
PA DEL/SL- PA Delay Sil.zone rest. ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
18.ZN RESTO
PA UNSET- PA Unset zone restored ZONE 1.P A/DURE 122
18.ZN RESTO
HT Holdup Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HU Hold Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-6Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
J – Wrong code, Time changed
JA Code Tamper WRONG CD Wrong code alarm act. MOD. 9.T AMPER 461
Invalid Code INV ALID CD Invalid Code entered MOD. ALWAYS TR None
JL LOG 90% MISC Always TR 632
JR TIMER A MISC NONE 0
TIMER B MISC NONE 0
AUTOTIMER MISC NONE 0
LOCKTIMER MISC NONE 0
JT Time changed NEW T/D Time/Date modified USER ALWAYS TR3625
K – Heat (Custom SIA – See Note 2)
KA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
KB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
KJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
KR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
KT Trouble LOW RES+ Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
KU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
L – Phone, Program
LB Program begin ENGINEER+ Engineer mode entered MISC ALWAYS TR 627
TEST O/P USER NONE 0
FULL TEST SET NONE 0
MOD T/D USER NONE 0
MOD CODES USER NONE 0
MOD REM USER NONE 0
OMIT ZONE USER NONE 0
ENG PARAM USER NONE 0
ENG ZONES USER NONE 0
ENG O/PS USER NONE 0
ENG LINKS USER NONE 0
ENG SOAK USER NONE 0
ENG DIGI USER NONE 0
ENG PRINT USER NONE 0
ENG QUICK USER NONE 0
ENG DIAG USER NONE 0
ENG GROUP USER NONE 0
ENG ASSEM USER NONE 0
ENG TMRS USER NONE 0
ENG CHECK USER NONE 0
LR Line Restore LINE FAIL – Zone Tel line fail rest. ZONE 12.MD/COM 351
LINE FAIL – Module Tel line fail rest . MOD 12.MD/COM 351
LT Line Trouble LINE FAIL+ Zone Tel line fail trouble ZONE 12.MD/COM 351
LINE FAIL+ Mod Tel line fail trouble MOD 12.MD/COM 351
LX Local Prog end ENGINEER- Engineer mode exited EVENT ALWAYS TR 627Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-7M – Medical (Custom SIA – See note 2)
MA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
MB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
MJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
M R Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
MT Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
M U Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
O – Opening
OA Open Report UNSET Automatic Unset EVENT 10.SETTING 401
OG Open Area UNSET Part Unset USER 10.SETTING 401
KSW UNSET Keyswitch part unset ZONE 10.SETTING 409
OK Early Open U/S EARLY Unset Early EVENT 10.SETTING 451
OP Open Report UNSET Unset USER 10.SETTING 401
KSW UNSET Keyswitch unset ZONE 10.SETTING 409
OR Disarm alarm SYS RESET All Burglar alarms reset USER 1 1.RESET 313
PA RESET All PA alarms reset USER 1.P A/DURE 465
TAMP RST All Tamper alarms reset USER 9.T AMPER 313
SYS RESET Ksw reset Burglar alarm EVENT 1 1.RESET 313
PA RESET Ksw reset PA alarms EVENT 1.P A/DURE 465
TAMP RESET Ksw reset Tamp alarm EVENT 9.T AMPER 313
LF RESET USER 20.FAULT 313
FAULT RST USER 20.FAULT 313
PF RESET USER 20.FAULT 313Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-8Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
P – Panic
PA Panic Alarm PA+ PA zone alarm ZONE 1.P A/DURE 120
DELAY ALM+ PA Delay zone alarm ZONE 1.P A/DURE 120
PB Panic Bypass OMITTED PA zone omitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
PJ Pan Troub rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
P R Panic Restoral PA- PA zone restored ZONE 1.P A/DURE 120
18.ZN RESTO
DELAY ALM- PA Delay zone restored ZONE 1.P A/DURE 120
18.ZN RESTO
P T Panic Trouble LOW RES+ Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
P U Panic Unbypas FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
Q – Assist (Custom SIA – see note 2)
QA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
QB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
QJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
QR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
QT Trouble LOW RES+ Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
QU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
R – Remote,Log,T est
RB REM LOG USER NONE 0
REM RESET USER NONE 0
REM ID USER NONE 0REM COPY USER NONE 0
REM OVRWR USER NONE 0
REM MSG USER NONE 0
COPY SITE MODULE NONE 0
OVWR SITE MODULE NONE 0
RC Relay closed LINK – Link zone closed ZONE 16.LOG 150
LOG – Log zone closed ZONE 16.LOG 150
LOG DELAY – Log delay zone closed ZONE 16.LOG 150
CUSTOM A – Zone closed(Non alarm) ZONE 16.LOG 150
CUSTOM B- Zone closed(Non alarm) ZONE 16.LOG 150
EXITGUARD- Exitguard zone closed ZONE 16.LOG 150Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-9Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
RD Prog, denied RMACCESS+ Zone denied rem. acc ZONE 14.MEN AC 553
RO Relay open BELL FAIL Bell fail zone opened ZONE 16. LOG 150
KEYSWITCH KS NONE 150
LINK+ Link zone opened ZONE 16.LOG 150
LOG+ Log zone opened ZONE 16.LOG 150
LOG DELAY+ Log delay zone opened ZONE 16.LOG 150
NOT USED ZONE 16. LOG 150
SET LOG ZONE 16. LOG 150
CUSTOM A+ Zone opend(Non alarm) ZONE 16.LOG 150
CUSTOM B+ Zone opend(Non alarm) ZONE 16.LOG 150
EXITGUARD+ Exitguard zone opened ZONE 16.LOG 150
PUSH SET Push set zone opened ZONE NONE 150
KSW RESET KS NONE 150
SP ARE Spare zone opened ZONE 16. LOG 150
R P Automatic test AUTOTEST Automatic test EVENT ALWAYS TR 602
RR Power Up MEMORY OK Warm start of panel EVENT 13.ELEC ST 305
RS Prog, success RM ACCESS- Zone allowed rem acc ZONE 14.MEN AC 553
REM CALL Remote call complete MOD 14.MEN AC 412
RX Manual test ENG TEST Engineer test USER ALWAYS TR 601
S – Sprinker (Custom SIA – see note 2)
SA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
SB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
SJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
SR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
ST Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
SU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
T – T amper ,Test
TA Tamper Alarm T AMPER+ T amper zone alarm ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
BELL TAMP+ Bell Tamper zone alarm ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
LID TAMP+ Lid Tamper alarm ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
AUX TAMP+ Auxilary Tamper alarm ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
TAMP S/C+ T amper short circuit ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
TAMP O/C+ Tamper open circuit ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
TAMPER+ Module Tamper MOD 9.T AMPER 145
MISSING+ Missing module alarm MOD 9.T AMPER 145
CV TAMP+ Volt age tamper on zone ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
MAX TAMP+ MAX Module Tamper MOD. 9.T AMPER 145
WALL TAMP Wall tamper zone alarm ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
MASK TAMP ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
DCM EVENT Invalid Card Tamper alarm MOD. 9.T AMPER None
ADDED Module Added MOD. 9.T AMPER 531
ENG TAMP+ Engineering Tamper MISC 9.T AMPER None
T E Test End WALK TEST- Walk test finished USER 14.MEN AC 607Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-10Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
TR Tamper Restor T AMPER- T amper zone restored ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
18.ZN RESTO
BELL TAMP- Bell Tamper zone rest. ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
18.ZN RESTO
LID TAMP- Lid Tamper restored ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
18.ZN RESTO
AUX TAMP- Auxilary Tamper rest. ZONE 9.TAMPER 137
18.ZN RESTO
TAMP S/C- T amper s/circuit rest. ZONE 9.T AMPER 383
18.ZN RESTO
TAMP O/C- T amper o/circuit rest. ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
18.ZN RESTO
TAMPER- Module Tamper rest. MOD 9.T AMPER 145
18.ZN RESTO
MISSING- Missing module rest. MOD 9.T AMPER 145
18.ZN RESTO
CV TAMP- Voltage tamper rest. ZONE 9.TAMPER 383
18.ZN RESTO
MAX TAMP- MAX Module Tamp rest MOD. 9.T AMPER 145
18.ZN RESTO
ENG TAMP- Engineer Tamper MISC 9.T AMPER None
18.ZN RESTO
TS Test Start WALK TEST+ Walk test started USER 14.MEN AC 607
ARC TEST TEST ALWAYS TR 607
V -??
V Y PRINT OC USER NONE 0
PRINT OL MISC NONE 0
W – W ater(Custom SIA – see note 2)
WA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
WB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
WJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
WR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
WT Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
WU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-11Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
X – RF
XQ RF Jam RF JAM+ RF Signal Jammed MOD 15.TROUBLE 344
XT RF Batt Low RF BATLOW+ RF Battery Low ZONE 13.ELEC ST 384
15.TROUBLE
XH RF Jam Restore RF JAM- RF Jam Restore MOD 15.TROUBLE 344
XR RF Batt Lo Rst RF BATLOW- RF Battery Low Restore ZONE 13.ELEC ST 384
15.TROUBLE
Y
YC Comms Fail internal to tel Tel module lost RS485 EVENT ALWAYS TR 350
YF Panel Cold Start MEM RESET Power Up Panel MISC 13.ELEC ST None
YK Comm Restoral internal to tel Tel module rest. RS485 EVENT ALWAYS TR 350
YL +AC+ Batt Fail +AC+BATT Mai ns fail and batt low EVENT 13.ELEC ST None
YP PSU fail PSU FLT+ Power Supply Unit fault EVENT 13.ELEC ST 314
YR Sys Batt Rest .BATT LOW- Battery Low restored ZONE 13.ELEC ST 302
CU BATT- Control unit batt restore ZONE 13.ELEC ST 302
BATT LOW- Mod Battery Low rest MOD 13.ELEC ST 302
BATT FUSE- Battery Fuse restored MOD 13.ELEC ST 302
YT Sys Batt Troub BATT LOW+ Battery Low ZONE 13.ELEC ST 302
CU BATT+ Control unit Battery Low ZONE 13.ELEC ST 302
BATT LOW+ Module Battery Low MOD 13.ELEC ST 302
BATT FUSE+ Battery Fuse blown MOD 13.ELEC ST 302
FUSE A2P MOD 13.ELEC ST 302
Z – Freezer (Custom SIA – see note 2)
ZA Alarm Note 1 zone in alarm ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
ZB Bypass OMITTED zone ommitted ZONE 8.OMIT 573
FORCEOMT+ Force omit after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
ZJ Trouble Rest LOW RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES- Restor zone resistance ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
ZR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored ZONE 5.CUS ZON Note 1
18.ZN RESTO
ZT Trouble LOW RES + Low resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
HIGH RES+ High resistance on zone ZONE 15.TROUBL 380
ZU Unbypass FORCE OMT- Unomitted after rearm ZONE 8.OMIT 573
00 – Non-reported Events
00 SUSP. SET USER NONE 0
00 BEGIN SET USER NONE 0
00 INST SET USER NONE 0
00 ENT UNSET UNSET NONE 0
00 ENT SETTING USER NONE 0
00 ENT DELAY USER NONE 0
00 ENT SET USER NONE 0
00 ENT UNSTG USER NONE 0
00 ABORT SET USER NONE 0
00 AUDIBLE MISC NONE 0
00 JAM DELAY MISC NONE 0
00 FB BATLOW USER NONE 0Event Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
B-12Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event Ev Type Galaxy Contact
Description Event Description Trigger ID Event
00 DIAG REC LIST NONE 0
00 LOC WRITE LIST NONE 0
00 REM WR/RD LIST NONE 0
00 DIAG CHK LIST NONE 0
00 DISCHARGE ZONE 13.ELEC ST 0
00 ETST PASS USER NONE 0
00 ETST FAIL MISC NONE 0
00 OVERRIDE MISC NONE 0
00 R. TIMESET MISC NONE 0
00 CU-RIO.SW MISC NONE 0
00 CLBK1 ERR USER NONE 0
00 REM TRY USER NONE 0
00 REM FIN USER NONE 0
00 REM ABORT USER NONE 0
00 REM FAIL USER NONE 0
Note 1 : Dependant upon zone type selected
Note 2: Custom SIA event allow existing zone types to be modified in order to send specific SIA events from the panel. This all ows more
specific SIA information to be transmitted. The zones used to programme the custom SIA events will continue to function as per the zone
descriptionEvent Codes (cont’d)

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
C-1Appendix C: SIA Event StructureSIA Event Structure
tnevE
epyTAIS
LEVEL.CCA
kcolBtamroFkcolBATAD
)edockcolbN()edockcolbA(tamroFkcolBiicsAn oitanalpxE
ENOZ4 ,3x xxxxx#z zzzVE/xxir/xx:xxitNd dddddddddddddddiiiiiiiiseeeeeeeeeAc tehctiwsyek,demralarotceteD
2x xxxxx#z zzzVE/xxir/xx:xxitN
1x xxxxx#z zzzVEN
0x xxx#z zzzVEN
resU4 ,3x xxxxx#V E/xxxip/uuudi/xxir/xx:xxitNd dddddiiiiiiiiseeeeeeeeeAc te,sserud,teser,tesnU/teSresU
2x xxxxx#V E/xxxip/uuudi/xxir/xx:xxitN
1x xxxxx#m mmVEN
0x xxx#m mmVEN
eludoM4 ,3x xxxxx#V E/mmmip/xxir/xx:xxitNd ddiiiiiiiiseeeeeeeeeA: reifidomirhtiW.1
edoctuohtiwyekBroAhtiwteS
:reifidomirtuohtiW.2
ctegnissimoiR,deddadapyeK2x xxxxx#V E/mmmip/xxir/xx:xxitN
1x xxxxx#m mmVEN
0x xxx#m mmVEN
tnevE4 ,3x xxxxx#V E/xxir/xx:xxitNi iiiiiiiseeeeeeeeeA: reifidomirhtiW.1
detavitcaremit,tescitamotuA
:reifidomirtuohtiW.2
edomreenigne,tsetcitamotuA2x xxxxx#V E/xxir/xx:xxitN
1x xxxxx#V EN
0x xxx#0 00VEN
:yeK
kcolBataD kcolBiicsA
it reifidomemiT e )deilppuselbatnitnevEgoLyxalaGees,srahc9(tnevegoL
ir eraspuorgfidesuton(reifidompuorG
)delbasids )DESUTON:'',FFO:'-',NO:'+'(etatstnevE
di reifidomresU i )knalbebnac-etisfonoitpircsedrahc8(reifitnedietiS
u rebmunresU d ,)tneveebircsedottxetlanoitidda(rotpircseD
ip reifidomlarehpieP rotpircsedenozrahc61-tnevEenoZ.1
m rebmunlarehpireP emanresurahc6-tnevEresU.2
VE )deilppustsiltneveAISees(epyTedoCtnevE ,emaneludomrahc3-tnevEeludoM.3
z rebmunenoZ 'OIR' ',)eludomenoz8( 'YEK ',)dapyek( 'XAM ytimixorP(
redaeR 'MOC' )232SRtxE=2MOC,moceleTtnI=1MOC(
moceleTtxE=5MOC,tenrehtE=4MOC,NDSI=3MOC
)232SRtnI=6MOC
x dleifreifidomrofstigidmumixam

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
C-2

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-1Appendix D: Event Log MessagesEvent Log
NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
0001 + CU-BATT Control Unit Standby Battery Low has occurred (battery voltage below 10.5 Vd.c.).13. Elec Status
20. FaultM
0001 – CU-BATT Control Unit Standby Battery Low has finished (battery voltage now above 10.5 Vd.c.). 13. Elec. Status M0002 + CU-AC Control Unit Mains (a.c.) Power Fail has occurred.13. Elec. Status
20. FaultM
0002 – CU-AC Control Unit Mains (a.c.) Power Fail has finished. 13. Elec. Status M
0003 + LID TAMP Lid T amper on control unit has occurred. 9. T amper M
0003 – LID TAMP Lid T amper on control unit has finished.9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
0004 + AUX TAMP Auxiliary T amper on control unit has occurred. 9. T amper M
0004 – AUX TAMP Auxiliary T amper on control unit has finished.9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
+ABORT SET Setting process aborted 11. Reset NM+AC+BATT AC Fail and battery voltage low.13. Elec. Status
20. FaultM
+ AC FAIL AC Fail zone activated (opened) or an AC Fail on a Power Supply Unit.13. Elec. Status
20. FaultM
– AC FAILAC Fail zone de-activated (closed) or an AC Fail on a Power Supply Unit has
stopped.13. Elec. status
20. FaultM
+ALARM EXT Alarm extend zone activated.3. 24 Hours
16. Log ZoneM
ALM CAUSE Reset of system required by entry of an alarm cause code. Always TR M
ADDED Engineer has added a module to the system. 9. T amper M
ARC TEST Alarm Receiving Centre T est Always TR NM
+ATM-1 ATM-1 zone activated.3. 24 Hours
16. Log ZoneNM
+ATM-2 ATM-2 zone activated.3. 24 Hours
16. Log ZoneNM
+ATM-3 ATM-3 zone activated.3. 24 Hours
16. Log ZoneNM
+ATM-4 ATM-4 zone activated.3. 24 Hours
16. Log ZoneNM
AUTOTEST Automatic T est of the system via a comms module Always TR
+AUTOTIMER Autoset timer activated. None NM
–AUTOTIMER Autoset timer de-activated. None NM
BURG HIGH High priority intruder alarm zone open2. Intrude
18. Zone RestoralM
BURG LOW Low priority intruder alarm zone open.2. Intrude
18. Zone RestoralM
+BAT FUSE Battery fuse on Power Supply Unit blown.13. Elec Status
20. FaultM
+ BATT LOW Battery Low activated on Power Supply Unit.13. Elec. status
20. FaultM
– BATT LOW Battery Low de-activated on Power Supply Unit.13. Elec. status
20. FaultM
+BEAM PAIR Beam Pair zones activated (opened). 2. Intruder NM
+BEGIN SET Setting process started. None NM
+ BELL FAIL Bell Fail zone opened. 16. Log Zone NM+ BELL TAMP Bell T amper zone activated (opened). 9. T amper M
– BELL TAMP Bell T amper zone de-activated (closed).9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
BOOT UP System has been started up or restarted. 13. Elec. status NM
CANCEL Alarm activation Cancelled by a valid user Code (system or Group(s) still Set). 11. Reset/Cancel NM
COMM FAIL Communication Failure has occurred on a comms module. 20. Fault M
CONFIRM Two independent alarms. 2. Intruder M
COPY SITERemote Copy of the Site (system) has occurred via Remote Servicing or the RS232
Module.None NM
CUSTOM-A Custom-A zone activated (opened).5. Custom zones
16. Log ZoneNM
CUSTOM-B Custom-B zone activated (opened).5. Custom Zones
16. Log ZoneNM
+CU-FUSE Control Unit Fuse trouble.9. T amper
13. Elec Status
20. FaultM
DELAY ALM PA Delay Alarm zone activated after PA Delay timeout. 1. PA/duress M
DL/SL ALM PA Delayed Silent zone activated after PA Delay timeout. 1. PA/duress M
DOOR PROP MAX – Door left open 4. Security NM
DR MASKED Detector masked. Activity monitoring of zone has failed.15. Trouble
20. FaultM
DUAL Dual (Double Knock) zone activated (opened). 2. Intruder M

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-2Event Log (cont’d)
NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
DURESS Duress code has been entered. 1. PA/Duress M
ENG ASSEM Engineering Assemble Zone menu (Menu Option 64) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access MENG CHECK Engineering Pre-Check menu (Menu Option 66) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access MENG DIAG Engineering Diagnostics menu (Menu Option 61) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG DIGI Engineering Digicom (Communications) (Menu Option 56) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG GROUP Engineering Groups (Menu Option 63) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG KPAD Engineering Keypad (Menu Option 58) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG LINKS Engineering Links (Menu Option 54) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG O/PS Engineering Outputs (Menu Option 53) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG PARAM Engineering Parameters (Menu Option 51) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG PRINT Engineering Print (Menu Option 57) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG QUICK Engineering Quick Menu (Menu Option 59) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
ENG SOAK Engineering Soak T est (Menu Option 55) has been accessed 14. Menu Access M
ENG TEST Engineer T est of the system via the T elecom Module. Always TR NMENG TMRS Engineering Timers A/B (Menu Option 65) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access MENG ZONES Engineering Zones (Menu Option 52) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access MENG TAMP T amper when entering Engineer Mode. None NM+ENGINEER Entering Engineer mode. Always TR NM
–ENGINEER Leaving Engineer mode. Always TR NM
ENT DELAY User entering Ent Delay State None NMENT SET User entering Ent Set State None NMENT SETNG User entering Setting State None NMENT UNSET User entering Unset State None NMENT UNSTG User entering Unsetting State None NM+ENTRY Entry zone activated (opened) during Setting/Unsetting procedure or when Set. None NM
–ENTRY Entry zone de-activated (closed) during Setting/Unsetting procedure or when Set. None NM
ETST FAIL Engineer test has failed None NMETST PASS Engineer test has passed None NM+EXIT Exit zone activated (opened) during the Unsetting procedure or when Set. 2. Intruder NM
–EXIT Exit zone de-activated (closed) during the Unsetting procedure or when Set. 2. Intruder NM
EXITGUARD ExitGuard zone activated (opened). 16. Log NM
EXTENSION System or Group(s) are in the Autoset Extension period. 10. Setting NM
FAIL SET Fail to set event. 7. Set Fault M
+FAULT Fault condition activated on zone 20. Fault M
–FAULT Fault condition cleared from zone 20. Fault M
FAULT RST Fault has been cleared 20. Fault NM
FB BATLOW RF Fob has low battery None NM

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-3NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.Event Log (cont’d)
KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
+FINAL Final zone activated (opened) during Setting/Unsetting procedure or when Set. 7. Set Fault NM
–FINAL Final zone de-activated (closed) during Setting/Unsetting procedure or when Set. 7. Set Fault NM
FIRE Fire zone activated (opened). 6. Fire M
FOB REJCT Illegal fob None M
FORCE OMT Force Omit of a zone (Menu Option 14). 8. Omit M
FULL SET Full Set (Menu Option 12) of the system or Group(s). 10. Setting MFULL TEST Full T est (Menu Option 62) has occurred. None NM
FUSE 14.5 Fault with 14.5V fuse on Power Supply Unit13. Elec. Status
20. FaultM
FUSE AUX1 Fault with AUX1 fuse on Power Supply Unit9. T amper
13. Elec. FaultM
FUSE AUX2 Fault with AUX2 fuse on Power Supply Unit9. T amper
13. Elec. StatusM
FUSE BELL Fault with Bell Fuse on Power Supply Unit9. T amper
13. Elec. StatusM
+GRP OMIT Group Omit has occurred (Group(s) has been omitted). 8. Omit M
–GRP OMIT Group Omit has finished (Group(s) has been un-omitted). 8. Omit M
+HIGH RES Zone changing to High Resistance (1200 to 1300 Ohm) Engineer Log only. 15. Trouble M
–HIGH RES Zone changing from High Resistance to Normal Closed (1300 to 1200 Ohm) Eng. Log only 15. Trouble M
ILL -CODE Illegal code entry 16. Log Zone NM
+INST SET Instant set of system or group None NM
INTRUDER Intruder zone activated (opened)2. Intruder
18. Zone restoralM
INT DELAY Intruder delay zone activated (opened) None M
INVALD CD Invalid Code entered None NM
JAM DELAY RF jam signal sent to panel None M
KEYSWITCH Keyswitch zone activated (opened) None NM
KSW CANCL Keyswitch Cancels alarm activation (system or Group(s) still Set). 11. Reset/Cancel NMKSW P/SET Keyswitch part sets the system or group(s) 10. Setting M
KSW RESET Keyswitch resets the system or group(s) None NM
KSW SET Keyswitch full sets the system or group(s) 10. Setting M
KSW UNSET Keyswitch unsets the systems or group)s) 10. Setting M
LATE SET Late Set of the system or group(s) 10. Setting NMLEGAL CD Legal code entered 16. Log Zone NM
LF RESET Line Fail Reset has occured 20. Fault NM
LID TAMP Lid T amper alarm 9. T amper M
+LINE FAIL Comms Module Line fail has occured or a Line Fail zone activated (opened)12. Modules/Comms
20. FaultM
–LINE FAIL Comms Module Line fail has finished or a Line Fail zone de-activated (closed)12. Modules/Comms
20. FaultM
+LINK Link zone activated (opened) 16. Log Zone NM
–LINK Link zone de-activated (closed) 16. Log Zone NM

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-4Event Log (cont’d)
NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
LOC WRITE Diagnostics local write event None M
+LOCKTIMER Lockout timer activated. None NM
–LOCKTIMER Lockout timer de-activated. None NM
+LOG Log zone activated (opened). 16. Log NM
–LOG Log zone de-activated (closed). 16. Log NM
LOG 90% Event log 90% full Always TR NM
LOG DELAY Log Delay zone has been activated (opened) for longer than the Delay Alarm time. 16. Log NM
+LOW RES Zone changing to low resistance (900 to 800 Ohm). 15. Trouble M
–LOW RES Zone changing from Low Resistance to Normal Closed (800 to 900 Ohm). 15. Trouble M
+LOW VOLTS Voltage of AUX outputs has dropped below 10V. 13. Elec Status
15. TroubleM
+MASK Mask zone activated (opened). 4. Security M
–MASK Mask zone de-activated (closed). 4. Security
18. Zone restoralM
MASKED Zone masked. Detector has activated its masking output. 15. Trouble
20. FaultM
MAX ALARM MAX alarm — door forced. 4. Security
17. Max T agM
MAX TAMP MAX T amper 9. T amper M
MEM RESET Memory Reset (Restart) to factory default settings (Cold Start). 13. Elec Status NM
+MISSING Module Missing its AB (RS485) communications. 9. T amper M
–MISSING Module that was Missing now has its AB (RS485) communications re-established. 9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
MOD CODES Modify Codes menu (Menu Option 42) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
MOD REM Remote Servicing menu (Menu Option 47) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access NM
MOD SUMMR Modify Summer menu (Menu Option 43) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access NM
MOD T/D Modify Time/Date menu (Menu Option 42) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access M
MOD TMRS Modify Timers Control menu (Menu Option 45) has been accessed. 14. Menu Access NMNEW T/D New Time/Date after modification. Always TR M
OMIT ATM1 Omit all ATM1 zones. 8. Omit M
OMIT ATM2 Omit all ATM2 zones. 8. Omit M
OMIT ATM3 Omit all ATM3 zones. 8. Omit M
OMIT ATM4 Omit all ATM4 zones. 8. Omit M
OMIT VIBS Mass omit of vibration zones. 8. Omit M
OMIT ZONE Omit zones menu (menu option 0 in Quick Menu or menu option 11 in Full Menu has been
accessed.None M
OMITTED Zone has been omitted 8. Omit M
OVERRIDE Event has been overridden to set the system None M
OVWR SITE Remote overwrite of the site has occured via Remote Servicing or RS232 module None M
P.AUDIBLE PA Audible zone activated (opened). None NM
PA PA zone activated (opened) 1. PA/Duress M

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-5Event Log (cont’d)
NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
PA DEL/SL PA Delayed Silent zone activated (opened). 1. PA/Duress M
PA DELAY PA Delayed zone activated (opened). 1. PA/Duress MPA RESET PA Reset has occurred. 1. PA/Duress NMPA SILENT PA Silent zone activated (opened). 1. PA/Duress M
PA UNSET PA Unset zone activated while group in unset condition. 1. PA/Duress M
PART SET Part Set of system or Group(s). 10. Setting M
PF RESET System has returned to the set status after a power failure. 20. Fault NMPREWARN System or Group(s) in the Autoset Prewarning period. None NMPRINT OC Print On Command. None NM
PRINT OLPrint On Line, the automatic printing of the Event Log. Not to be confused with the
printer on-line message from a printer.None NM
+PRT ENTRY Part Entry zone activated (opened). 2. Intruder NM
–PRT ENTRY Part Entry zone de-activated (closed).2. Intruder
18. Zone restoralNM
+PRT FINAL Part Final zone activated (opened). 2. Intruder NM
–PRT FINAL Part Final zone de-activated (closed).2. Intruder
18. Zone restoralNM
+PSU FLT Power Supply Unit fault13. Elec. Status
20. FaultM
PUSH SET Push Set (Exit T erminator) zone activated (opened). None NM
R.TIMESET Remote timeset. None NM
REARM Rearm of system has occurred. 10. Setting M
RECEN.SET Recent Set. Alarm occured within 5 minutes of set. 2. Intruder M
REM ABORT Remote connection timeout. None NM
+REM CALL Remote device connected. 14. menu access NM
–REM CALL Remote device disconnected. 14. Menu access NM
REM COPY Remote Copy of site details via SIA has occurred. None NM
REM FAIL Remote failure after all retries. None NM
REM FIN Remote connection finished. None NMREM ID Remote suite ID menu accessed. None NM
REM LOG Remote log menu accessed. None NM
REM MSG Remote message menu accessed. None NM
REM OVRWR Remote Overwrite via SIA has occurred. None M
REM RESET Remote reset menu accessed. None NM
REM TRY First remote connection attempt logged. None NM
REM WR/RD Diagnostics remote read/write None MREMOVED Engineer has Removed a module from the system. 9. T amper M
RF BATLOW RF Battery low13. Elec. Status
15. Trouble
20. FaultM
RF JAM RF signal jammed15. Trouble
20. FaultM
RF MEM! RF RIO Non Volatile Memory failed 9. T amper MRF SUPER RF Supervision failure19. RF Supervision
20. FaultM

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
D-6Event Log (cont’d)
NOTE: M = Mandatory. NM = Non-Mandatory
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.KEYPAD TEXT DESCRIPTION Trigger Event
RM ACCESS Remote Access zone activated 14. Menu Access NM
+SEC FINAL Security Final zone activated (opened) 4. Security M
-SEC FINAL Security Final zone closed (closed)4. Security
18. Zone restoralM
+SECURITY Security zone activated (opened). 4. Security M
–SECURITY Security zone de-activated (closed).4. Security
18. Zone restoralM
SET LOG Set Log zone activated (opened) when the system or group(s) is set. 16. Log zone M
SOAK TEST Zone under Soak T est (Menu Option 55) activated when the system or group(s) is Set. None NMSPARE Spare zone opened. 16. Log zone M
STANDLOW Standby time for the battery is Low. 13. Elec status MSUSP. SET Setting of system suspended None NM
SYS RESET System Reset has occurred event. 11. Reset/Cancel NM
TAG REJECTED Rejected cardTAG VALID Valid card
TA G HARD
ANTIPASSBACKHard APB
TA G S OFT
ANTIPASSBACKSoft APB
TA G REJEC T NOT
GRP MATCHRejected card – no group match
TAG REJECT GRP
SETRejected card – group set
TA G REJEC T ILL
TIMERejected card – illegal time
+TAMP C/V constant Voltage tamper event 9. T amper M
+TAMP O/C Zone changing to T amper Open Circuit (greater than 12,000 Ohm). 9. T amper M
–TAMP O/C Zone changing from T amper Open Circuit to Normal Closed (1200 to 900 Ohm).9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
TAMP RST T amper Reset of the system has occurred. 9. T amper NM
+TAMP S/C Zone changing to T amper Short Circuit (less than 800 Ohm). 9. T amper M
–TAMP S/C Zone changing from T amper Short Circuit (less than 800 Ohm). to Normal Closed (900 to 1200 Ohm).9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
+TAMPERT amper on a module activated (opened). A module is either a keypad, Galaxy RIO, T elecom Module
or RS232 Module.9. T amper M
–TAMPERT amper on a module de-activated (closed). A module is either a keypad, Galaxy RIO, T elecom
Module or RS232 Module.9. T amper
18. Zone restoralM
TEST O/P T est Outputs menu (Menu Option 32) has been accessed. None NM
TIMEOUT Timeout alarm after the Entry Time has expired. 10. Setting M
+TIMER A Timer A activated (on). None NM
–TIMER A Timer A de-activated (off). None NM
+TIMER B Timer B activated (on). None NM
–TIMER B Timer B de-activated (off). None NM
T/O-BURGL Timeout alarm after the Entry Time has expired (same as TIMEOUT but used as a SIA event). 2. Intruder M
U/S EARLY The Unset Early output has been activated before programmed time. 10. Setting NM
UNSET Unset of the system or Group(s). 10. Setting M
URGENT Urgent zone activated. 3. 24 Hours M
VIBRATION Vibration zone activated.2. Intruder
16. Log ZoneNM
VIDEO Video zone activated (opened). 2. Intruder M
VID EXIT Video Exit zone activated (opened). 2. Intruder M+WALK TEST Walk T est has occurred. 14. Menu access NM
–WALK TEST Walk T est has finished. 14. Menu access NM
WALL TAMP Wall T amper zone alarm. 9. T amper M
WRONG CD Wrong Code alarm activation (6 consecutive wrong codes). This Requires a system reset. 9. T amper M
24 HOURS 24 Hours zone activated (opened). 3. 24 Hours M

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
E-1Appendix E: Site Data Storage
Also referred to as the ‘dumpbox mode’, this function allows the Galaxy Dimension panel to emulate the
behaviour of an External RS232 module, which can then be attached to another Galaxy panel, includingLegacy panels of previous versions, to copy the programming data.
For the purposes of this document, the Galaxy panel in use is referred to as the Dimension panel. The panel to
which the Dimension panel is connected is referred to as the Legacy panel.
Preparing for Storage Mode
Prior to using the storage mode facility, the Dimension panel must be attached to the Legacy panel through theRS485 line. It will be necessary to connect the A and B wires on line 2 of the Dimension panel to the samewires on line 1 of the Legacy panel. It is not possible to substitute another line in either panel, the connectionmust be as indicated.
If the Legacy panel and the Dimension panel are each independently powered, the + and – wires on the line
should NOT be connected. It is, however, possible to power either panel from the power supply of the other.In this latter configuration, the + and – wires should be connected as normal.
While the Dimension panel is connected to the Legacy panel, the panels share the affected lines. If the Dimen-
sion panel is not itself in Storage mode, therefore, both panels will attempt to poll modules on these lines. Itshould be assumed that any modules on line 2 of the Dimension panel, or on line 1 of the Legacy panel willtherefore be inoperable while this condition persists. Once the Dimension panel enters Storage mode, thiscondition ceases to apply – the Legacy panel has full control over all modules on the line.
Enabling Storage Mode
On the Dimension panel, storage mode is enabled through the menu system as follows:
1. Enter Engineer mode.
2. Using a keypad NOT connected to line 2, enter menu 56.6.1.4=Communications.Int
RS232.Mode.Storage Mode.
3. Press ent.
The display on the keypad used to activate storage mode will change to read STORAGE MODE \ [ESC]
to abort . From this point forward, the Dimension panel will appear to the Legacy panel as an external RS232
module connected to line 1. Additionally, at this point the Dimension panel will stop polling line 2, while theLegacy panel should once again be able to poll modules on line 1.Data Storage

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
E-2Data Storage (cont’d)
Using Storage Mode
On the Legacy panel, enter and leave Engineer mode, so the External RS232 module is recognised. Then re-
enter Engineer mode to use the storage mode facilities.
On the Legacy panel, enter menu 56.2.4=Communications.RS232.Copy/Overwrite .
To copy the programming data FROM the Legacy panel TO the Grade 3 panel, select 1=Copy Site . To
copy the programming data FROM the Grade 3 panel TO the Legacy panel, select 2=Overwrite Site .
Press 1 to start the copy procedure, or 2 to abort at any time. The copy procedure can also be aborted by
pressing esc on the Dimension panel; this exits Storage mode.
NOTE: The copy procedure is started as soon as the option is selected; neither panel requests confirmation
before proceeding.
During the copy procedure, the display on the affected keypad on the Dimension panel will show a message
indicating which data elements are being copied (Users, Parameters, etc).
Leaving Storage Mode
At any time, Storage mode can be exited by pressing esc on the Dimension panel. It is recommended that the
panels be separated before this is done, although doing so is not necessary. If the panels remain connectedwhile the Dimension panel is not in Storage mode, behaviour on line 2 of the Dimension panel and line 1 of theLegacy panel cannot be guaranteed.

F-1Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
Appendix F: Specifications
Panel Specifications
Mechanical (all variants)
Enclosure (with PCB and transformer) Width: 440 mm
Height: 352 mmDepth: 90 mmWeight: 6.4 kg
Physical space for batteries 2 x 17Ah Max (not suitable for 12Ah batteries)
PCB only Width: 265 mm
Height: 120 mmDepth: 47 mmWeight: 0.3 kg
Operating temperature: -10 deg.C to + 55 deg.C
Electrical
Mains input: 230V ac (+10%/-15%) @ 50 Hz
Power supply: T ype A
GD-48 Total capacity 1.5 A (0.75 A dedicated to battery)
Operating temperature: -10 deg.C to +40 deg.C
Power supply: T ype A
GD-96/264/520 Total capacity 3 A (1.5 A dedicated to battery)
Operating temperature: -10 deg.C to +40 deg.C
Auxiliary +12V outputs: 12V nominal
GD-48 0.5 A in total
50.0 mV maximum ripple
Auxiliary +12V outputs: 12V nominal
GD-96/264/520 1.0A in total
50.0 mV maximum ripple
Fuses
AUX1 1.0A – 20 mm anti-surge
AUX2 1.0A – 20 mm anti-surge
BELL 1.0A – 20 mm anti-surge
BATT GD-48 1.0A – 20 mm anti-surgeBA TT GD-96/264/520 1.6A – 20 mm anti-surge
PSTN V .22 Modem 1200 Baud
RS232 300 – 56k programmableRS485 9600 Baud, Full Duplex, AsynchronousSpecifications

F-2Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Specifications (cont’d)
Modules W eight Order Code
Galaxy Keypad (Mark VII)……………………………………………………………. 190 g CP027
Size: ……………………………………………….. 149 x 91 x 31 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy Keyprox (Mark VII)…………………………………………………………… 190 g CP028
Size……………………………………………………………… 149 x 91 x 31mm (L x B x H)
Keypads Material ……………………………………………………………………….. PC + ABS
Keypad Colour …………………………………………………………………………… Neutral
Galaxy TouchCenter …………………………………………………………….. 500 g CP040
Size……………………………………………………. 182 x 128 x 34 mm (L x B x H)
MAX3 (Boxed)……………………………………………………………………………. 267 g MX03
Size…………………………………………………………… 185 x 120 x 48 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy RIO (Boxed) ………………………………………………………………………300 g C072
Size: …………………………………………………………….150 x 162 x 39 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy RF RIO (Boxed) …………………………………………………………. 270 g C076
Size……………………………………………………. 150 x 162 x 39 mm (L x B x H)
RS232 Module (Boxed) ……………………………………………………………….. 823 g E054
Size: …………………………………………………………… 180 x 155 x 35 mm (L x B x H)
Door Control module (Boxed) No PSU ……………………………………….. 270g C080
Size………………………………………………………….. 150 x 162 x 39 mm (L x B x H)
Door Control module (Boxed) with PSU ……………………………………….. 300g C081
Size………………………………………………………….. 150 x 162 x 39 mm (L x B x H)
Line Expander …………………………………………………………………………….. 820g A226
Size: …………………………………………………………… 180 x 155 x 35 mm (L x B x H)
Doorguard …………………………………………………………………………………… 995g C075
Size: …………………………………………………………… 150 x 185 x 40 mm (L x B x H)
Printer Interface (6-Way DIN Plug) ……………………………………………… 120 g A134
Printer Interface (25-Way D Plug) ……………………………………………….. 130 g A161
Box Size: …………………………………………………….. 75 x 52 x 28 mm (L x B x H)Cable Size: ………… 2m for 4-Way IDC, and 0.3m for 6-Way/25-Way plug.
PCBs W eight Order Code
2-75A Power Block ……………………………………………………………………… 163 g A270
Size: ……………………………………………………………115 x 102 x 33 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy Power RIO Control……………………………………………………………. 118 g A250
Size: ……………………………………………………………120 x 120 x 43 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy Power Unit Control…………………………………………………………… 118 g A251
Size: ……………………………………………………………120 x 120 x 43 mm (L x B x H)
PSU Control…………………………………………………………………………………. 118 g A252
Size: ……………………………………………………………120 x 120 x 43 mm(L x B x H)

F-3Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Specifications (cont’d)
PCBs W eight Order Code
GD-48………………………………………………………………………………. 320 g C048
Size:…………………………………………………………….265 x 120 x 50 mm (L x B x H)
GD-96 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 378 g C096
Size:……………………………………………………………265 x 120 x 50 mm (L x B x H)
GD-264 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 378 g C264
Size:……………………………………………………………265 x 120 x 50 mm (L x B x H)
GD-520 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 378 g C520
Size:……………………………………………………………265 x 120 x 50 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy RIO ……………………………………………………………………. ……. 92 g A158
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 121 x 90 x 15 mm (L x B x H)
Galaxy RF RIO ……………………………………………………………….. ……. 63 g A215
Size: ………………………………………………………………….. 121 x 97 x 12 mm (L x B x H)
RS232 … ……………………………………………………………………………………… 124 g A169
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 135 x 90 x 17 mm (L x B x H)
Telecom ………………………………………………………………………… ……. 90 g E062
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 121 x 90 x 20 mm (L x B x H)
Ethernet ………………………………………………………………………… ……. 56 g E080
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 121 x 90 x 15mm (L x B x H)
ISDN ……………………………………………………………………………. …..114 g A211
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 121 x 90 x 15 mm (L x B x H)
Audio Interface Module …………………………………………………. …..135 g
Size: …………………………………………………………………… 121 x 122 x 17 mm (L x B x H)
Note: The above weights and order codes are from the populated Printed Circuit Board (PCB) only.

F-4Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
Table F-1 Current Consumption
Note 1: Measured with no load on zone input
Note 2: Not communicatingSpecifications (cont’d)
Device Quiescent Current
(mA)Device Quiescent Current
(mA)
GD-48 100 4-Way Relay Interface
(C037)160
GD-96 110 General Purpose
Relay Interface (A060)40
GD-264 110 Galaxy Mk 7 (LCD)
Keypad (P037-02)70
GD-520 150 Key Prox (C038-02) 90
Galaxy RIO (C072)
(Note 1)30 Touch Center
(CP040-02)105
RF RIO (C076) 55 Printer Interface
(A134/A161)100
Power RIO (P026) 100 Doorguard (C075) 10
T elecom Module (E062)
(Note 2)45 Max 3 Reader (MX03) 35
Audio Interface Module
(C084)60 MicroMAX (MX11) 25
RS232 Module (E054,
E055)50 Door Control Module
(C080)15
MUX Module (C085) 60 ISDN Module (A211) 40
Speaker-mic Unit
(TP2-800GY)10 Ethernet (E080-2) 155

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
G-1Appendix G: Declaration of Conformity
Compliance and Approvals
The Galaxy Dimension control panels are compatible with the relevant parts of the following standards:
• PD6662:2003 Scheme for the application of European Standards for intruder alarm
systems.
• EN50131-1:2003 Draft 9d Alarm systems – Intrusion systems – General requirements (grade 3).
• TS50131-3 Alarm systems – Intrusion systems: Part 3 Control and indicating
equipment (grade 3).
• prEN50131-5-3 Alarm systems – Intrusion systems: Part 5-3 systems using wire-free
interconnections (grade 2).
• EN50131-6:1998 Alarm systems – Intrusion systems – Power supplies (grade 3).
• EN50136-1-1:1998 Alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems and equipment – General
requirements for alarm transmission systems.
• EN50136-1-3:1998 Alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems and equipment –
Requirementsf or systems with digital communicators using the publicswitched telephone network.
• EN50136-2-1:1998 Alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems and equipment – General
requirements for alarm transmission equipment.
• EN50136-2-3:1998 Alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems and equipment –
Requirements for equipment used in systems with digital communicatorsusing the public switched telephone network.
• CE Standards, including all EN safety and EMC standards.
• R&TTE 99/5/EC
• BS6799:1986 Code of practice for wire-free intruder alarm systems.
• DD243:2002 Installation and configuration of intruder alarm systems designed to
generate confirmed alarm conditions – code of practice.
• BSIA Guidelines for Remote Maintenance to systems installed to EN50131-1Approvals

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
G-2Approvals (cont’d)
EN50131 Compliance
This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with PD6662: 2004 and EN50131-1: 2006
Security Grade: 3Environmental Class: IIPower Supply Type: A
The built-in Telecom module is for Remote Servicing use only on Grade 3 systems. An external Grade 3
communicator or Ethernet module must be used for alarm signalling.
The built-in Telecom module can be used for alarm signalling on Grade 2 systems:
Alarm Transmission System: 2 (options A, B, C & X)
This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with EN50131-1: 1997
Security Grade: 2Environmental Class: IIAlarm Transmission System: 2 (options D2, T2, A2, S0, I0)Power Supply Type: A
PD6662 Compliance
This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with PD6662: 2004 at grade 3 and environ-mental class II.
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) approval
The equipment has been approved to Council Decision 98/482/EC for Pan -European single terminal connec-tion to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individualPSTNs provided in different countries the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance ofsuccessful operation on every PSTN network termination point.In the event of problems contact the equipment supplier in the first instance.The Galaxy is designed to interwork with the following networks:Austria France Italy Norway Switzerland
Belgium Greece Liechtenstein Portugal United Kingdom
Denmark Iceland Luxembourg Spain * Germany
Finland Ireland The Netherlands Sweden
* May have interworking difficulties.
NOTE: Contact the equipment supplier before using the Galaxy on any network not listed.

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
H-1Appendix H: Parts List IndexParts List Index
Product Name UK Pa rt No Comments

Replacement PCB,s

GD-48 PCB
GD-96 PCB
GD-264 PCB
GD-520 PCB With expander

Accessories
Doorguard C075 Door isolation
Unit
Doorguard common key C075C All use same
key
Engineer key pad cable A136
Twisted pair 4-core cable W002
Serial Peripheral interface
Key A227

PSU’s

Galaxy Power Unit P025
Galaxy Power RI O P026
EN G3 PSU Stand-alone P027
2-75A Power Block A270 Spare PCB
Galaxy Power RI O
Control PCB A250 Spare PCB
Galaxy Power Unit
Co ntr ol A251 Spare PCB
PSU Cont rol A252 Spare PCB

Keypad/KeyProx
Galaxy Mk7 Keypad CP037 With volume
control
Galaxy Mk7 KeyProx CP038 ASK format with
volume control
Galaxy KeyProx HID CP028-01-H-B ASK/HID format
ASK prox card clamshell YX0-0005 Credit card
HI D prox card YX0-0006 Credit card
ASK Keytag YX0-0004 Tear drop
ASK Grey Fob YX0-0020
Touch Center CP040

Remote Modules
RI O ( PCB ) A158 -B
RI O ( boxed ) C0 72
Telecom Module E062-01
RS232 Module E055
RS232 Module (boxed) E054
Printer Interface A134 6 pin DIN
connector
Printer Interface A161 25 way sub D
connector
ISDN Module E077
Ethernet Module E080-2
RF RIO (bo xed) C0 76
RF RIO (PCB) A215
Audio Controller C 080
Speaker-m ic Unit T P2-800GY

Access Control
MA X Read er MX0 1
MAX Flush mounting kit MX02
MAX3 Proximit y Reader MX03
MAX3 vandal resistant
cover MX0 3- VRC
MAX3 extension read
head MX0 3- ERH
MAX3 hand-held
programmer MX0 3- HP
MAX3 Mounting plate MX03-MP
MAX card with magnetic
stripe YX0-0001

Product Name UK Pa rt No Comments

MAX card YX0-0002
MAX keytag YX0-0004
MA X pr og ra mmin g
module YX0-0007
Door Cont rol module C080
Door Cont rol Module with
PCU C081
SPI Key Programmer C087

Software Packages:
Remote Servicing Suite
Licencing Kit R030 KIT
Upgrade R030-CD
Licence Kit (Dongle) R031-01-KI T
Upgrade (Dongle) R031-CD

User Management Suite
Licence Kit R032-01-KI T
Upgrade R032-CD
Licence Kit (Dongle) R033-01-KI T
Upgrade (Dongle) R033-CD

Literature
Galaxy Dimension
Installer manual IE1-0063
Galaxy Dimension User
Guide IU 1-0063
Galaxy Dimension Quick
Use r Gui de IG1-0064
Galaxy Dimension Quick
Start Guide IG1-0063
Door Cont rol Module
Instructions II1-0800
Audio Cont roller
Instructions II1-0801
Touch Center I nstructions II1-0802
Touch Center User Guide II8-0803

Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
H-2

1Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
Index
A
Access Control 5-1
Addressing the RF RIO 3-5Appendix A: Library A-1Appendix B: SIA and
Contact ID Event Codes B-1
Appendix C: SIA Event
Structure C-1
Appendix D: Event Log D-1Appendix E: Site Data E-1Appendix F: Specifications F-1Appendix G: Declaration of Conformity G-1Appendix H: Parts List
Index H-1
Audio Interface Module 3-13
B
Battery Start-up 2-7
C
Configuring the RF RIO 3-6
Configuring the RIO 3-2Connecting Additional
Telecoms apparatus 2-6
Connecting the Galaxy
Dimension to the PSTN 2-5
Connecting the RIO 3-2Connecting the RF RIO 3-4Configuring the RF RIO 3-6
D
Door Control Module 5-2
E
Engineer Mode 6-2Ethernet Module 3-12
Event Monitoring 3-17
F
Full Menu 6-1
G
Galaxy Mk7 Keypad 4-1
Galaxy Keyprox 4-8
H
I
Introduction 1-1
ISDN Module 3-11
JK
Keypad/Keyprox Installation
Procedure 4-2
Keypad/Keyprox Operation4-5
L
Line Monitoring 2-6
M
MAX35-7
Memory 2-8Menu options 6-1Menu Access 6-1Mux Module 3-15
N
O
On-board P S U 2-7
Option 11–Omit Zones 6-11
Option 12–Timed Set 6-13
Option 13–Part Set 6-13
Option 14–Forced Set 6-13
Option 15–Chime 6-13
Option 16–Instant Set 6-13
Option 17–Silent Part 6-14
Option 18–Home Set 6-14
Option 19–All Set 6-14
Option 21–Display Zones 6-15
Option 22–Display log 6-16
Option 23–System 6-17
Option 24–Print 6-18
Option 25–Access Doors 6-19
Option 31–Walk Test 6-23
Option 32–Outputs 6-25
Option 41–Time/Date 6-26
Option 42–Codes 6-27
Option 43–Summer 6-38
Option 44–Trace 6-38
Option 45–Timer control 6-39
Option 46–Group Omit 6-43
Option 47–Remote Access 6-44
Option 48–Engineer Access 6-50
Option 51–Parameters 6-51
Option 52–Program Zones 6-71
Option 53–Program
Outputs 6-87
Option 54–Links 6-104
Option 55–Soak 6-107
Option 56 –
Communications 6-108
Option 57–System Print 6-151
Option 58–Keypad 6-152
Option 59–Quick Menu 6-155
Option 61–Diagnostics 6-156
Option 62–Full Test 6-159
Option 63–Options 6-160
Option 64–Assemble Zone 6-164Option 65–Timers 6-168
Option 66– Pre-checks 6-175
Option 67–Remote Reset 6-176
Option 68–Menu Access 6-177
Option 69–Integrated
Access Control 6-178
Option 71–SPI Key 6-192
Outputs 2-16
Output Applications 2-17
P
PCB Layout 2-2
Peripherals 3-1Power Supply Unit 3-7Power Consumption 4-1Printer Interface Module 3-10
Q
Quick Setup 1-3
Quick Menu 6-1
R
Remote Servicing Suite 3-17
RF RIO 3-4RF RIO Programming 3-6RIO Outputs 3-3RS 485 Data Communication
Bus (AB Lines) 2-8
RS485 Expansion module 2-3RS485 Wiring
Configurations 2-8
RS485 Wiring
Recommendations 2-9
S
Self Diagnostics 4-5Setting Options 6-5SPI Header 2-19
Stand-by Battery 2-7System Architecture 2-1System Installation
and Wiring 2-4
System Operation 6-1
T
Time Schedules 5-1Touch Center 4-9Trigger header 2-18
U
User and Access Templates 5-1
User Management Suite 3-17
V
Variants 1-1Index

2Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
W
Wiring Keypad/Keyprox 4-2
Wiring Keyswitches 2-15
Wiring Multiple Detectors 2-15
Wiring Terminator Buttons 2-16
Wiring Zones 2-13
X
YZ
Zones 2-11
Zone addresses 2-11Index (cont’d)

3Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual

4Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual
Honeywell Security (UK 64)
Newhouse Industrial EstateMotherwellLanarkshireML1 5SBUK
© Copyright Honeywell Security IE1-0063 Rev 1.0